Home

LVIS User Manual

1. eese 193 Example 4 Using text mapping and Date Control es 195 16 Appendix B Solutions incre roten po bone oo ao ooo po ebat sors veo Sore saevus ar ions ce L98 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 Implementing Menus eres eene eene eee en staat tn stint ns senses sense tn netus sense tn 198 16 11 Rab Menus sissies ee Saves etl eles an RR RR ES 198 16 12 Ico Menus en nt e PRU RE Pie D eds 200 16 1 3 Taskbat Men certe reta eter lea etate eie 201 16 1 4 Bitmap Menu eem eee dea ee n edd 201 Light Control m P 202 EYIlCimBDOUIT 203 Sunblind Dem se siniset 203 Miu 204 Counter au 205 17 Revision HISEOEY ice ie pinieie ene ke ehe beh enactue le endete moe etur eeu Po eese nieto n ZT LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 10 LOYTEC 1 Introduction 1 1 What is L VIS Version 4 5 L Vi S DLOYTEC LOYTEC Visualization networks under control L VIS is a highly flexible and easy to configure device to display and control data in BACnet and CEA 709 networks The L VIS configuration software can be run as a standalone program as well as an LNS plug in and supports the use of both static and dynamic network variables in a project to allow easy integration in any kin
2. items Pages Comro 16 Dataponts4l Sue 19218 Figure 24 Text Watch project LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 198 LOYTEC 16 Appendix B Solutions This section describes solutions for some standard applications The solution projects can be found in the Projects directory of the L VIS configuration software install directory 16 1 Implementing Menus By default the user can navigate in a project using the main menu submenus and push and drag operations With the help of bitmap controls text controls and action objects it is also possible to implement alternative ways to navigate inside an L VIS project The project Menu examplel lcp shows different solutions 16 1 1 Tab Menus To switch between multiple pages a tab menu can be implemented using bitmap controls text controls and action objects see Figure 25 p y Bag fie Os se aed Statue Subsystem 1 LVIS ONNET Usage Page Root Menu Tab Menus Tab Menus Sub Tab Menu Rem Page 1 General Common Properies Mapping Data Port Color Meru Page Tea _ gt Screen Coordinates Lott Width F Te 7 Hegh TE Binap e Oeu NT umo rodu Pase 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Menus2 tems Pogos i2 Conso 118 Datapoints 3 Sue 25108 Figure 25 Page navigation using Tabs Each page contains four bitmap controls There are two types of bitmaps one fo
3. CNIP LED LVIS 3E1 xx MSTP LED LVIS ME2xx Pressing the Status button sends out a service pin message on the IP 852 or the FT 10 LPT 10 channel CEA 709 models or send out an I Am message BACnet models To reset the device to factory defaults hold the status button pressed while the unit boots and release the button within a few seconds when all interface LEDs light up orange Behind the small hole next to the status button is the reset button Use a pin to reach the reset button in order to hard reset the device Doing this may cause trend log data or other persistent data to be lost or reverted back to earlier data To avoid data loss reset the device via the configuration software or the setup menu command page The power LED lights up green as soon as power is connected The status LED lights up red when the internal persistent storage device is accessed Also on CEA 709 models operated on an FT 10 LPT 10 channel this LED indicates the node status The LED is off if the node is configured online and flashing red with a period of 1 Hz if the node is in the un configured state This LED indicates incoming and outgoing data packets on the currently active communications channel Only packets which are addressed to the device are shown The LINK ETH LED indicates a successful Ethernet link The ACT ETH LED shows activity on the Ethernet network The ONLINE LED lights up green if the node is in the config
4. Canines Background of the graph area which is the rectangular area spawned by the value and time axis Color of the background outside the graph If the transparent check box Background is set all pixels using this color will be transparent Table 14 Color assignment for trend controls To set the color of the individual curves select a data point and switch to the Color property page You can now set the color of all curves which may be generated by this data point Color Name Element to which the color applies Minimum Value Color for the minimum curve if enabled Average Value Color for the average curve if enabled Maximum Value Color for the maximum curve if enabled Color to indicate that the current value of a curve is out of range If the value axis is adjusted to fit the real value will be shown that is a limited value axis does not affect the actual data which is recorded Out Of Range Table 15 Color assignment for trend curves Apart from the colors and the font for the scale which can be set on the Common Properties page all other properties are set on the Trend Control property page This page is divided in 4 sections which are described below On the top left the Value Axis can be configured Set the desired Range for this axis and enable or disable the Tick Marks and or the Scale Labels Optionally a second range Range 2 can be configured and enabled via the option S
5. LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 120 LOYTEC suffix Read or Write will be appended to this name to identify the read and the write point The second is the name of the register itself You may leave either one or even both names empty in which case a suitable default will be chosen 9 3 2 Local Network Variable CEA 709 For CEA 709 models local network objects refer to local network variables on the L VIS device If there are dynamic NVs present on the device suitable data objects will be created automatically All manually created objects will therefore create additional static network variables on the device NOTE Adding removing or otherwise changing the static network variables of a CEA 709 device may have an impact on the integration of the device in your network The configuration software will automatically determine if your changes need special attention and warn you if the required modifications cannot be made automatically Refer to section 2 2 1 for more information on this topic To create a new static NV select the folder named Local NVs and use the New button or the context menu to add a new data object A new dialog will open and request the required information to create the new NV which is e Datapoint Name Enter a name for the data object If this is left blank the data objects name will be derived from the programmatic name of the network variable e Programmatic Name The programmatic na
6. e In the mail account configuration dialog the enable checkbox must be set and a name or IP address of an SMTP server must be entered e tis desirable to use some form of time synchronization on the L VIS device in order to provide correct time stamps when building and delivering mails Some mail clients tend to sort incoming mails by origin date not date of reception which could cause confusion if the date and time of the device are wrong If the SMTP server requires authentication set the option Enable user authentication and enter a user name and password Other types of authentication such as SSL TLS or POP before SMTP are currently not available and are usually only required by free mail service providers which have no other way of authenticating their users Standard ISP mail service usually authenticates the user just by IP address since the address was assigned by the ISP and therefore identifies the user as being a customer of the ISP Additional configuration data to fill out includes the sender address which is used in all mails originating from this device an optional reply to address the maximum number of delivery attempts per mail and the time between delivery attempts If the test receiver address is filled out the system command to send a test mail may be used to perform a basic check of the mail system NOTE All failed mail delivery attempts are logged to the system log Upload the system log through the c
7. Version 4 5 In this mode the communication channel is CEA 709 via a LOYTEC NIC such as a NIC USB NIC PCI or NIC 852 The device must first be commissioned assigned a network address either by using the same network management tool as used for the other nodes in the network or by entering a suitable unused address in the CEA 709 setup menu In the connection dialog of the configuration software a suitable unused subnet node address must be entered for the network interface card of the PC The address of the device may either be entered manually as well or can be detected automatically by either entering the unique node ID or by pressing the status button on the device Once the address is known LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 16 LOYTEC the connection can be given a name and saved just like the TCP IP connections so that the procedure is only necessary when the address of the device changes Connecting via CEA 709 is most suitable when the device is not connected to the IP network and a non LNS network management tool is used for integration ADVANTAGES LIMITS Works even when the device is not connected to an IP network thus no need to set up TCP IP settings for the device Download is faster compared to LNS connections due to an optimized file transfer protocol Works independent of the used network management tool Only works when the device is commissioned A download of a new project which changes t
8. and the s number A number following the sign forces a field with for the string of at least the given amount of characters If the string is shorter it is padded with white space at the left right justified within the given field A dash preceding the field width means the string should be left justified inside the field padded to the right Text Control lt number gt A decimal point followed by a number is interpreted as the maximum length of the resulting string Format string which may contain one placeholder for a floating point value for example f og or e To display a hexadecimal value the placeholder x may be used together with the option Convert Data Point Value to Integer which is available on the Numeric Control property Numeric Control page detailed below There are a number of format modifiers available for the expert user to tailor the output of the numeric control Novice users may use the format string wizard on the Numeric Control property page to construct a suitable format string without knowledge of the details Date Time format string which may contain a number of different placeholders to display date and time in textual form The format string conforms to the ANSI C strftime function and is detailed in the appendix of this document On the property page of the Date Time Control a format string wizard is available for the user to create a correct date time format string without knowle
9. e Add page action to move one level up This option adds an action to each generated page which links to the first page of the parent data point hierarchy This action triggers whenever the user touches the page somewhere outside an input control for example on a data point name or an unused area of the page This allows navigation back to the previous level without opening the menu e Add template instance to each page This option instructs the page generator to add an instance of a template to each of the generated pages The name of the desired template is entered in the text field below and defaults to Auto Page If a template by this name is found it is used Otherwise a new empty template is generated and instantiated on each page Such a template can be used to add a navigation bar or other static design elements to the automatically created pages Once the desired options are set the project builder can be started by pressing the Start button Note that this button will be available only when the current settings would actually generate content As long as no data point folder is selected or a folder without sub folders Is selected and the generator was called on a menu object the button will be deactivated 14 7 2 Page Design Version 4 5 Any new object created by the project builder will be created with the currently defined defaults for the respective object In most cases it will be required to change these defaults from
10. Examples This section shows how to use the different controls in a sample project The project can be found in the Projects directory of the L VIS configuration software install directory Users Manual Color lcp 15 1 Example 1 Working with Structured Network Variables This example describes how to work with structured network variables like SNVT switch It explains how structured input and output network variables can be used with different controls This example assumes that a dynamic input variable of type SNVT_ switch nviSwitch and a dynamic output network variable of type SNVT switch nvoSwitch is already present on the node We will use the output variable to update the value on the network and will use the input variable as a feedback value from the network The example explains how to use this setup with different controls 15 1 1 Text control Version 4 5 With this example we will be able to show the state of a SNVT switch e g a lamp and control the state from the L VIS device using a text control Text controls are typically used to display a complex text or to allow input where the user can select between several different input strings e g HIGH MID LOW To use the SNVT switch variables with a text control perform the following steps The control only changes the state value of the output network variable and fixes the value element of the network variable to 100 e Add a text control to the page e Inthe c
11. Polygon drawings support shapes which have crossing lines The properties of the drawing object are set on the combined Text Bitmap Drawing property page For the visual appearance the following properties are available e 3D Outline Available for rectangles and circles defines that the object should be drawn with a 3D outline Line color 1 is used as the highlight color whereas line color 2 is used as the shadow color similar to other controls supporting the 3D effect LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 86 LOYTEC e Filled Available for rectangles circles and polygon drawings defines that the object should be filled with the color specified as the container color rather than the background color To draw a frame only leave this option unchecked and make sure the transparent background option on the Color property page is checked e Line Width Defines the line with used to draw the lines of a line or polygon drawing and the outline of a rectangle or circle e Corner Radius Available for rectangles defines the desired corner radius for a rounded rectangle Leave this value at zero to disable rounded corners Note that this value defines the radius of the outer edge of the rectangles outline The resulting inner radius depends on the selected line width The following colors may be set for drawing controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Lines Line color of lines and
12. The individual parameters work as follows e MinSend At least the specified amount of time has to pass between two successive update messages on the network If the device delivers mode updates than this intermediate values will not be sent out until the minimum send time has passed at which time the current most recent value is sent out e MaxSend If this amount of time has passed without any updates usually because the value did not change in the meantime then the current value will be sent out This is commonly described as a heartbeat function used to allow the receiver to detect if the sender is still alive and just not sending new information because there is none or if the sender has died and therefore no new data is received e PollTime Can work as a simple poll interval or as a receive timeout Usually used as receive timeout for bound NVs on CEA 709 devices and otherwise used as poll cycle time If used as a receive timeout it specifies the amount of time after which the device sends out a poll request if no value update was received As a poll cycle it specifies the amount of time after which a periodic poll request should be sent out independent of any updates which might have been received in the mean time 8 7 Mapping Table Version 4 5 The mapping table is used to map values of numeric data points to text strings bitmaps and or colors The mapping table object controls the display of text controls bitmap
13. To change a color click on the corresponding color button and select the new color from the dialog NOTE Most colors are named such that it is clear to which element of an object the color applies like Text Background Selection and similar Depending on the selected object the naming of the colors will change accordingly How the available colors are used by a particular object can be found in the objects documentation The right side of the color page allows setting the current color scheme for multiple objects at once Applying a color scheme to multiple object means that all colors which are set in the color scheme will be changed in the object if the object supports this particular color while all colors which are unset in the color scheme will remain unchanged NOTE This allows changing individual colors only for example you may change the background of all controls on a page without changing any of the other colors There are two modes of operation available right now e Apply to all sub objects This mode will apply the color scheme to all sub objects of the currently selected object This is used to control the color design of the whole project root menu selected or individual pages a page selected e Apply to all objects of this type This mode will search all objects of the same type and with the same parent as the currently selected object for example 1f you select an item of a menu and use this mode
14. based on data point values allowing implementation of pop up panels Template system for easy reuse of similar building blocks with automatic rerouting of data points to a different data set for each instance and limited possibility for individual changes of position color or other properties at each template instance Input voltage 24V AC or DC The LVIS 3E100 and LVIS 3E11x models CEA 709 also provide Version 4 5 Up to 1000 network variables and alias variables 524 address table entries Up to 100 LonMark scheduler objects Each scheduler object may control up to 64 data points in 107 daily schedules and manage up to 1000 entries in the time value table Up to 256 value templates may be defined for each scheduler with a total data size of up to IkB per value template An optional LonMark calendar object defining exception days for the local schedulers The calendar object supports up to 100 date patterns with a total of up to 1000 date entries Optional alarm server functionality provided by a SNVT alarm 2 output NV contained in the node object of the device FT 10 LPT 10 or Ethernet IP852 operation selectable via a jumper on the device or via a setting in the device configuration When in FT 10 mode the device can still be reached via its Ethernet port for fast project download A lamp actuator object to control the backlight from the network This object was used to control the internal relay on the older LVIS 3EC
15. bmp e Icons ico e Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG jpg e Tagged Image File Format TIFF tif e Portable Network Graphics PNG png e Multiple Image Network Graphics MNG mng e Scalable Vector Graphics SVG svg e Graphics Interchange Format GIF gif The file open dialog automatically shows all supported graphic files it finds in the directory Unsupported files are hidden for example Visio Corel Draw or Auto CAD proprietary LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 179 LOYTEC vector drawing files which cannot be imported directly Use the programs export function to save the image in SVG or PNG format for use in the L Vis project 14 16 Using Sounds The 12 inch and 15 inch L Vis devices as well as recent versions of the LWEB 800 OPC client software support the playback of sounds and streaming of MP3 data web radio To start and stop sound playback new actions were introduced The play action is linked to a sound loaded from disk or defined by a URL To manage the sounds defined in the project and link sounds to actions a sound manager dialog is used similar to the image manager dialog The dialog can be opened from the Edit menu via the command Sounds or by pressing the Select button on the action property page to select the sound to play back To add new sounds use the Add File or Add URL buttons depending on the type of sound you want to add Sound files loaded from disk are
16. expression nvi nvo _ 0 9 will match the original name nviRoomTemp 2 and assign the substrings nvi to 0 RoomTemp to X1 and 2 to M2 so that the new name when using a template of O 1 3 will become nviRoomTemp 3 Please refer to section 14 18 3 for a complete description of the regular expression syntax Below the naming rule settings is a preview window which shows a preview of the resulting names and the number of matches in real time 7 2 5 2 Rename Data Source This operation allows batch renaming of data sources the actual register NV or server object name All data sources which are mentioned in the selected entries will be considered for renaming If a particular source is actually renamed depends on the given naming rules as described in the previous section NOTE Renaming a data source does not reassign any references to that source that is all data point objects which referenced the original data source will reference the same renamed data source after this operation To actually reassign data points to different data sources use the reassign or duplicate and reassign operations explained below 7 2 5 3 Select Data Source This operation is available 1f all selected entries reference the same data source It allows using the data point manager window to select a replacement source which must be of compatible type same type and direction as the original source 7 2 5 4 Reassign Data
17. though the schedule control Touch the preset name on the time table entry for which you want a new preset and select the command value from the dropdown box Enter the desired value for the new preset using the keypad A new preset will be created for the given value and assigned to the entry on which the operation was executed NOTE Do not confuse this operation with the operation of changing the values assigned to an existing value preset This operation will actually create a new independent value preset and assign it to the selected time table entry not affecting any other entries Only if a preset for the requested value already exists the existing preset is used This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the value command in the dropdown box is not selectable 6 2 1 9 Add and Remove Entries To add a new entry to a time table select the insert command on the last line after the last entry in the list A new entry will appear with the default time 23 00 and the first available value preset Now edit the new entry as described earlier change the time and the value preset This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the control does not react to a touch of the insert line NOTE The scheduler unit may report a restricted capacity for entries in the time table If this limit is reached the control will not allow any further insert operations To remove an entry from the time tabl
18. units and other information Also shown is the unique ID of the referenced data object by which the object may be located in the data point management window for further inspection or modification In the Data Point Update Flags section the value update mode is specified There are three basic modes available together with some additional options e No Update This means that this data point will not request the underlying data object to be updated even when the value on the control side changes Useful if this data point represents one element of a structured data object and updates to this element should not cause the complete object to be transmitted on the network e Focus Loss This update mode transmits the new value only when the input control returned focus and left input mode that is when the final value is known Intermediate values which are for example generated by moving the bar of a bar control around are not immediately transmitted Use this option for push button mode see section 8 5 3 for more information e Immediate All values are immediately transmitted to the underlying data object This provides direct feedback to the user while the control is still in input mode and the user is still modifying the value Currently really only useful for bar controls and controls which use the keypad since the keypad has and keys which send out intermediate values e System Startup The checkbox System Startup should
19. you can change the colors of all items in THIS menu without affecting other menus If you select a text control on a page you can use this mode to change the color of all text controls on THIS page and so on NOTE If the device firmware is older than 4 2 0 all color settings done on this page will be limited to the 256 color VGA palette even for RGB capable devices Starting with firmware 4 2 0 on RGB devices colors can be selected from a new RGB color selection dialog which also includes an input field to set the transparency of the color This field is available as a numeric value only where 0 means transparent and 255 opaque Note that the color setting of fully transparent black all values 0 has a special meaning It indicates that this value is unset and will be displayed as a black cross Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 60 LOYTEC 8 Object Description 8 1 Introduction Every L VIS project is built using a number of different objects Each of the objects has a relatively simple function To build a complex project the simple objects are put together and organized in an object tree which 1s shown in the tree view of the configuration software Interactions between the objects are defined by their location in this object tree for example a menu item object will always display a menu item on the device but it depends on the location of the object in the tree in which menu and at which positi
20. 1 MonitorSets 0 Bereit LVISDemo OnNet 01 03 2004 12 09 Figure 13 Create new network variable In the Netzwerk Variable dialog Figure 14 select the device template Ger tevorlage and the network variable to which the new dynamic network variable will be connected Allgemein Netzwerk Variable Mere Name nviswitch Variabl ens i Anzahl i Urpsrungs Netzwerk Variable Ger tevorlage SCHALTER m Variablen dieser Ger tevorlage T n 36 a nvoStatus 93 nvoAlarm 88 e nvoSwitch e nciLocation Richtung der neuen Netzwerk Variable Eingang gt OK Abbrechen bernehmen Figure 14 New network variable dialog The dynamic network variable will get attributes like the SNVT type from this network variable Select the direction of the new dynamic network variable and enter a name for the network variable Finally click on OK to confirm the creation of the new network variable Figure 15 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 154 LOYTEC W ALEX 3 0 L ISDemo Subsystem 1 L I5 L IS 1 nviSwitch E 18 x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Extras Fenster 2 aurick v gt Ep Taordner X amp x oe E Pfad A LVISDemo Subsystem 1 LVIS L VIS 1 nviSwitch zl Arbeitsplatz x y ey Projekte 1 E dl LVISDemo Verbindungen 0 Struktur Elemente 0 g Untersysteme 1 E Subsystem 1
21. 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 Binding Managementt cscssscssscssscssssssccssccesessseesssssssesssesssesssesssesessseseees 146 XIE ExpDOrt neo netter te trrter cssnsuosissdenavevsnsnssdesnaconcsincesaiesdecevesinseasics 146 Ip SI I 147 13 222 Online ic e NE RUE ENSe E ae 147 CEA 709 1 A Operation scccccssesssersseccserescosserssessserscecserssescversseosserssessvorsdessserses 147 Dynamic Network Variables eee eee eee eee enne tn stent nne n nennen netu sen 147 11 4 1 LonMaker Network Management Tool sese 147 IB AI ces cies ccs 150 IY Alexei teca RO E 151 Built in LONMARK Objects sssssssssssssssssnsesssssssasssnceascsecsnseasccasensesncesesses 154 VA Selo Timer Object teens RES RU n e RU I Ets 154 11 5 2 Switch Object ERREUR metaverse 154 11 5 3 Relay LCD Backlight control seen 155 11 5 4 HVAC Temperature Sensor nennen 156 12 Special Functions BA Cnet c ceeeeeee eee eese ee eee eene ee ensseeessseesseces 157 12 1 12 2 EDE Export of BACnet Objects eeeeeeee eese eee ee seen etnies nnn natns etna tn 157 BACnet Network Settings eere eee eee eee eee eese atenta sense nsn netus etn se tn 157 13 Project Settings wivccscacssdeassaseusvessncdssusswaseas ec eh dsseosusssusapsesaasossensvecnenssdapsverssses D OO 13 1 Basic Settings M 1
22. 22 Quick Start Tutorial BACnet eee e eee ee eese esee een een seen asta se tnn etna 22 2 4 1 Add the device to the network en 22 2 4 2 Start the L VIS Configuration Software ssessssssseseeee 23 2 4 3 Create Data Points endet indies cua nis dented Oen E 23 2 4 4 Create Menu Structure and Pages ccceccsseesseeeeseceeseeeeeeeceteenseenseenees 24 2 4 5 Add Controls to the Page sse 25 2 4 6 Connect the D ta Points ee eee merry REP 25 2 4 7 Write the Project to the L VIS device sssssssseseeeee 26 2 4 5 Test the Project ocn der eh eR ANS vede 26 3 Mechanical Installation e eeee eee eee eene eene neos eese sessss see eeeesessssssssss DO 3 1 32 Dimensions and Mounting eee eee eee ee seen seen ns tn netus tuse tn soto stan 28 Theft Protectio oae ossessi eto Pereeen er eret va ner eoesore teta Prep venen ee eide eisie 28 4 Electrical Installation ccscccscccossscssesscscccccssccncenccsccccossccncenccscccoosscences DO 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 Connection diagram eese eee ee eee esee eese sensns vo ssuss trevos setas tosta seses 29 Electrical Characteristics LVIS 3E100 ME200 eere 29 Electrical Characteristics LVIS 3E11x ME21x eeeeeeeeee eene 29 Touch Panel Cleaning Instructions eeeeee esee eee eee eene enne tn nete nota
23. Action select Clear on Alarm Leave and select the desired output value from the dropdown list at the right This time the Value for Alarm Clear box will be active while the others will be grayed out This method is the correct way of doing it but it may be counter intuitive Many people choose Below Min for the alarm condition because they want something to happen when the temperature falls below T2 However the condition specified here is always the Alarm Condition It defines the conditions under which the alarm is considered to be SET It does not define when something will happen This is done using the Action setting The alarm condition in this example is still above a certain temperature and action will be taken when this alarm condition is CLEARED e g the device has cooled down enough Now if this seems unreasonable here is an alternative approach You may configure the CLEAR data point using the alarm condition Below Min and enter T2 as the minimum value of the Data Point Value Range Since you now defined below T2 as the alarm condition you need to take action when the alarm is SET so the action must be Set on Alarm Enter Now select the desired output value from the Value for Alarm Set Action dropdown list This value will represent the cleared alarm since the temperature now is below T2 Overall this way seems more awkward than the first because the alarm output is cleared by causing an alarm condition 8 11 2 2 Al
24. Choose a color on which your text color is readable and which is different from the container color Usually a color slightly darker than the container color works best Only available in extended UI mode Background of the day list and time table Color of the remaining background only a one pixel wide frame around the control where the selection frame will be drawn when the control is selected If the transparent check box is set all pixels using this color will be transparent 8 5 9 5 Event Colors Table 18 Color assignment for schedule controls The extended UI mode uses up to three different colors to display individual events graphically in the weekly overview There are two different ways these colors can be used depending on the setting of the option Use event colors for value The two coloring modes are explained below Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 82 LOYTEC When the option Use event colors for value is enabled the three available event colors are assigned to the available value presets in a round robin fashion The first value will use event color 1 the second value will use event color 2 and the third value is drawn in event color 3 If there are more values available the color assignment will start at color 1 again value 4 uses color 1 and so on This mode is especially suitable for schedules where events do not normally overlap each other or overlapping events typically
25. Download the new project to the device A warning appears stating that this will change the static interface of the device and that the database needs to be updated to reflect these changes e The configuration software will execute all required steps automatically temporarily removing all dynamic NVs and all bindings to guarantee a correct update of the device Once the device restarted and the database was updated the NVs and the bindings are restored e The device is then commissioned and ready to operate WARNING It is dangerous to change the static interface while using dynamic NVs due to the fact that all dynamic NVs must be removed in order to upgrade the static interface If something goes wrong during this process all dynamic NVs on the device may be lost and must be recovered using another procedure You are advised to have a recent backup of the database ready in case the recover mechanism built into the configuration software fails as well Version 4 5 For network management systems which do not support plug ins the new project must be loaded in standalone mode and a new XIF file must be generated after the download completed The network management tool itself must then provide a way to upgrade the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 142 LOYTEC static interface of the already integrated device and take over the existing bindings The recommended procedure is as follows e Run the configuration softwa
26. LVIS 3EIxx and the IP852 interface is enabled The port can be changed Optional ports not necessary for the primary product function 14 19 3 Services 2 tcp This port is opened by the FTP server The port can be changed and disabled 22 tcp This port is opened by the SSH server The port can be changed and disabled 23 tcp This port is opened by the Telnet server The port can be changed and disabled 80 tcp This port is opened by the Web server and the OPC XML DA server It can be disabled if OPC XML DA is not required The port can be changed 1629 udp tcp This is the configuration server port of CEA 852 Exactly one device in the system needs this port open Other devices register with the configuration server to form the IP 852 channel list The port can be changed and disabled This port is disabled by default as long as the IP 852 configuration server is not enabled 1630 udp tcp Only LVIS 3EIxx models running on the FT 10 interface IP852 disabled This port is used by the CEA 709 RNI and for the remote LPA The port can be changed and disabled 5900 tcp This port is opened by the VNC server if enabled in the project settings The port can be changed and disabled This port is disabled by default 47808 udp This is the data exchange port for BACnet IP It is required for the primary function of the device only on BACnet models running on BACnet IP not MS TP The port can be changed and disabled Possibly required
27. OK to create the scheduler point and repeat for additional points as required Each of the created scheduler points will later provide access to the configuration of the scheduler unit to which the scheduler link NV was bound in the network see below On CEA 709 devices there is one extra step to take before the new data points will be operational The new static input NV representing the remote calendar on the local device this NV is normally called nviCalLink needs to be bound to the output NV called nvoCalLink located in the Calendar functional block of the remote device and the new static nviSchedLink NVs which were created for each remote scheduler point need to be bound to the respective nvoSchedLink variable located in the Scheduler functional block of the remote device The binding between the nvoSchedLink variable on the remote device to the nviSchedLink variable on the local device defines which of the scheduler data points on the local device connect to which scheduler unit on the remote device On BACnet devices the new data points can be used right away to exchange configuration data with the scheduler on the remote device Just connect the new scheduler data point to a schedule control to view and edit the configuration of the remote devices scheduler 9 8 Alarm Clients Accessing alarm server objects on remote devices is done by creating remote alarm data points These points may either be created from data obtained by a network
28. Page 7 6 2 Common Properties Version 4 5 The Text field is used to configure the textual part of an object This may be just ordinary text or a format string instructing the object how to format its text output For menus and items this field holds the menu or item title as it appears on the device for controls which display text or a numbers text numeric and date controls this field contains a C style format string The alignment buttons allow to adjust the alignment of the text inside the display box left middle or right aligned The font window is used to select the font for the text If other than the built in fonts are needed additional fonts can be loaded into the project using the font manager which can be opened via the Open Font Manager button The font manager is covered in more detail in section 14 13 1 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 57 LOYTEC Text is used by various objects in different ways as shown below Object Type Usage of the Text field Menu Directly used for the menu title Menu Item Directly used for the menu item text Format string which may contain one s placeholder which will be replaced by a string taken from a mapping table or a connected string data point For static texts use a text control and fill in the static text in the text field without using a s placeholder The s placeholder conforms to standard C rules and may include additional format modifiers between the
29. Some pages are used to set common properties and remain visible all the time These common pages are explained below This is the page which should be open while creating new objects in the tree view As you create new objects give them a suitable name here to clearly identify them in the tree view NOTE The object name specified here has nothing to do with the appearance of the object on the device if it is a visible object at all The name on this page is just the name of the object in the object hierarchy The name should be chosen such that looking at the tree view is enough to understand what an object is used for The large area below the name field can be used freely to enter any description which might be needed for other people to understand what this object does why it is here how it works and so on This can be used to store the projects documentation together with the project improving reusability and maintainability in case the project is taken over by another person later on Additional information shown on this page is the unique ID of the object as well as the estimated memory usage on the target device NOTE The unique ID of the object is used for identification If the object records data which is stored in a file trend log or data log the file name will include this ID in order to match the data files to the respective controls The UID is also used to reference other pages in the project action Show
30. TFT LCD backlight CCFL backlight 50 000 hours auto off Installation Wall mount Table 2 Electrical characteristics 3E11x ME21x 4 4 Touch Panel Cleaning Instructions Clean and soft clothes with neutral detergent or with ethanol may be used for cleaning Do not use any chemical solvent acidic or alkali solution 4 5 Terminals and Jumpers All connectors and configuration jumpers are accessible from the rear of the device Check the installation instructions that came with your unit The following is a short summary of the most important terminals Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 31 LOYTEC LVIS 3E100 Select IP 852 or FT 10 channel first LVIS ME200 Select BIP or MSTP mode first Connect the Earth Ground wire to the earth ground stud FT 10 LPT 10 connection LVIS 3E100 3E11x BACnet MSTP connection LVIS ME200 ME21x External temp sensor External switch inputs TCP IP connection CLEAR jumper LVIS 3E100 ME200 The unit can be operated on an IP 852 IP 10 channel as well as on an FT 10 or LPT 10 channel BIP or MSTP for BACnet devices The jumper labeled FT IP or BIP MSTP distinguishes between the 2 modes of operation Please set Jumper in order to operate the device on an IP 852 or BIP channel IP mode and remove the Jumper in order to operate the device on an FT 10 LPT 10 or MSTP channel Power is connected to the 3 position terminal labeled POWER Please us
31. Use column shows 0 may be removed from the list New objects may be created in the selected folder by pressing the New button to the right of the list or via the New command in the context menu The list may be sorted by a click on the desired list column When an entry is selected detailed property information is shown below the list in the property view 9 2 3 Configuration Data point configuration is done in the area below the data object list There are a number of different tabs available 9 2 3 1 Properties The property view is used to display detailed information about a selected data object Some of the properties may be modified in this area while others marked with a lock symbol are read only If more than one data object is selected in the object list the property view shows only the properties which are common to all selected objects 9 2 3 2 Manage Datapoints Version 4 5 This view is used to execute bulk operations on the list of selected data points There are buttons to rename the selected data points based on a search replace pattern or regular expression create copies of the selected points and assign suitable names to the duplicated points and a button to create local data points from remote data points LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 119 LOYTEC 9 2 3 3 Manage Relations This page provides an overview of all existing property relations It can be used to assign data points to these rel
32. You may select this mapping table and change the texts as well as assign different colors to the individual texts in the mapping table Mapping tables are discussed in detail in section 8 7 for now you can leave the table alone Version 4 5 All the controls should now have one data point connected with the text control and the bitmap control having a data point and a mapping table The bitmap control needs some LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 26 LOYTEC more work since we need to assign graphics to the individual values of the connected data point To do this select the mapping table object which was automatically created and attached to the bitmap control On the Mapping property page select one of the entries in the list for example the entry for the value 0 which maps to the text OFF Click on the button Select and select a suitable graphic to show for this state A library of icons in PNG format is installed together with the configuration software You may also draw your own graphics as well For best results save them in PNG format for icons including transparency or JPG format for full page background images NOTE Almost any bitmap format like BMP JPG GIF PNG TIF and so on may be used Vector graphics in SVG format can be imported as well but some of the more advanced features of SVG are currently not supported However these are normally not present in icon images Working with graphics is covere
33. also use different values Also this mode works best if the number of distinct values is small for example occupied unoccupied override or other small enumerations It may cause confusion in schedules where arbitrary discrete values are entered like for example a temperature set point In such a system adding a new value which is lower than another already used value the color assignments will change In this case the option should be turned off to use the standard color mode see below When the option is not selected the colors are used such that events of different priority use different colors All events are internally sorted by priority and then drawn in groups of same priority events For each new group a new event color is used If more than three different priority levels are used on the same day the event colors will be re used in a round robin fashion This mode is especially suitable in situations where a large number of different values are used and frequently changed for example when a temperature set point or other discrete value is scheduled The color selection in this mode will cause all values scheduled at standard priority to be drawn in event color 1 with colors 2 and 3 only used for values scheduled at the same day at higher priorities In case these events overlap the lower priority events the overlapping will be clearly visible because the color of the higher priority event is different For schedules which use a small
34. and displayed in the browser Useful if a complete HTML page was created in a web design tool and pasted into the text control e lt body gt If the contents do not look like a URL and do not start with an lt html gt tag they will be used as the body of an empty web page that is the L WEB application will generate the required HTML headers around it including the lt body gt tag and fill the empty body with the contents of the text control This mode can be used to display HTML formatted text without having to provide the full source code of the HTML page If web browser mode is enabled additional options are available to change the way the web content is displayed 8 5 2 Bitmap Control Bitmap controls are very similar to text controls only that they display graphic elements instead of text Otherwise the same behavior applies for input controls A static bitmap may be set on the Common Properties page which is shown when no mapping table is attached to the control or no value was set so that the control does not know which entry from the mapping table to choose The bitmap control will automatically adjust and fix its size according to the loaded bitmaps If there is no bitmap to display the size can be set manually and the bitmap controls area will be empty with just a frame drawn around it in the selected frame color NOTE Bitmap controls without any bitmap and with the frame color set to the transpare
35. automatically upgrade an existing device in a network database since it is run in standalone mode Since the device will be integrated for the first time this is OK e The device can now be integrated into the network This is usually done using an XIF file or if available an upload from device method in which the network management reads the static interface directly from the device and thus requires no XIF file If an XIF file is required generate one using the Export XIF function from the Tools menu and use it to integrate and commission your device e Ifthe network management tool does support plug ins and the newly created device should be configurable in plug in mode in the future re run the plug in registration for the L VIS configuration software The new device will be identified as an L VIS device and the configuration software will register itself as a configuration plug in automatically 10 1 1 3 Static and Dynamic NVs This is the most complicated setup which is not available under all circumstances Projects using static and dynamic NVs at the same time can only be integrated and maintained when the configuration software is run in plug in mode Due to limitations of the network database system the presence of dynamic NVs on the device will prevent a manual device integration 1f there are static NVs to be created even if you don t actively use the dynamic NV points NOTE If possible try to decide on one
36. backlight based on information from a presence sensor e Update data points Assign a value to all connected output data points The value to send out can be preset by connecting input data points to the action object Useful to update the value of data points under certain conditions Often used to save the current value of an input data point to an internal register when a button is pressed or similar applications When the connected output data point is a constant value point the action may be used to write a fixed value to a register or network object when the action triggers e Service Pin Message Execute the system command send service pin message which is supported by CEA 709 models e Lock Pages Logout Immediately protects all locked pages The user has to enter the PIN code again to unlock the locked pages e Back one page Show the page from which the current page was reached similar to the back button in a web browser The system keeps a record of the last 256 pages visited via the show page action and picks the most recent of them to navigate back one step e Send E Mail Send out the mail referenced by the action To select the mail template to use press the Select button next to the link line and select the desired mail template Please refer to section 9 9 for a detailed description of mail templates e Play sound Available for 12 and 15 devices and LWEB this action will play a sound selected fr
37. be done on the Date Time Control property page There is a wizard to generate a suitable format string for text mode set the Style of the control text or graphic and modify the look of the Graphic Style The date format string for text mode can also be entered directly on the Common Properties page The exact format to use is described in section 14 18 2 of this manual On the Color page the following colors may be set LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual TI LOYTEC Color Name Element to which the color applies Text Text color of the clock in text mode Tick Marks Hour tick marks in graphic style Clock Hands Hour and minute hands Second Hand Second hand if enabled Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Frame Circle around the clock face if enabled Container Background of the clock face Background Color of the background outside the clock face or behind the text Table 16 Color assignment for date controls Output data points may be connected to a date control in which case the date control becomes a date input control The user may then input a date and time using the keypad The number of seconds which passed since the first of January 1970 and the given date time will be written to the connected output data points This value is suitable to write to the system time set register to update the current system time on the device However note that due to limit
38. clients only support true color modes where either two or more bytes per pixel need to be transferred or the color resolution will be reduced A client which supports color maps is RealVNC 13 4 2 Remote Data Access FTP To access trend and event logs created by the respective controls a dedicated FTP access is available For firmware versions 4 0 and older the user name and password specified here can be used to log in using an FTP client and download the required data files Starting with firmware version 4 0 the operator account is used for this purpose The operator password can be set on the Web UI of the device 13 4 3 Default OPC Access This area defines parameters used for polling of currently active OPC data points An active data point is one which is either displayed by a control located on the current page or a data point which is connected to a trigger action trend or formula and thus must be monitored all the time There are two modes of operation available e Polling Data is requested at a regular interval which can be specified in the input field called Pollcycle e Delayed Response An advanced algorithm to optimize latency and minimize network traffic is applied For this mode a Hold Time and a Wait Time have to be specified The hold time specifies how long the server may hold back the response and wait for additional value changes This limits the maximum number of responses even if there are more value chan
39. column header shows the event list Turning this option on means that the user prefers to go directly to the event list Therefore touching the day column will show the event list whereas touching the day column header will show the time table The following colors may be set for schedule controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Text Color for all text areas of the control Highlight Highlight color of 3D frames Shadow Shadow color of 3D frames Horizontal Grid Grid line color Scroll bar and scroll arrow graphics only available when the control is Scrollbar used in standard UI mode Frame Color for various flat non 3D frames only available when the control is used in extended UI mode Buttons Foreground color of button symbols Button Backgr Background color of buttons Event 1 First color to use for graphical display of events extended mode Event 2 Second color to use for graphical display of events extended mode Event 3 Third color to use for graphical display of events extended mode Selection Frame Header Dialog Backgr Container Background Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Not used when the control is in extended mode Background color of the header lines and color for deactivated schedules day names in the left column and menu items Only available in standard UI mode Background color for the event dialog
40. completed to enable the actual sending of email To create a new mail template select the folder called Mail Templates open the context menu in the data point list and select the item New E Mail Template new dialog to set the properties of the new template is opened This dialog has three tabs which are used to set up the new mail template 9 9 1 Common E Mail Properties Version 4 5 This tab is used to set the basic properties of the mail First enter a name for the new email template and the desired list of recipients Separate multiple recipient addresses by comma or semicolon The following types of recipient lists are provided e To The mail is directly addressed to these persons e Cc Acarbon copy goes to the addresses listed here e Bcc A blind carbon copy is sent to the recipients in this list Recipients on this list will not be shown in the mails sent to other recipients Other properties to fill in are the desired subject of the mail and a rate limit given in the maximum number of times this mail may be sent within a 24 hour period and the maximum number of times the mail may be sent in short succession In the top right area of the tab you may attach data points to this mail Every time this mail Is sent the current value of all attached data points is fetched and may be added to the mail text Use the following procedure to embed the current value of a data point in an email e Press the Add button to select t
41. configured on the Data Point property page The key is that there can and usually will be multiple data points referencing the same data object 8 6 1 Data Point Properties The following properties can be set on the Data Point property page Value Translation If the unit of the data point is known and there are some commonly used translations available for this unit one of the pre defined translations can be selected from the drop down list A custom translation can be defined by filling out the formula below the drop down list In this formula NV stands for the value on the network side Network Value that is the value of the data point and DP stands for the value of the data point as seen by controls or other objects which are connected via this data point NOTE The value translation of a data point can be very useful to modify a value on its way between a data processing object and a register or network value Using this facility simple data manipulation like the inversion of a state or the addition or subtraction of a fixed offset can be archived without using a separate math object For example an action which toggles a light switch may be implemented by assigning the inverted feedback input current switch state to the control output The inversion is done with DP 1 NV 1 Version 4 5 The Details section shows details of the referenced data object like the name of the underlying network object the network object type
42. data points these will be reported as unusable Delete them from the project and continue Once the device is re integrated recover the dynamic NVs if any and the bindings as described above If dynamic NVs were recovered the project needs to be loaded again so that the NVs can be used LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 145 LOYTEC NOTE Reverting back to the last working setup is much easier if a backup of the database is available In this case first restore the database from the backup and then simply follow the appropriate procedure for device replacement using the last working project file In this case the configuration software may also be used in plug in mode during the replace procedure since the recover functions are not required Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 146 LOYTEC 11 Special Functions CEA 709 11 1 Binding Management When the configuration software is run in plug in mode additional functions to export import and remove the network bindings of the device are available from the Tools menu The Export Bindings function scans the database and outputs all current bindings into a text file in CSV format This file may be viewed in a text editor or spreadsheet program and used for documentation purposes or as a security backup before major changes are done to the device The Import Bindings function reads a file which was previously created by the export functio
43. data is not saved in a file and is therefore not accessible to the E Mail system to include as a file attachment NOTE Attaching a number of large files will require a significant amount of free memory while the mail is being composed and sent If the project itself consumes most of the available RAM this should be taken into account If necessary split the information into multiple smaller mails and send them at different times to reduce the memory requirements Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 135 LOYTEC 10 Standard Procedures CEA 709 10 1 Device Integration How a new device is integrated into your network depends on the network management tool in use and the way the configuration software 1s run The available choices are detailed in the following sections 10 1 1 New Device Integration of a new device normally starts with an empty device no project loaded Integration of a pre programmed device is explained further down NOTE To follow the procedures in this section make sure there is no project loaded in your device This can be done by setting the CLEAR jumper starting the device and removing the jumper again Also if the device was previously used in another network it is a good idea to also reset the network configuration data by pressing and holding the service button while the device boots up This has to be done in an extra step when the CLEAR jumper is not set T
44. digits If the precision is missing 6 digits are given if the precision is zero it is treated as 1 Style e is used if the exponent from its conversion is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision Trailing zeros are removed from the fractional part of the result a decimal point appears only if it is followed by at least one digit The argument is expected to be a text string If a precision is specified no more characters than the number specified are written A is written No argument is converted in the process 14 18 2 Date format strings The format string used by L VIS date controls is equivalent to the format string used by the ANSI C function strftime The locale setting on the L VIS device for the purpose of Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 182 LOYTEC Version 4 5 formatting dates is fixed to U S setting therefore the names of weekdays and months will be in English language only Conversion specifiers are introduced by a character and are replaced as follows a The abbreviated weekday name A The full weekday name b The abbreviated month name B The full month name c The date and time in American writing C The century number year 100 as a 2 digit integer SU C The century number the year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer d The day of the month as a decimal number range 01 to 31 D Equivalent to Yom Vod oy e Like d the d
45. entry defines a single date pattern consisting of a day month and year specification Each of them may be specified or left unset wildcard so that this type of entry is suitable to define anything from a single day of a specific year all parts given up to every day of every month in every year all parts set to wildcard e Date Range This type of entry defines a number of successive days given a start date and an end date Depending on the use of wildcards for the year or the month the range may apply only once once a year or every month e Week and Day This type of entry defines a specific day in a specific week of a specific month for example every second Friday in April Again using wildcards for the individual components allows specifying more than one specific day of the year for example the first Monday of every month or any Monday in April To insert a new entry either touch the insert line in the left column append at the end of the list or touch the entry at the position where the new entry should be inserted the selected entry and all following entries will be moved down NOTE Insert may not be possible if the calendar object reports that the limit of entries is reached or if the calendar does not allow insertion of new entries at all for example embedded BACnet calendar objects may be fixed to exactly one entry The new entry will be a single date entry If the type should be changed touch the type and
46. first e BACnet connected to a device via FTP The network can be scanned by the L VIS device which reports the results back to the configuration software To start the scan use the context menu of the BACnet Network Scan folder and select the menu item Scan BACnet Network e CEA 709 no connection to a device In this mode network scanning is currently not possible Connect to a device first e CEA 709 direct connection not LNS mode In this mode network scan is currently not possible because the scanner engine on the device can only be operated over a TCP IP link e CEA 709 connected to a device via FTP In this mode the device is able to execute a network scan and report the results back to the configuration software similar to the BACnet scan Since the device scans the physical network the results can only include information which is stored on the devices in the field not information which may be present in an LNS database like a device name functional block names or NV display names To start the scan use the context menu of the scan folder and select Scan CEA 709 852 Network e CEA 709 connected to a device in Plug In mode In this mode scanning is done on the LNS database The devices do not need to be physically present The information gathered from this type of scan will usually include more information because there is more information about the devices available in the LNS database However finding a dev
47. following actions would be used e Prev Page to navigate to the page before the current page flip through the data points of one folder spread out on multiple pages e Next Page to navigate to the next page with data points of the same folder e Show Page with a relative path of P1 to navigate to the first page of the parent data point folder To create this action set the action type to Show Page press the button Select choose the option Internal Link and enter the above path as the path to the target page Since the contents of the page template are not generated or modified by the project builder the template must be designed manually This can be done before or after the project was generated Changing the contents of the template after project build is possible All generated pages will be updated with the new template contents automatically NOTE Changing the template such that it requires more space on the page or occupies different areas of the page will require a rebuild of the pages since the margin settings will need to be adjusted Also if the default settings of a control or other object should be changed a rebuild of the project will be required to take over the new settings 14 8 Preview and Edit Mode Version 4 5 Some designs want to hide the selection frame from the user when a control is selected on the device To archive this the selection frame color is set to the background color which
48. for CEA 709 L VIS devices make use of dynamic network variables This section gives a short description of how dynamic network variables are created in different network management tools 11 4 14 LonMaker amp Network Management Tool Version 4 5 To create a dynamic network variable create a functional block e g L VIS1 for the device as shown in Figure 3 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 148 LOYTEC EY INTE Ter Yat irc ono Lyr Dor Ub T mstonfor heip aan B ro u E BSA L 0 iD Uou SAY BAS no B B k 3 A c 7 6 20 Be E Closed Loop Sensor L VIS 1 Closed Loop Actuato Page tjt Figure 3 Create a function block Drag an input or output network variable shape from the LonMaker network management tool shape sheet and drop it on the function block The dialog in Figure 4 is shown Choose A Network Variable E x Please select the network variable s you wish this shape to represent Selecting multiple network variables will result in shapes being automatically dropped Cancel Help Select All Create NV Remove prefix from NY names v Remove array subscripts from NY names Figure 4 Choose network variable dialog Select Create NV and in the displayed dialog Figure 5 enter the name for the new network variable and click on Browse Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 149 LOYTEC Create Network Variable Figu
49. function only as the outermost function or in RPN as the last function on the stack for example sum vl v2 exp v3 1 If you have to use it as an argument to another function it may only be the first argument otherwise the formula cannot be processed by the math object which internally uses an RPN machine with precompiled instructions for optimal performance Example add avg vl v2 v3 5 or the equivalent avg v1 v2 v3 5 will work add 5 avg vl v2 v3 or the equivalent 5 avg v1 v2 v3 will NOT work To limit the number of re calculations the data point update option Value changes only should normally be checked on all connected input data points This avoids recalculating the formula and writing a value to the output data point when it is already clear that the result will be the same because the input value did not change The same option can also be checked for the output data point to avoid unnecessary writes to the output data point in case the inputs changed but the result of the formula is still the same NOTE Especially for projects which use a lot of cascaded formulas where the result of one formula is used as input to a number of other formulas it may cause a big difference in CPU usage whether results of the same value are forwarded to other math objects in the system or not because they will trigger recalculation of a potentially large number of other formulas which will generate even more result
50. independent of the parent object to which the action is connected the available action triggers vary depending on the capabilities of the parent object since the action object needs information from its parent to check for trigger and execute conditions The following limits apply e Control If the action is connected to a control all available triggers and conditions may be used since a control delivers both a value and user input events touch release select and similar If a value dependent trigger mode or condition is used at least one input data point will usually be connected to the control to deliver new values e Data Point Connector If the action is connected to a data point connector any triggers or conditions which require user input are not available A data point connector can only feed a current value to the action therefore the only trigger LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 97 LOYTEC modes which will actually trigger are value update and state From the conditions the while touched condition cannot be used since it would require the parent to feed user input information e Page If the action is connected to a page none of the triggers which require a value update are available since a page does not receive value updates NOTE To avoid confusing situations it is required that only one object at a time is processing user input Therefore if an action is connected to a control and the act
51. ioa reco ed iret 50 TIA XME Export Importi a siint iE APR e 51 7 2 5 Manage Data Points eese We Re RR 51 1 2 6 Expand Fold Ba E eec re RENS PE 53 7 2 7 Lock Unlock Position ee reet rg ren 53 7 2 8 Hide Show Hide Contents Show Contents 53 7 2 9 Add Items from Data Points 54 7 2 10 Add Pages from Data Points essere 54 7 2 11 Update Instances 2 3 4 esses ha oto dett Rede 54 T2512 Restore Defaults seni hewn dee e Re e et 54 Main MeNnu csccsscesscssscssscssssssccssescsesssessscesenessssesssesecssssssesscsssssecnsesnsesssoes 54 Tool Bar m M 54 Muni 55 Common Property Pages sccsscssscssscssssscssscssesssessssesssessssessessssssesseessess 56 7 6 1 General eet ee tete it ee ER RERO ENTE eere 56 7 6 2 Common Properties eie eed ERREUR S 56 156 3 COLO So iet t RO ROT Debt 59 8 Object Description c H w vil 8 1 8 2 Version 4 5 Introduction essee Tene et eruere rne tene edente reo Le toig une so eue In salut apo dene eee neque 60 MOM E m 61 82 Ment Properties i152 ian Oen eei n ir tdeo 61 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 5 LOYTEC AXEEBU UB 61 8 3 1 Menu Item Properties essere enne nnns 62 RA MENTI E 63 8 4 1 Page Properties Re EEUU See ae dead 63 85 SD DO
52. is empty The unsigned int argument is converted to unsigned octal 0 unsigned decimal u or unsigned hexadecimal x and X notation The letters abcdef are used for x conversions the letters ABCDEF are used for X conversions The precision if any gives the minimum number of digits that must appear if the converted value requires fewer digits it is padded on the left with zeros The default precision is 1 When 0 is printed with an explicit precision 0 the output is empty The double argument is rounded and converted in the style d dddetdd where there is one digit before the decimal point character and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision if the precision is missing it is taken as 6 if the precision is zero no decimal point character appears An E conversion uses the letter E rather than e to introduce the exponent The exponent always contains at least two digits if the value is zero the exponent is 00 The double argument is rounded and converted to decimal notation in the style ddd ddd where the number of digits after the decimal point character is equal to the precision specification If the precision is missing it is taken as 6 if the precision is explicitly zero no decimal point character appears If a decimal point appears at least one digit appears before it The double argument is converted in style f or e or F or E for G conversions The precision specifies the number of significant
53. item to the root menu To do this right click on the root menu object in the tree view and select Add Item from the context menu A new menu item is created and connected to the menu object The new menu item is automatically selected so that you may browse the property pages and see what you want to change The name of the item object can be changed in the Name box of the General property page This changes the name of the object in the object tree and has no effect on the appearance of the menu item on the device To change the text of the item itself go to the Common Properties page and change the contents of the Text box The display in the preview window changes as you type so you can immediately see the results You may want to change the font to the 12x16 ROM Fixed R font so you get a larger item which is easier to select on the touch screen The menu item object is described in detail in section 8 3 Repeat the steps above to add another menu item and call it Setup Again change the Text of the item to read something like Setup and change the font to make the item a comfortable size This item will be used to enter the devices setup menu NOTE The device will check the last item of the root menu and see if it has any pages or sub menus attached to it If the item has no further objects attached this is called a return item and is located at the last position in the root menu then the device will connect its setup menu
54. level automatically grants access to the protected object To reach a specific access level there are a number of possible options Switching to a page which cannot be viewed at the current access level will automatically bring up a system page where a PIN code can be entered in order to increase the access level and access the page On a normal project page a numeric input control can be placed to allow the user to write a PIN code value to the system register called PIN Code Enter Any value written to this register will be interpreted as a PIN code and the system will try to log the user in using this code If none of the defined access levels has a matching PIN code the access level is set to 0 log out To construct a suitable control make sure to set the input value range to 0000 9999 and check the Password Input Keypad option Using a data point connector a PIN code can be received from the network and forwarded to the PIN Code Enter register to allow remote login using a PIN code The desired access level may be set directly by writing a value between 0 and 15 to the system register called Access Level This 1s less useful 1f allowed from a control on a project page but may be convenient if there is an external access controller in the network where the user was already authenticated for example using an RFID card The access controller can communicate the successful authentication over the network to the L VIS device where a
55. mapping and should be visible immediately on the numeric control Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 28 LOYTEC 3 Mechanical Installation 3 1 Dimensions and Mounting For information about unit installation please refer to the installation sheet that came with your unit This document is also available for download from the LOYTEC website 3 2 Theft Protection To protect devices of type LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 they can be fixed to the wall mount frame with the supplied chain as shown in Figure 1 Figure 1 Connecting L VIS to the wall mount frame Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 29 LOYTEC 4 Electrical Installation 4 1 Connection diagram For information about unit installation please refer to the installation sheet that came with your unit This document is also available for download from the LOY TEC website 4 2 Electrical Characteristics LVIS 3E100 ME200 The electrical characteristics of the LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 devices are shown in Table 1 Characteristics Value Operating voltage 24 VDC or 24 VAC 10 Power consumption In rush current Operating temperature ambient Storage temperature Humidity non condensing operating Humidity non condensing storage Switch input Ethernet connection CEA 709 BACnet MSTP Enclosure Electrical Appliance Protection Class IEC 61140 IP Code IEC 60529 LCD display LCD backlight Installation
56. may fire and for example cause data to be recorded a minimum time between two trigger events can be specified together with a maximum burst rate which is the maximum number of events that are allowed in fast succession after a long idle period Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 110 LOYTEC NOTE For commands which control the position or visibility of controls a rate limit is usually not desired Set the minimum time between events to zero to disable rate limiting 8 15 Templates Templates are used as a way to design common building blocks of the project which are needed on multiple pages As opposed to a simple copy of a folder containing the required objects a template is a central point where changes can be made and these changes will automatically be applied to all instances of the template in the project A template may contain any object which can be part of a collection This includes controls collections math objects triggers actions data points and even instances of other templates Of all these objects the data points in a template may be handled in a special way which is explained in detail later on It allows multiple instances of the same template to refer to a different set of data so that for example a template which displays the state of an AHU may be instantiated once for every AHU and display the state of the corresponding unit without modifying the template To add a new temp
57. network database and not the L VIS project and are therefore not transportable from one network to another The procedure 1s basically the same as integrating a new device with static NVs using the configuration software in standalone mode The only difference is that the first few steps were already executed by somebody and the device already contains the final project When pre programming a device in this way an XIF file should always be generated as well after the device was programmed and this XIF file should be delivered together with LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 138 LOYTEC the device If this was not the case and the network management tool needs an XIF file it may be created after the device was programmed using the following procedure e Run the configuration software in standalone mode and connect to the pre programmed device for which you need an XIF file e Press the Upload Configuration button from the tool bar to upload the project which is currently stored in the device e Use the Export XIF command from the Tools menu to output the required XIF file Now integrate the device like any other CEA 709 node using the XIF file If the network management tool supports plug ins and the new device should be configurable in plug in mode re run the plug in registration for the L VIS configuration software so that it registers itself on the new device 10 2 Device Replacement This section describes th
58. newer use a parallel IP connection for project download 2 2 1 2 TCP IP Ethernet Connections This method connects to the device through a standard TCP IP channel Because data 1s transferred using the FTP and telnet protocols the PC running the configuration software Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 15 LOYTEC must be able to establish an FTP and telnet connection to the device The LVIS 3E11x and LVIS ME21x devices also support encrypted connections via SSH In this case only one TCP port port 22 is used for the entire communication between the PC and the device TCP IP connections are possible even when the device operates in FT 10 mode since the IP port is always active The IP address network mask and gateway must be configured via the setup menu on the device The device must be restarted once for the new settings to take effect In the configuration software the IP address or DNS name of the device can be used to establish a connection Each connection can be named and saved in a connection list which is stored in the system so that the list is available when the software is run the next time When connecting to devices running firmware version 4 0 0 or newer the correct admin password must be entered in this dialog to establish a connection for project up and download ADVANTAGES e Very fast data transfer suitable for large projects e Best way to update the firmware of a device fast and secur
59. no restriction select any of the fields day month or year press the Clr button in the keypad to delete the value and press OK to close the keypad This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the control will not react to a touch of the effective period Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 40 LOYTEC 6 2 1 7 Edit Values of a Preset To change the physical values assigned to a value preset touch the preset name to open the dropdown box From the box select the command edit to open a small window showing the current values of the preset If the value preset consists of multiple individual values each value is shown on a separate line with the value name to the left and the current value to the right Touch the value to open the keypad and enter a new value When done close the window by touching the close symbol in the top right corner of the window NOTE Changing the values of a value preset will automatically affect all entries in all time tables which reference this value set If for example the fan speed assigned to the value preset NORMAL is changed from 60 to 75 all time table entries which set the output to NORMAL will use the new speed setting This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the edit command in the dropdown box is not selectable 6 2 1 8 Define new Presets If the scheduler controls only a single value it is possible to create new value templates
60. normal frames Highlight Highlight color of 3D frames Shadow Shadow color of 3D frames Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Used to fill rectangles and circles if the fill option is set This color may be Container replaced dynamically by colors in the attached mapping table Color of the control background If the transparent check box is set all Background pixels using this color will be transparent Table 20 Color assignment for vector drawing controls For data input the push button mode can be used This mode works the same as for text and bitmap controls see section 8 5 3 for a description of the push button mode From the attached mapping table drawing objects use the assigned color to fill rectangles circles and polygons or draw the lines of a line drawing This can be used to create drawings which change their color based on the controls value NOTE For polygon drawings the active area to touch the control is limited to the shape of the polygon This includes all areas which would be drawn in the container color if the polygon is filled For input methods which exceed the possibilities of push button mode overlay the drawing control with the required type of data input control for example a number or text control and use this control to handle data input 8 5 11 1 Drawing Mode Version 4 5 Rectangles and circles always fill the entire contro
61. notifications The object name and instance number for the object can be configured in the same way as any other server object On CEA 709 devices the device firmware must provide a software module to handle alarming To activate this module open the Network Settings Dialog which is accessible from the File menu and check the option Enable Alarm Server This will add new NVs and thus change the static interface of the device 9 5 4 Using Alarm Servers Each alarm server keeps a list of currently pending alarms distributes them to any clients which may be connected to the server and also receives acknowledge requests from either the application or connected alarm clients To access the current list of pending alarms on an L VIS device there is a specialized control available to which alarm server and also alarm client data points may be connected Please refer to section 8 5 10 for more detail about alarm list controls 9 6 Local Trend To set up a local trend of a data source create a new trend point in the folder called Trend On BACnet L Vis devices such a trend recording is accessible to other devices in the network but the trend can only operate on BACnet server objects and will accept only one object per trend which is a limitation imposed by the BACnet specification for trend data exchange between devices On CEA709 L Vis devices a trend may record data from multiple objects at the same time including registers and other non
62. number of fixed output values for example occupied unoccupied override this mode may cause confusion because unoccupied may be drawn in different colors on different days depending on the priority when the user would expect the same color to be used consistently for the individual enumerations 8 5 9 6 Access Levels Version 4 5 The Access Control property page is used to define access levels for various operations which may need to be restricted because they modify schedule configuration data These restrictions apply in addition to the general required access level for the control as set on the Common property page The following operations can be protected individually e Change time of existing events This operation allows the user to change the time hour and minute at which a value presets is scheduled The entry in the time table must already be there since this operation only allows modifying the time for existing entries e Change preset selection This operation allows the user to change the value preset which is scheduled at a certain time The entry in the time table must already exist the user may select a different preset from the list of available presets for example change the air condition from economy to comfort e Edit values of existing presets This operation allows changing the physical values which are assigned to existing value presets The user may for example change the light level assigned to the bright s
63. of a template instance will restore the entire instance to the default state 7 3 Main Menus 7 4 Tool Bar Version 4 5 Many of the items in the main windows menus do not require additional explanation as they are commonly found in modern PC software Also a short description of every menu item can be seen in the bottom left of the main window when moving the mouse over the menu item in question All items specific to this configuration software are referenced from the individual sections in this manual which explain the items function The tool bar in the main window contains some of the commands which are used more often Pointing the mouse on one of the tool bar buttons will open a small bubble help with a short description of the buttons function All functions of the tool bar are also accessible from the main menu Similar to the menu items the individual buttons will be mentioned in the sections where their functionality is described LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 55 LOYTEC 7 5 Workflow Version 4 5 Even though there are a lot of things to configure creating a new project really is not that complicated If this is your first attempt to create a project it might help to concentrate on one thing at a time to avoid unnecessary confusion caused by switching back and forth between objects and their different property pages A simple workflow is suggested below e First build the desired object hierarchy using
64. of the device cklight This slider is used to set the brightness of the LCD backlight when the unit is active Good settings are between normal and bright where the bright setting consumes more power The life time of the backlight is not significantly affected by the brightness setting Properties For L VIS devices which have fixed display hardware this area shows the properties of the display for the selected device model Devices which can support configurable resolution and or color depth allow the user to change these settings here This is currently supported for L WEB models Since the L WEB is actually a piece of software running on a PC it can support any resolution although the color depth is currently still fixed at VGA color 13 4 Connectivity 13 4 1 Remote Version 4 5 This page collects settings related to the communication between the device and a PC Display Access The option Enable VNC Server may be checked to enable a built in VNC server on the device if supported by the firmware version 3 0 0 or newer To use it a TCP IP connection to the device must be possible since VNC is a TCP based protocol The remaining options are used to set the TCP port on which the VNC server should listen for incoming connections the maximum number of simultaneous connections that the server should accept and an optional password to protect access to the device A device with a firmware supporting VNC which has no project lo
65. of the flags will be handled by the network management tool later on The most important one which cannot be set by other tools is the polled flag This is automatically set for newly created NVs as required 9 3 3 Local Server Object BACnet Version 4 5 On BACnet models local server objects may be created to communicate with other devices on the network The basic object types supported are analog binary and multi state each LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 121 LOYTEC available as input output or value object Since a value object may be read and written much like a register two data objects will be created for each value server object NOTE BACnet defines the direction of data flow from the point of view of the application running on the L VIS device An analog input object therefore accepts input from the user and transmits this data out to other devices on the network An analog output object receives data from the network and outputs it to the application show data on the display A BACnet input object is therefore represented by an output data object whereas a BACnet output object is represented by a data input object To create a new server object and the required data object s to represent it select the folder named Server Objects and use the New button or the context menu to add a new object A dialog will open requesting the required information to create the new server object The following data m
66. option will hide the priority in the event view to simplify the view and gain more space for the value and date pattern names 12 hour time format am pm Changes the display of time from 24 hour to 12 hour format Use am pm as prefix Available when 12 hour mode is enabled tells the control to use the strings for AM and PM as a prefix instead of a suffix This option 1s required for some languages to yield correct 12 hour time representation Use year month day suffix This option is available when the date format is set to ISO 8601 It changes the date format to add the localized strings for year month and day as suffix to each date component replacing the hyphens This option is required for some languages to yield commonly used date representations for example Japanese 2011 12 H 14 Use hour minute suffix This option is available when the date format is set to ISO 8601 It changes the time format to add the localized strings for hour and minute as a suffix Used for some languages to yield commonly used time representations for example Japanese 5 ff 24 47 Use event colors for value This option changes the way the event colors are used to draw the weekly overview Please see section 8 5 9 5 about the two different modes Follow current date This option causes the control to switch back to the weekly overview and show the current week after the device was idle for some time The idle time is controlled via the
67. out during ramping is controlled by SCPTminSendTime 11 5 3 Relay LCD Backlight control Version 4 5 The relay object implements a LONMARK Lamp Actuator object according to the LONMARK Functional Profile 3040 It receives the input value of type SNVT switch in the variable nviSwitch and sends out a feedback of the current state in nviSwitchFb The output network variable reflects the state of the relay input of the old LVIS 3ECTB device The newer touch screen models do not provide a relay and the lamp actuator object on these models is used to control the LCD backlight To overrule the value which is adjusted in the L VIS Plugin Software the state part of the nviSwitch network variable has to be set to 1 In that case the value part of the network variable controls the brightness of the display from 0 to 10096 If the state part of the variable is set back to 0 again the backlight automatically uses the values which are adjusted in the L VIS Plugin software This feature can be used to adjust the backlight in relation to the ambient brightness which could be measured with a sensor On newer firmware revisions the backlight may also be controlled via an internal system register which is available as a data point and may be used freely across the project This is the preferred way of controlling the backlight LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 156 LOYTEC 11 5 4 HVAC Temperature Sensor Version 4 5 The temperature
68. outside the control after the touch and releases the screen outside the control will not be selected e value update The action is triggered when the parent object the control or data point connector to which the action is assigned reports a new value for example because a new value was received via an input data point which is connected to LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 96 LOYTEC the control NOT to the action or when the user enters a new value using the control e state This is similar to the value update trigger but it examines the first data point connected to the parent object to see if it is a multi state value If this 1s the case the dropdown list next to the action trigger is initialized with the available states and the user can select a state from the dropdown list instead of entering a numerical value The action is triggered when the current state equals the state selected from the dropdown If the parent value is not a multi state value this trigger cannot be used e touch The action is triggered when the control is touched Note the difference to the selection trigger which fires only when the screen is again released inside the control A touch is also triggered when the control was released by moving outside without releasing the screen and then returning back inside the control e release The action is triggered when the touch screen is released while inside the control or when the touch posi
69. place custom bitmaps on top of the trend control to mark the active areas On true color devices these bitmaps may also be semi transparent e Enable Cursor This option causes the control to become selectable When selected a cursor appears which allows navigating through the recorded data see the next section e Preserve Data When enabled the Control is instructed to store the recorded data in non volatile memory in order to preserve the data across a reboot or LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 74 LOYTEC power failure Saving is done in regular intervals when enough data was collected or when the unit is shut down in a regular way and thus has a chance to save all unsaved data before shutdown not possible during a power failure e Line Width Sets the line with for all curves drawn in this trend control With a data point selected the following options are available e Draw Minimum Enable recording and display of the minimum curve for the selected data point e Draw Average Enable recording and display of the average curve for the selected data point e Draw Maximum Enable recording and display of the maximum curve for the selected data point NOTE Use the preserve data option with care and avoid unnecessary saving of unimportant data since these operations may take up a significant amount of system resources and adversely affect performance and life time of the device in case they are over used i
70. points from all scanned objects which match one of the available templates and have the default settings applied to the newly created points To do this select the command Use on device and apply all templates on the top level scan folder LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 124 LOYTEC NOTE A remote network object refers to another device in the network which had a certain configuration at the time the scan data was collected If the configuration of the remote device changes later on the remote network object may stop working until the network is rescanned or the mapping to the remote device is changed manually to reflect the new configuration To avoid this situation and to keep a project reusable for different networks or different subsystems within the same network it is therefore desirable to create local network objects instead when using a CEA 709 device and use the network binding to define the communication between the L VIS device and other devices This way the same project file may be used in different rooms communicating with different devices and not be specific to a certain room 9 4 Local Scheduler and Calendar To use scheduler and calendar functionality on the device the appropriate data objects need to be created first followed by a few additional configuration steps which are detailed below 9 4 1 Point Creation As the first step the required data points must be created Create the calendar point
71. problem and finish the upgrade Which one to use depends on how far the upgrade procedure ran Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 144 LOYTEC 10 4 3 1 Failure before Database Update If the procedure failed before the database update that is the device template in the database 1s still the old version the device must be rolled back to the last project as well so that the database and the device match again The recommended procedure 1s detailed below e Follow the standard procedure for device replacement as appropriate for your project but do not run the configuration software in plug in mode at any time Only use the software standalone including any other configuration tasks you may be doing to other devices at the same time If the project used static and dynamic NVs and the upgrade required a change of the static interface your dynamic NVs may be lost and the replace procedure may report data points which cannot be assigned Remove them from the project and continue e Once the device is replaced and commissioned run the configuration software in plug in mode e Ifthe device lost its dynamic NVs use the function Recover DynNVs from the Tools menu now to recover the set of dynamic NVs which were removed during the last upgrade e Most likely the bindings will be lost as well Use the function Recover Bindings from the Tools menu to recreate the bindings as they were recorded before the upgrade proce
72. screen coordinate specified by the variable v which is the first connected input data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 109 LOYTEC Top Position v1 The control is moved on the screen such that its top edge is at the absolute vertical screen coordinate specified by the variable v which is the first connected input data point Left Offset v1 The control is moved on the screen such that its left edge is offset by the amount of variable v from the horizontal screen coordinate specified in the project An offset of 0 returns the control to its original horizontal position a negative offset moves to the left a positive offset moves to the right Top Offset v1 The control is moved on the screen such that its top edge is offset by the amount of variable v from the vertical screen coordinate specified in the project An offset of 0 returns the control to its original vertical position a negative offset moves up and a positive offset moves down NOTE All commands related to the visibility and position of objects can also be connected to collections In this case the same command will be sent to all controls inside the collection Next choose a trigger mode from the available choices The trigger mode works together with the trigger condition which was entered as a formula above First the formula is calculated and interpreted as a Boolean value where 0 means false and all other values mean true The resu
73. select Set and Clear Alarm For Alarm Set Type select AL ALM CONDITION For Alarm Clear Type select AL NO CONDITION In the Description field enter Freeze Alarm The different alarm types and their meaning can be found in the LONMARK description of the SNVT alarm 2 network variable type General Common Properties Mapping Data Point ji r Alarm Output nput Data Point Alarm Set Type nviT emp 005 AL ALM CONDITION Alarm Clear Type Alarm Condition 7 Data Point Value Range AL N O CONDITION Y Value is O s 3 0 Priority Level Inside Range Action PRLEVELO J C Outside Range Set and Clear Alarm C Above Max C Set on Alarm Enter Below Min C Clear on Alarm Leave Description 22 chars max Freeze Alarm Figure 21 Alarm Generator configuration tab Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 195 LOYTEC To display the alarm output we will draw a bitmap which shows an ice symbol in alarm state To do this add a bitmap control to the page Enter a label for the bitmap in the Text box ofthe Common Properties tab Select Add Data Point from the context menu of the bitmap control Add a Reg Read data point as described above and use the same name FreezeAlarm for the Name in the Register Properties field Set the Type to alarm 2 164 and select alarm type for the Element On the Mapping tab of the data point select the AL ALM CONDITION Click on S
74. set up TCP IP connectivity optional to speed up project download e Easy device selection from within your management software e Automatically updates the LNS database and re commissions the device if the static interface of the device changes due to the downloaded project e Functions are available to export and import current bindings to and from the device into CSV files e Any dynamic network variables created on the device will automatically show up as usable data points in your project including the name of the functional block in which they are located e Network scans can be done in the LNS database This scan method is fast and provides the most complete information about other devices in the network compared to other scan methods see also section 2 2 1 2 e Option to automatically create network bindings from local static NVs to their counterparts on other devices in the network if the local NVs were created from a network scan and therefore contain the required remote NV information LIMITS e f no parallel IP connection is used the transfer of large projects or a firmware upgrade is slow due to the limits of the communication channel This is especially true for devices in FT 10 mode Use a recent version 3 2 0 or newer of the configuration software and the device firmware to allow the use of ZIP compression for project files This will considerably speed up the download process If possible version 4 0 2 and
75. source and all entries will be reassigned to this copy As a result data points which referenced the same source before the duplicate operation will reference the same source after the duplicate as well only the references will be to the copy of the original source 7 2 5 6 Create Static NV Server Object This operation allows creating local data objects from remote data objects Depending on the network technology used by the device it 1s possible to create static NVs which are complementary to referenced external NVs or to create local server objects which are complementary to an existing client mapping The operation works in the same way as duplicate and reassign except that it creates new data sources based on existing remote sources instead of existing local sources 7 2 5 7 Remove Data Point This operation removes the selected data point objects from the project It is useful to remove a number of data point objects in one step instead of going through the object tree in the tree view and removing each data point individually Removing data points may be necessary to be able to remove the referenced data object since the data object keeps a reference count and cannot be deleted as long as it is referenced by a data point in the project 7 2 6 Expand Fold Tree The commands to expand and fold the object tree are available on menu items pages and folders They can be used to expand or fold the object tree below the selecte
76. sub menu to show 8 2 1 Menu Properties A menu consists of a frame and an area containing the menu items The frame includes the menu title and the scroll bar whereas the item container is the inside space of the menu where the menu items are shown The assignment of colors on the Color property page to parts of the menu can be seen in the following table Color Name Element to which the color applies Text Menu title text Frame Title background and the frame around the scroll bar Scrollbar Scrollbar color of the filled bar Scrollbar Backgr Scrollbar container background Background of the menu item area The background of a menu cannot be Background set to be transparent Table 8 Color assignment for menus On the Menu Page property page the width of the menu item area and the scroll bar can be entered The value 1s specified in LCD pixel the full screen width being 320 pixels The Bitmap Width parameter specifies how much space for icons to the left of the menu item text should be reserved if an item uses a bitmap This 1s used to have a vertically aligned text column even when the icons of individual items do not have the same width NOTE Even though the bitmap width parameter changes the appearance of menu items it is a property of the menu because it is the same for all items which are shown in this menu Moving an item to a different menu will show the item according to the bitmap with rule of the new
77. supports the data point direction change option In this case output data points may be connected but the configuration software will automatically set the direction change option to feed the current value of the output data point into the trend control as an input value On the device the control shows a graph with the value on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis The time axis in default settings shows the amount of time which has passed since now where the rightmost end of the axis represents the present time with older data to the left for example 10 minutes ago 20 minutes ago and so on As time passes the recorded data moves to the left and new data is added to the right The smaller the time span on the time axis the faster the curve moves to the left There is also an option to display absolute time on the X axis The control is able to display three curves per connected data point the minimum value maximum value and average value To do this the control records all incoming value updates between two shift operations From this data it calculates the minimum value the maximum value and a time weighted average value and adds this data to the right end of each curve NOTE The average value calculated during each shift interval is the time weighted average of all input values received during that time frame For example if the input has a value of 0 for the duration of 9 seconds and a value of 20 for the d
78. table attached to it this is the only image which is shown by the control It is then similar to a text control containing static text Bitmap controls may be used in this way to place logos or other graphic elements anywhere on the screen Bitmap Control On devices supporting true color the best format for icons is PNG since this format can support alpha blending which results in a smooth transition between the icon and the background along the icons edges Ifa mapping table and a data point are attached to the control the images from the mapping table may replace the image specified here when new values are received or selected by the user The bitmap is used to draw a moving handle or indicator at the center point of the border line between the empty and the filled area of the bar at the edge of the moving bar Use the bar controls properties to modify the drawing position for the bitmap Bar Control Table 7 Usage of the common bitmap for visible objects Below the screen coordinates 1s an area for additional options The Data Input Access Level defines the required minimum access level for data input via the selected object available for input controls The access level must be equal to or higher than the level specified here otherwise the user will see the control but will not be able to select it and input new data Simple controls like text numbers bitmaps and vector controls can also be rotated and flip
79. the LCD preview Also there are context menus available for each control which you can open by a right click on the control in the preview The cursor keys can be used to move controls one pixel at a time and to resize the control when the shift key is held down 2 3 4 Create Static NVs if no dynamic NVs available In case the network management tool used for the tutorial does not support dynamic creation of NVs on the device the NVs required for this tutorial must now be created manually using the data point manager window This window is accessible either from the tool bar the icon left to the connect button or from the main menu Edit gt Datapoints Please skip forward to section 9 3 2 for a description of how to create local network variables Following this description create one input NV and one output NV both of type SNVT switch 2 3 5 Create Menu Structure and Pages Version 4 5 The next step is to design a simple test page for this tutorial and use the two data points The empty project shows the root menu with no entries menu items You may change the name of the root menu as well as its colors and other properties such as the width of the menu or its scroll bar using the property pages to the right of the tree view make sure the root menu object is selected which should be the case right after you started the software The menu object is described in detail in section 8 2 First add a menu item to the root m
80. the built in ones before content is created To do this an object of the desired type must be selected and configured to match the requirements fonts colors format strings and so on Once the object looks OK open the Common Properties tab and press the button Set as Default to store the properties of the selected object as defaults for all new objects of the same type Objects which may be generated by the project builder and which should have their defaults configured are e Menu Used for sub menus Configure the desired width of the menu container as well as colors scroll bar and the font for the menu header e Menu Item Used for data point folders Select colors and font and make sure the menu container is wide enough to hold the longest data point folder name e Page Pages are created to hold the controls to visualize the data points Set the desired page background color or background bitmap e Text Control Text controls are used for the page header path and page number as well as data point names and textual data from string binary or multi state data points e Number Control Number controls are used to visualize and enter numerical data Note that the format string can be set to modify the display of numbers Since the same number control will be used for a wide range of different values it is often useful to use the g format instead of the fixed point f e Trend Control Trend controls are created when trend da
81. the procedure as needed Press the right mouse button to end point insertion mode Move points Start and end points of a line drawing and points of a polygon drawing may be moved after they were drawn Move the mouse near the point to move The cursor changes shape to indicate that a moveable point was detected Now press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the point to its new location Release the mouse button when done Remove lines line drawing Lines may be removed from the drawing by a right click anywhere on the line Remove points polygon drawing Points may be removed from the polygon by a right click on the desired point Insert points polygon drawing New points can be inserted along a line between two existing points of a polygon by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the line to which a new point should be added The new point can then be moved to the desired position by dragging with the mouse and releasing the left mouse button when done End drawing mode To exit drawing mode right click anywhere on the page except over a line see the remove lines function above The control will leave drawing mode and be resized to the smallest possible outline It can now be treated like any other control and can be moved to its final location on the page Data point objects control the data transfer between a register or a network value and the controls or other data processing objects on the device To archi
82. the tree view at the left Use the context menus to add cut copy and paste objects and use drag and drop inside the tree view to move existing objects around It is also possible to have a second instance of the configuration software running and copy paste objects between the projects In the property view keep the General property page open and enter names and descriptions for your objects as you create them Do not get lost in detailed object configuration at this time e You should now have an object tree containing at least the hierarchy of menus menu items pages and the basic controls which will be used to display and enter data All objects should be clearly named Now is a good time to go through the menus and configure their basic appearance Select one menu at a time from the tree view and keep the Common Properties page open in the property view For each selected menu enter a menu title in the Text field and select the desired font e With the Common Properties still open go through all menu item objects and enter each items text in the text field Choosing a medium sized font like the 12x16 ROM font will make it easier to select the menu item on the touch screen If the item text does not fit the width of the menu don t worry about it for now The required menu width will be set at a later step when all menu items have their final text assigned While you are at the common properties page you may also load an icon for the men
83. the underlying scheduler unit by using so called exception schedules Each event will be stored as an independent exception schedule whereas the fixed weekly schedules one for each day of the week are not used in most cases However if data is found in the weekly schedules of a device it will be visible in the schedule control as weekly events at priority 255 or Weekly when the simplified priority scheme is used Note that some devices may lack support for exception schedules or the number of possible exception schedules may be limited In such cases enter your events as normal weekly events using the weekly priority 255 These events will be stored in the weekly schedule of the device and will not allocate an exception schedule However since all of the weekly events have the same priority they are not independent of each other If they overlap on the same day the data will be merged and some events may have their start or end time modified to resolve the overlap Alternatively the simple UI mode can be used or the user needs to remove older events which are no longer needed to free some capacity of the device for adding new events LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 46 LOYTEC NOTE To make sure that the capacity for events in local CEA709 schedules is high enough set the maximum number of daily schedules in the network settings dialog to a high value when using the extended UI mode This number defines th
84. the value field to open the value template editor for modifying or adding removing value templates Priority The priority of this event Depending on the configuration of the schedule control this can be a numeric priority value as used by the native implementation of schedules in this system for example 0 to 15 for BACnet or 0 to 127 in case of CEA709 networks or a dropdown list of discrete priority levels low normal high Start The time of day at which the given value should become active End The time of day at which the value should be taken back The value of the next lower event applicable at this time will apply next If no other event applies it depends on the underlying network technology what the next output value will be To guarantee a well defined behavior independent of network technology a default event should be defined which applies to all days and schedules a desired default value at the lowest priority see note below Duration The time duration for which this event will be active This is calculated from the start and end times If the duration is set via this field the end time of the event will be adjusted to match the desired total duration If this would move the end time past midnight the desired duration is archived by additionally shifting the start time forward Event Type The type of event defines how often it will be repeated There are a number of different event types to choose from for example o
85. to 1 and set the Constant Value flag Set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 192 LOYTEC e For the nvoSwitch value data point set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss adjust the Value Range to values between 0 and 100 and set the Acceleration to 2 The configuration now looks similar to Figure 18 The project can now be loaded into the L VIS device 14 Users_Manual_101 1 L Vis Configuration Die Edt Model Firmware wew teip Ose xu Status lline Usage Numeric Control Main Menu Exampie Submenu Examples Example 1 Snitch Example Swtch Number ST Man Mer Input Mode Value Range 9 00 Inout Reschstion F Step Acceleration T Times Pag Convet Data Pint Value to rteger For Help press i Figure 18 SNVT_switch on a numeric control 15 2 Example 2 Using Data Point conversion and Hiding of Pages This example will use an input value of type SNVT_temp_p It will provide the temperature value on a bar graph and a numeric control The data will be shown in two versions one for degree Celsius and one for Fahrenheit The two display versions will be placed on different pages The example will show how to use the hide flag in order to load the project into the L VIS device with the localized configuration The example walk through description assumes that a dynamic network variable nviTemp of type SNVT temp p is already created on the L VIS device e Cr
86. to this item If the item is used the device will create a default item to reach the setup menu but this will most likely not fit the design of your other menu items so it is best to always add a setup item yourself and configure it the way you want it to look Version 4 5 Finally add a page to the first of the two menu items This page will be displayed when the user selects the first menu item from the root menu Open the context menu of the menu item right click on the item in the tree view and select Add Page In order to see this page right after the device started make this page the projects default page Open the context menu of the page in the tree view and select Set as Default The page object is described in detail in section 8 4 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 25 LOYTEC 2 4 5 Add Controls to the Page The next step 1s to place some objects on the page to view and control the values of the two local server objects The objects on the page are called controls in this manual since they allow the user to control the data points and display their current value A number of different control styles are available to choose from In this example we want to display the current status of the binary object using a text control and the value of the analog object using a numeric control To control the binary objects value we use a bitmap control and for the analog objects value a bar control To create the required con
87. tools which are severely limited in their ability to process string data types If the character set is reduced by this option the user must ensure that no foreign characters are used for server object names and descriptions Unprintable characters will be replaced by a question mark LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 158 LOYTEC 13 Project Settings Using the command Project Settings from the File menu a number of advanced options can be controlled which apply to the entire project The dialog is organized in a number of property pages which are explained below 13 1 Basic Settings On this property page the basic setup 1s performed The areas of the property page are explained in more detail below 13 1 1 Page Protection In this area all options related to access control can be configured Access control is described in detail in section 14 1 The following data can be set e Setup PIN Codes This button opens a new dialog where the 16 available access levels can be configured For each level a name and a PIN code can be entered except for level 0 the lowest level which cannot be protected e Next download sets PIN codes If this checkbox is selected the next project download will reset the PIN codes stored on the device with the codes entered in this project Otherwise the PIN codes of the devices are not modified PIN codes can be changed on the device during runtime by writing new PIN codes to the PIN code Set sy
88. usually in MP3 format but the configuration software will also allow opening wave files and recode them to MP3 for use on the device The preferred MP3 type is stereo up to 128kbps using a constant bit rate While other coding variants may work as well it is generally not useful to load 384kbps variable bit rate or other very high quality formats since they would only use an unnecessary amount of space and processing time If problems are experienced during playback it is recommended to change the coding to a basic format and try again Similar to the image manager the loaded sounds may be replaced by other sounds while keeping the linkage to already defined actions sounds may be reloaded from disk 1f the disk file has changed since the last import and unused sounds may be removed from the project There are also buttons to play back the loaded sound on the PC for preview and to export sounds contained in a project to normal files on disk 14 17 Project Statistics While the total estimated memory requirements for a project are always shown in the top right of the main window it may be difficult to locate the problematic parts of the project where a lot of resources are used when it comes to project optimization To help the project developer find the most critical parts of the project where optimization may be possible or needed a project statistics dialog 1s available via the Project Statistics command of the File menu This d
89. was set to 1 or more the user can flip through the pages by moving the cursor to the rightmost or leftmost end or touching the rightmost or leftmost end of the time axis Small arrows will appear on both ends of the time axis to indicate a good place to touch if you want to flip pages The control will return to normal operation when another control is selected or the user touches any other location outside the selected trend control 8 5 7 Date Control Version 4 5 The date control is a specialized control to display date time and calendar weeks In most cases the internal system time data point will be connected to the date control However it is possible to assign any scalar data type to the date control In that case the received value will be interpreted as the number of seconds since the first of January 1970 On LVIS 3E1xx devices running firmware 4 3 0 or newer it is possible to connect an NV data point of type SNVT_time_stamp to the date control The control can parse the NV data and display the corresponding date and time There are two different display modes for a date control a text based mode and a graphical analog clock simulation Even though one date control can only use one of the two modes at a time two or more date controls may be used together to display the time as an analog clock and the date as text on the same page A font for the text mode can be selected on the Common Properties page All other settings can
90. 0 dm AAC Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 For Help press F1 Menus 1 Items 3 Pages 6 Controls 44 Datapoints 41 Size 134l 7 Figure 35 Sunblind demo configuration Like in the switch example the sunblind demo uses bitmap controls together with action objects to move a sunblind to special positions or move the sunblind up down or stop the sunblind 16 5 Split Demo The project Solution examples manual lcp contains a Split Demo page Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 205 LOYTEC i Solution examples manual 1 L Vis Configuration File Edit Model Firmware View Help Cah tae gs Status Subsystem 1 L VIS ONNET Page Root Menu Example Pages Split Example E Root Menu Menu Navigation Main Menu Example Pages Switch Example E Sunblind Example Animation Example MF Bit 0 input General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Menu Page Page Menu View Timeout 0 sec Container Width Locked Page Bitmap Width Invisible Page Defaut Page Scrollbar Width Enable Background mapping 3 rwState bito ME Bit 1 input mapping DLOYTEC 3 rwState bit 1 www loytec com P Bit 2 input mapping 3 rwState bit2 T Bit 3 input mapping X rwState bit3 F Output bitmap mapping rrMergedBits1 Back Icon f Show Main Menu Counter Demo amp Setup Menu E Global Objects Math Objects Counter Increment by 10
91. 10 CEA 709 ModeFT 10 FESSA Nd 10 100Base T LVIS ME21x BIP Mode BACnet IP MSTP Operation MSTP Mode MS TP Table 5 Available interfaces 5 2 Configuring the IP 852 interface Version 4 5 Before the L VIS device can be used on an IP 852 channel the following things have to be configured in the setup menu of the device see also section 6 3 1 CEA 709 Settings If not controlled by the IP jumper select the IP852 interface mode on the CEA 709 settings page The currently active interface is listed at the bottom of this page and the corresponding button is green the button of the currently inactive interface 1s red IP Settings Configure the IP configuration of the L VIS device In the setup menu of the device configure the IP Address Net mask and Standard Gateway Reset the device when the IP configuration and interface mode selection is finished CEA 852 configuration After reboot set the Escrow time Aggregation time and the MD5 key on the CEA 852 RNI page of the setup menu The CNIP port setting should normally be set to 1628 and the NAT mode should be set to automatic Configuration Server Add the L VIS device to an IP 852 channel To do this either enter the IP address of the desired configuration server on the CEA 852 RNI setup page or add the IP address of the L VIS device to the channel list in a configuration server e g on an L IP In order to add the device by entering the configuration server address
92. 175 14 13 3 Font Recoding oet EROS d s 176 jujimi 176 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 14 15 14 16 14 17 14 18 14 19 14 20 9 LOYTEC Usins Im aeses oerte hoo Seer RS nse seensdonedeseass susmacnussoncesonnsetentodeanesnoseosaas 177 TANTI C A A 179 Project Statistics oesie 179 Format String 179 14 18 1 Number format strings ccecceceeseesseeeeeesceeeceeecesecsseenseeneeeeeeneeees 180 14 18 2 Date format strings nennen 181 14 18 3 Regular Expressions 184 Security Hardening Guide ccsccsscssscesscssssssscssssssesrsesssessssesssesssessseseees 185 14 191 D yice Installation cec Ree ore a 185 14 19 2 POr ere rere CR reete 186 14 19 3 Set VICes oou nei De Reo REO d Ries 186 14 19 4 Logging and Auditing sss 187 Resource Limits P 187 15 Appendix A Examples eeeeee eere eere n enero een osse en seen sees ssseessssees 189 15 1 152 15 3 15 4 Example 1 Working with Structured Network Variables 189 IS E T xtcontrol 5o oO eis Ce 189 T5 1 2 Bitmap CoOntrol rete t Ete RO E Et OR QS 190 152133 Numeric Contro ara uie nue pen a eso idem 191 Example 2 Using Data Point conversion and Hiding of Pages 192 Example 3 Freeze warning Alarms and Registers
93. 2 Data Point Connectors eese esses eee entente enne tn seen setas eta seen s tss en nenne 104 8 3 Mathematic Objects eee eee eee eese esee enses ense estesa tns ta seta seta sensns enne 104 8 13 1 Math Object Properties 4 eerie ei i re Series 105 8 13 2 Application Hints nie ern YR 105 8 13 3 F nction L1sts n no RTER RERO ER 106 8 14 Trigger gu Tu M niise 107 8 14 1 Trigger Object Properties sssssssssseeeneeeeenen ene 108 8 15 Templates HH iieis 110 8 15 1 Template Propertie Serene a a a 110 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 6 LOYTEC 8 15 2 Creating a Template sse ene 110 8 15 3 Instantiating a Template sssessssssseseeeeeeeennen nnns 111 815 4 Nested Templates in icono Ria n e RARE UOI 112 8 155 Local Changes one eI EAE e UE Dae de 113 8 15 6 Base Path Placeholder Tags 114 9 Data Point Management sse0ssscoscsssosdsrvorcsescsnsesieseseansderssarsensdecndeseonessee LIS 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 ance 115 logi uci ran Es ae 116 DDT Eold t List eee oi Be EO Rn GUB DS 117 9 2 2 Data Object List 45i vn Pee Eee ham eiie Re 118 92 3 Configuration o UTERE Be eR ERAN Tt ee 118 92 4 B ttofisu cae e ero tee EU OD RETE PURI ES EE ane 119 Object Creation urere os orooro e Yun een E sebseennsvonssceunssevseecennsop
94. 2 conformant dates using 96a d b Y H M S Voz The time zone or name or abbreviation The date and time in date 1 format A literal character Some conversion specifiers can be modified by preceding them by the E or O modifier to indicate that an alternative format should be used If the alternative format or specification does not exist for the current locale the behavior will be as if the unmodified conversion specification were used SU The Single Unix Specification mentions Ec EC Ex EX Ry MEY Od 96Oe OH OI Om OM O0S O0u OU OV Ow OW Oy where the effect of the O modifier is to use alternative numeric symbols say roman numerals and that of the E modifier is to use a locale dependent alternative representation Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 184 LOYTEC 14 18 3 Regular Expressions A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions by using various operators to combine smaller expressions 14 18 3 1 Syntax Version 4 5 The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character Most characters including all letters and digits are regular expressions that match themselves Any meta character with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash A bracket expression 1s a list of characters enclosed by and I
95. 58 133 1 Page Protectors pacsstestiec ta op te ede tes 158 1331 2 Timeout Values aa cneuecs sea Hee acini ane i Baan 158 IEEE M HR 159 13 14 OEM Bitmap eei e HR ERR erii 159 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 13 5 13 6 8 LOYTEC 13 1 5 SystemoStrings ore e sales less otek oe tee A oa Sieh 159 Extended Settings sscssccssscssessssssssssssssssssssscsessssssssscsesessssssesesesesessoeees 159 13 2 1 SystemElaBs idis po PR ERE PG 159 13 2 2 System Settings x e eee cds TR ERUIT ets 160 1323 System Colors esce e e e ERE 160 13 24 Time Zone and DST isn tette EFIE pe mns 160 Display i 0 cvicvecsnssccttensvesessuosuedssndestsesnesadseassontsotseatesecesesdscteesadscecsessessesteason 161 13 3 1 LOD Backlight iiie cti entiers 161 13 32 Display Properties ec tereti eed 161 Connectivity 5 scere Ry a E S OA OEE ET REEDS rosas 161 13 4 1 Remote Display ACCESS cccccssessseeseseeeeseeeseeeceseceseeaecnaecaeceeeaeeenes 161 13 4 2 Remote Data Access FTP cscccsseesessseeseeeseeesceeceseceseenaecaeceeeneeenes 162 13 4 3 Default OPCACC6SS emo eni oem BE ress el iets 162 13 4 4 Auto Convert to LWEB eese e e nennen 162 DINI 163 Ini E 163 Eg ruine c HO OD 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 14 12 14 13 14 14 Access C
96. 8 W backlight on 3W backlight off Up to 1000 mA 24 VAC 10 C to 40 C 10 C to 50 C 10 to 90 RH 50 C 10 to 90 RH 50 C Floating contact 100Base T FT 10 LPT 10 RS485 1 Unit Load Stainless steel anodized aluminum front panel E6CO Class I Front IP54 Back IP10 320x240 pixels 256 colors CCFL backlight 10 000 hours auto off Wall mount Table 1 Electrical characteristics 3E100 ME200 4 3 Electrical Characteristics LVIS 3E11x ME21x The electrical characteristics of the LVIS 3E11x and LVIS ME21x devices are shown in Table 2 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 30 LOYTEC Characteristics Value Operating voltage 24 VDC 10 or with 90 265 VAC Power consumption 12 inch 14W 15 inch 17W idle 3 5W In rush current Up to 3 7A 24 VAC max 40ms Operating temperature ambient 10 C to 40 C Storage temperature 10 C to 50 C Humidity non condensing operating 10 to 90 RH 50 C Humidity non condensing storage 10 to 90 RH 50 C Switch input Floating contact 2x 100Base T integrated Ethernet switch for daisy Eth t ti s R RAEE O chaining up to 20 devices CEA 709 FT 10 LPT 10 BACnet MSTP RS485 1 Unit Load Enclosure Stainless steel anodized aluminum front panel E6C0 Electrical Appliance Protection Class IEC 61140 S IP Code IEC 60529 Front IP54 Back IP10 12 inch 800x600 pixel 15 inch 1024x768 pixel LCD display 65k color
97. CEA709 data objects but the trend data is currently not accessible for other devices due to the lack of a standardized way to exchange trend data on CEA709 networks 9 6 1 Trend Data Object and Trend Controls Since trends may be recorded either directly by a trend control or independently by a trend data object the project designer needs to decide on a case by case basis which of the two methods is to be used Here are some of the aspects to consider 9 6 1 1 Recorded by a Trend Control e Trends recorded by the trend control itself are optimized for the graphical representation on the screen The control records exactly the amount of data Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 130 LOYTEC required to draw a smooth trend graph given the resolution and size of the trend control on the screen e A trend control can record up to 8 different scalar data points at the same time even on BACnet L Vis devices No Server object is required and there is no limit of one point per recording This makes it easy to record for example the CPU load which is a system register e The recorded data is tightly coupled with the trend control In case the control is removed the data is deleted as well Also if the graphical layout of the control changes the data may need to be deleted as well since it no longer fits the controls size e The recorded data will not be accessible to remote devices on the network even on BACnet L Vis dev
98. Color Mapping property page The New Entry button on this page adds a new entry to the mapping table Once two or more entries are added and their values are set colors can be assigned to the individual entries by pressing the color patch next to the desired list entry The Gradient button can be used to calculate color gradients in the same way as in standard mapping tables To the left of the color table is the Color Selection area This area looks similar to the property page used to set the initial colors for a control The main difference is that all of the color buttons shown in this area function as toggle switches Pressing a color button will select the color for being controlled by the color map Pressing it again will return the button to normal state and the color will not be controlled by the color map NOTE If the same color is selected in more than one color map on the same control the resulting color depends on the order of data point updates received This is because color mapping objects are event driven It is therefore usually not desirable to have the same color controlled by multiple color mapping objects It is however common to have a number of different color maps controlling individual colors of the same control Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 94 LOYTEC 8 9 Action Objects Action objects are used to execute various actions on special occasions As such they are often connected to co
99. Decrement by 10 Merge Bits Oo For Help press F1 Menus 1 Items 3 Pages 6 Controls 44 Datapoints 41 Size 134l 4 Figure 36 Split example configuration The split demo shows how to merge the input of a SNVT state variable into a single bitmap control In some projects it is required to evaluate the input of a SNVT state variable where only one bit is set and display the result in a single bitmap or text control The example uses the single bits of the SNVT state variable to feed a mathematic object The mathematic object encodes the bit to a single numeric value and passes the result to a register The register feeds the mapping table of a bitmap control which displays different bitmaps according to the register contents 16 6 Counter Demo Version 4 5 The project Solution examples manual lcp contains a Counter Demo page LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 i Solution_examples_manual 1 L Vis Configuration File Edit Model Firmware View Help D HXS5sss30 75 gt Page Root Menu Example Pages Counter Demo E Root Menu Menu Navigation Main Menu amp 9 Example Pages Switch Example Sunblind Example Animation Example Split Example i 410 Counter2 Number rRecCounterValue 410 Counter Number HAT Counter 1 Label mapping rRecCountervalue 4Q Container 1 SHAE counter 1 value amp rRecCounterValue 4T Counter 2 Label 4Q Container 2 HHE coun
100. File menu in the configuration software The standard setup menu always contains the following pages e TCP IP On this page the IP address network mask gateway and optionally NTP server addresses for time synchronization can be configured Alternatively the device can be instructed to get the required settings from a DHCP server in the network automatic IP configuration Changes on this page will not be effective until the device is restarted e Date Time This page is used to set date and time as well as the current time zone Always adjust the time zone first and then set date and time to the local time There are various ways to synchronize the time with external time sources The current time source is defined by the loaded project and is displayed at the bottom of the page If an external time source is used only the time zone needs to be adjusted here e Commands This page contains a dropdown list of the commands which can be executed Some commands are available on all devices while others are specific to a device family The following commands are defined LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 47 LOYTEC Command Description CEA 709 models only Send out a service pin Send Service Pin Message message BACnet models only Send out an I Am message CEA 709 models only Set the device back to un configured state forget network address Send I Am Message Un configure Node Clear System Log Clear t
101. Finwe Wew Helo Os t2e eenNzR Sina Subsystem 1 2715 ONNET Usage Neues aee temer svete jag Root Menu B Tad Menus Genesa Common Properties Mapping Data Poirt Color Menu Page F Tab eris sub Tie Ie Screen Coca 00000 2 Tb Meru lan 2 Tas Mera Fa FE aT with FF ersten Tob Menu Item 3 il Tof 7 Heit TS nee m E 1 4T Poomi Font 1 4T nomz esee 4T Room 3 4T Rooms Umo 1S e 4g Lre vetea 49 Ure vertical m uno 4g Lre vertical 48 Ure vertical 48 Ure horizontal B retum tem kon Menu Taiba septem Bil Gicbs Objects Fore press FL Menus 2 ens Pages Cortrols 110 Deteoor s 13 Sce 2518 Figure 29 Flat tabs and menu button 16 1 2 Icon Menus Another common implementation to navigate in menu trees is to use icon menus as shown in the icon menu example see Figure 30 Ele Eo Model Frneare en Hb Os s2e ke E EE Staha Subsystem 1 715 ONNET Usage TRE Ren aa anpe ERE ETT GB Tab Monus Genes Common Properies Mapping Data Poet Color Menu Page GB Icon Menu r Te Lo Seem 00000000 aA pu S TE a T wan SF nune Taiba zl T Height TS fesse New i Ela eer i Mg Menu Burton z Bima 1 46 Tastbar cic on P E il Gba bpas ROM Vo Fais Sel tosd uis foda Control Alarm ick Home Menu Forward For Helo press FL MMenus2 Items Pages 12 Controls 118 Detaooktsi 13 Sce 251 Figure 30 Icon menu On an empty page as se
102. L VIS LOYTEC Visualization User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Contact LOYTEC Blumengasse 35 A 1170 Vienna AUSTRIA EUROPE support loytec com http www loytec com Version 4 5 Document No 88068517 LOYTEC MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU AND LOYTEC SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS PRODUCT IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE IN EQUIPMEN T INTENDED FOR SURGICAL IMPLANT INTO THE BODY OR OTHER APPLICATIONS INTENDED TO SUPPORT OR SUSTAIN LIFE FOR USE IN FLIGHT CONTROL OR ENGINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT WITHIN AN AIRCRAFT OR FOR ANY OTHER APPLICATION IN WHICH IN THE FAILURE OF SUCH PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION IN WHICH PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of LOYTEC AST LC3020 L Chip L Core L DALI L GATE L INX L IOB LIOB Connect L IP L MBUS L OPC LPA L POW L ROC L STUDIO L Switch L Term L VIS L WEB ORION stack buildings under control are trademarks of LOYTEC electronics GmbH LonTalk LONWORKS Neuron LONMARK LonMaker i LON and LNS are trademarks of Echelon Co
103. OYTEC NOTE For best results use PNG format for your images and embed transparency information as alpha channel in the image Using this image in true color projects transparency will be fully automatic based on the alpha channel data When used in VGA color projects the image will be converted to VGA palette all transparent pixels will be set to color index 248 a duplicate of middle grey and the background setting will be color 248 transparent so that transparency will be fully automatic in this case as well 8 5 3 Push Button Push buttons are not provided as a specialized control object type but are implemented by a special mode of operation which can be activated for text controls and for bitmap controls to create push buttons showing text or graphic elements using all the features of these controls Push button mode is activated on the Text Bitmap Drawing property page using the Enable Push Button Mode check box Once enabled the mode of operation is selected on the right via three radio buttons The options are e Send current value In this mode each press of the button will cause all connected output data points to be updated with the current value of the control The current value is defined by the last value received from any of the connected input data points e Select and send next value This mode will instruct the control to find the entry in the mapping table which corresponds to the current value of the con
104. Point Version 4 5 This operation allows reassigning a batch of entries to a new data source based on the currently assigned data source Use the naming rules to construct the desired name of the new data source from the name of the currently assigned data source This is most useful to remap all data points referencing data from one room to similar data of another room where the data source name contains the room number for easy remapping only the room number from the original name must be replaced by the number of the new room to construct the name of the new data source LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 53 LOYTEC NOTE In contrast to the duplicate and reassign operation this operation only attempts to reassign the data points to other existing and compatible data sources New sources will not be created on the fly Instead the reassign operation fails if no compatible data source can be found using the new name 7 2 5 5 Duplicate and Reassign This operation is similar to the normal reassign operation only that the new name is not used to search for an existing data source but the new name is used to create a copy of the original data source and the selected item 1s reassigned to this copy The function keeps track of the copies it creates and ensures that each unique source is copied only once For example if more than one selected entry references the same original data source one copy will be made of this
105. R 64 825 Ui Text Control mta uen e Latet dom 64 8 5 2 Bitmap Gonttol dae eet HR IRR ROTER 65 8 5 3 Push Button iie tee ete eere ge eee E chevbcbeunevboveets 66 8 5 4 Numeric Control 2e e epe ee ie en URGERE UR RO 66 5 5 5 Bar Controle E ERR RUPEE REF gn 68 8 516 Trend CORO iso pti eR e ERROR ER A 71 8 5 7 Date Control tette tete Te eere euh venen 76 8 5 8 Data Log Control ess eise IR ee wn eee 77 8 5 9 Schedule Control 2 ote Rd 78 8 5 10 Alarm List Contro titre RIPE Se E Peg rene 83 8 5 11 Vector Drawing Control sse 85 8 6 Data Point M i 87 8 6 1 Data Point Properties esteso nee ee tie cedens 89 98 7 Mapping Table sine thereon Yr NER RN eee Ea ERE ERU a oeo Opa SEE sodnoneeads 91 8 7 1 Mapping Table Properties 92 8 8 enable 93 8 8 1 Color Mapping Properties 93 8 9 ACTION ODJects 94 89 1 Action Properties one aed e Eee RH eed 94 89 2 Page Links n aeestasie doeet d eh ei a reete 98 8 10 en D raa CO R 100 8 10 1 Collection Properties esses 100 8 10 2 Collection Handling esssssseeneeeeennnen eene 100 8 11 Alarm Generators eese eee eese esee eese en etse n stus tn soseo vies neers ieies 101 8 11 1 Alarm Generator Properties sess 102 8 11 2 Application Hints ce Ite e deed 102 8 1
106. SQ Ger te 3 mg Alex Be ws 8 4 Netzwerkvariablen 13 5 Funktionseinheiten 13 Virtuelle Funktionseinheiten 1 ge visi AA Netzwerkvariablen 1 Switch Parameter 0 Qy Verbindungen 0 H Switch Router 0 Q9 Untersysteme 0 SB Kan le 1 amp Q Ger tevorlagen 5 QJ Verbindungsvorlagen 1 MonitorSets 0 Bereit LvisDemo m OnNet 01 08 2004 12 13 Figure 15 Finished creation of new network variable 11 5 Built in LONMARK Objects The CEA 709 models of L VIS provide a number of static function blocks which are available for use even when no project is loaded These blocks are described in the following sections 11 5 1 Timer Object The timer object implements a LONMARK Real Time Keeper object according to the LONMARK Functional Profile 3300 It sends out the current time in the nvoDateTime network variable of type SNVT time stamp The object is configured using the standard configuration properties e SCPTmanualAllowed e SCPTmasterSlave e SCPTobjMajVer e SCPTobjMinVer e SCPTsummerTime e SCPTupdateRate e SCPTwinterTime The configuration properties are defined in the LONMARK functional Profile 3300 document 11 5 2 Switch Object Version 4 5 The switch object implements a LONMARK Switch object according to the LONMARK Function Profile 23200 It sends out an nvoSwitch network variable of type SNVT switch LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 155 LOY
107. TB devices A switch object to provide a standard switch and dimmer function as available on other CEA 709 devices The switch input for this object is the INO connector Both INO and INI inputs are also available as system registers for internal use A temperature sensor object which outputs the current value of the external temperature sensor optional A real time keeper object which outputs the current system time 8 L VIS functional blocks which can be used to place static or dynamic NVs related to the data points used in the project LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 12 LOYTEC e Network scanning to find other device on the network and help in creating the required network variables on L VIS The LVIS ME200 and LVIS ME21x models BACnet also provide e Up to 512 server objects accepting COV subscriptions Available object types are analog binary and multi state each as input output or value object e BACnet IP or MSTP connectivity selectable via jumper or device configuration setting as well as integrated router BBMD and slave proxy functions when the device is connected to both networks at the same time e Network scanning to find other devices and their objects in the network and use them on the L VIS device without the need to manually enter device and object instance numbers e Supports COV subscription and polling of remote server objects with automatic selection of the best method COV if avail
108. TEC and receives a feedback over nviSwitchFb The object is configured using the configuration properties e SCPTmaxOut e SCPTmaxSendTime e SCPTminSendTime e SCPTstepValue e SCPTtimeout The configuration properties are described in detail in the LONMARK Function Profile documentation On L VIS the switch object is controlled by a switch or push button connected to the Switch terminal INO of the device The object can operate in 3 different modes 1 Switch mode Use this mode when a two position switch is connected to the input terminals To select switch mode set SCPTstepValue and SCPTtimeout to zero 2 Push button mode Use this mode when a push button is connected to the terminals and you want to toggle the light on and off with each push of the button To select push button mode set SCPTstepValue to zero and SCPTtimeout to a value greater than Zero 3 Dimmer mode Use this mode when a push button is connected to the input terminals and you want to use the button to toggle the light on and off with each short press of the button and ramp the light intensity up and down when holding down the button To select and configure dimmer mode set SCPTstepValue to the amount of change wanted for each step when ramping up or down and set SCPTtimeout to the desired maximum push time which is detected as a short press the time to wait before starting to ramp the light intensity up or down The speed at which value updates are sent
109. Table 9 Function modes of a menu item Always add a return item as the last item of your sub menu or the user will not be able to navigate back to the parent menu In the root menu a return item is used in a different way If a return item is found in the root menu the device will use it to connect the system setup sub menu to it making it the setup menu item This is done so that the user may provide a menu item for the built in setup menu and configure the item through the normal configuration software just like any other menu item NOTE If the project does not provide a return item as the last item of the root menu and the built in setup menu was not disabled in the project settings a default setup menu item will be created automatically However this item will most likely not fit the design of the other items in your root menu so it is a good idea to always provide this item in your project 8 3 1 Menu Item Properties Version 4 5 On the Common Properties page a menu item can be assigned a text as well as an icon bitmap Obviously at least one of them should be set to make a usable menu item If both icon and text are set the icon will appear on the left side the text on the right side If the icon is smaller than the reserved bitmap width of the menu the icon will be centered inside the bitmap width On the Color property page the following colors can be set for the menu item Color Name Element to which the
110. These functions require at least three controls to be selected They modify the horizontal or vertical position of the selected controls such that all controls have the same amount of empty space between each other This function automatically determines the two controls which have the greatest distance from each other and spreads the remaining controls out between them such that each control remains as close to its original position as possible the overall order of the controls is not changed no matter in which sequence you selected the controls LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 167 LOYTEC NOTE This function may cause the rightmost or bottommost control to move by a few pixels if the original distance between first and last control did not allow the other controls to be evenly distributed between them This may be the case because a control can only be placed at an integer pixel position which means that the calculated space between the controls can either be 4 or 5 pixels but not 4 5 pixels If the total amount of originally available space is not a multiple of the calculated best fitting distance the last control may need to be moved a little to accommodate for the rounding error 14 4 Find Objects Version 4 5 The Edit menu provides a Find function which opens a dialog to locate specific objects in the project This can be useful for example to get a list of all trend controls or all pages with a certain name T
111. Trigger iei ie RH RESORTS YEER 134 9 9 3 Attachments eR OBERE 134 10 Standard Procedures CEA 709 ccce eese eere ee eere enne ee eeeseeees LID Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 7 LOYTEC Device Intesr atl n eere ter tte er oe eR IE PERS N RN E SEEN oeeo oebe E eub eee ve PEE TePe ES 135 10 T I New DEVICES ie dentieieooent een te RI OOR Ge teen Opes 135 10 1 2 Pre Programmed Device 137 Device Replacement eeeeeeee ee eee eee ente enne tn seta sten sins sensns ense suse tn seen 138 10 2 1 Dynamic NV Projects eis eee tee Rene UR des 138 10 22 Static NV Projects uote oo d e de Hii 138 10 2 3 Mixed Projects static and dynamic sese 139 Configuration Change eese esee ee esee eese entente netos tassa seta stes sts sens snnnn 140 10 3 1 Same NV Configuration essere 140 10 3 2 Dynamic NV Change eene 140 1073 3 Static NV Change eene e Pr ERR eie HR E tie ei 141 Configuration ReCOVELY ssecscesssesscssecesecsssssessssssssscsesssessssesssesesesseesseees 142 10 4 1 Change Device Configuration sss 142 10 4 2 Change Network Configuration sess 143 10 4 3 Recover from a failed Update ssssssssseeeeees 143 11 Special Functions CEA 709 ceres eret eere e eere ee een sees esses 146
112. When a project contains a user defined font it is necessary to have access to the original font file when working with the project This is guaranteed as long as only the pre installed fonts are used since they are located in a known place on every installation of the configuration software However if fonts from an external source are used they too must be available whenever the project is loaded and modified and the user has to make sure to deliver the font file together with the L VIS project file if the project is to be edited on a different PC where the font may not be available at the same location LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 176 LOYTEC Most operations can be completed without access to the original file when the font is embedded in the project If this is not the case the original file has to be searched To locate the original font file the configuration software will automatically try the following locations in the given order until a suitable font is found e The full path from where the font was built the last time e The directory containing the project file e The fonts directory of the configuration software installation e The Windows system font directory If the font cannot be located in any of these places the user is asked to provide an alternative font file Based on the above search order the easiest way to make sure that a project can be used on any PC is to either embed the source file in the p
113. X and Y direction LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 69 LOYTEC Position and size of a bar control as defined on the common properties page correspond to the frame of the bar control as described above It does not correspond to the selection frame drawn around the whole bar control NOTE To move a bar control in the LCD preview you must grab it somewhere inside the bar frame not outside like the scale or tick marks Use any of the four corners or the bar frame to resize the bar similar to text and number controls On the Common Properties page a font may be selected to be used for the scale Also on this page a static bitmap may be loaded This bitmap will be displayed at a configurable position relative to the mid point of the current bar end the fill height of the bar control so that the bitmap moves up and down or left and right to show the current value Color configuration is done as usual on the Color property page The following colors are supported by bar controls Color Name Element to which the color applies Labels Numbers of the scale Color used to draw a monochrome handle bitmap Not used if the loaded Knob Bitmap bitmap is a color bitmap set line color 2 in this case Color of the handle bitmap which should be transparent background color of the handle bitmap only used in VGA projects or for color bitmaps which use VGA colors only and do not provide any transparency data Kn
114. a direction of the points created in the import folder are set from the point of view of the scanned device since they represent data objects which are available on the remote device for a network variable input on a remote device you will see an input data object in the import folder Once the point is used to create a remote network object on the L VIS device the direction will change since a network variable output will be required to send data to the remote devices network variable input Version 4 5 To simplify the selection and configuration of remote network objects for CEA 709 devices it is possible to create device configuration templates for the different program IDs The device template defines a set of network variable objects and their configuration which can be used as a template when a device of the specified type is added to the project To add new network variables to the device template select the desired imported points from the import folder and select the context menu command Use as Template to add them to the respective device template which will be automatically created for each device in the CEA 709 Templates folder On these templates you can now configure a few settings like the desired data point name or the type of data point external or static NV These settings will be applied automatically when a point matching the template 1s used on the device When the templates are ready it is possible to use all data
115. a list of all value templates is shown Currently unused templates show a small X button via which the template may be deleted At the end of the list a new value template may be added Touching the name of the template allows the user to enter a new name via the keyboard To close the template editor press the close button in the top right corner of the window 6 2 2 7 Calendar Pattern Editor If an event references a global calendar pattern and the calendar allows the user to edit the pattern definition an edit button will be shown next to the dropdown list from which a calendar pattern is selected Pressing this button will open the calendar pattern editor This is the same editor which is also used by the simple view of the scheduler control If the calendar allows adding of new calendar patterns an additional button will be displayed Pressing this button will add a new calendar pattern which can then be edited via the edit button To change the name of a calendar pattern select the headline of the editor window where the current name of the calendar pattern is displayed 6 2 2 8 Technical Notes Version 4 5 When using the extended schedule control data input is no longer based on different daily schedules and calendar patterns Instead the user defines individual events which are independent of each other Since each of these events may have its own name and priority and may overlap with other events it must be implemented in
116. able See also the PICS document for details regarding the BACnet protocol implementation 1 2 Scope This manual covers the L VIS device family Currently available are the following models Model Network Type Display Colors LVIS 3E100 256 color VGA LVIS 100 RE 256 color VGA LVIS 3E112 65k color ARGB LVIS 3E115 65k color ARGB LVIS ME200 256 color VGA LVIS ME212 65k color ARGB LVIS ME215 BACnet 15 1024x786 65k color ARGB The LVIS 100 RE model is the same as the LVIS 3E100 but with a fixed static network interface Dynamic and external NVs are not supported A ready to go project designed for room automation is pre installed on the device the RE suffix indicates that this device is such a room edition device This manual also applies to the L WEB product family since this configuration software is also used to design the user interface for L WEB OPC clients like the LWEB 800 and LWEB 802 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 13 LOYTEC 2 Getting Started 2 1 Installing the L VIS Configuration Application To install the L VIS Configuration software execute the setup program and follow the instruction of the installation wizard The setup program adds an entry for the L VIS Configuration software to the start menu For the use with LNS based network management tools it registers the configuration software as LNS plug in Before the LNS plug in can be used in a network managem
117. ace occupied by the converted value e Reserve space for sign This option adds a blank character in front of positive values to act as a place holder for the sign character which is output as a if the number becomes negative e Always add sign character This option is an alternative to the preceding option and outputs a in front of positive values instead of a blank If both options are checked the positive sign character is printed Press the button Generate Format to automatically generate the format according to the selected options The format string will be set as the Text property on the Common Properties page and the result will be visible immediately on the LCD preview NOTE It is possible to add static text around the value defined by the format string If you generate the format string using the wizard first generate the format string and then switch to the common properties page and add the static text before and after the format specifier in the text field Any text can be entered with the exception of the percent sign since this character starts a format specifier The exact format of this string is described in section 14 18 1 of this manual To output a percent sign enter in the format string 8 5 5 Bar Control Version 4 5 Bar controls are one of the more complex and versatile control types In combination with other controls they can be used for a large number of applications which are not immedia
118. aced on this page will be the initial position when the template 1s instantiated on a page and the display offset is not changed In most cases a template is used because it will be instantiated multiple times in the same project However it will normally be required for these instances to operate on different data points The way to make this possible is to distinguish between fixed data points which will be the same for every instance of the template and variable data points which will be replaced by different data points for every instance This is done on the property page of the template by selecting up to four data point folders which will be considered a base path for relative data point references This means that any data point in the template object which is located below any of these base folders will be considered a variable data point whereas all other data points will remain fixed LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 111 LOYTEC NOTE If there are multiple choices of base folders select any one of them and make sure to use the data points of the selected folder to create the data points For example if the data points for 10 devices of the same type were already created and organized in 10 folders one for each device and a template should be designed for a device of this type pick the folder containing the data points of device 1 and use these data points to design the template If a data point would be selected f
119. aded will automatically enable a VNC server on port 5900 and accept one connection without password This can be used to simplify device installation If a fresh project is started the VNC option is turned off by default To connect to the VNC server install one of the available VNC clients on your PC or other device VNC clients are available for PDA and even some cell phones and connect to the device You can then remotely access the LCD display of your device and use the mouse to operate the touch screen If the connection fails the most common reasons are e The maximum number of connections is reached e There are other clients connected and the new connection requests exclusive access Check the settings of your client and disable exclusive access in this case e There is one other client already connected and holds an exclusive connection If more than one user is connected to the same device everyone will see the same display just like VNC used on a PC LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 162 LOYTEC NOTE The display of L VIS currently uses a VGA color map 256 colors It is therefore most efficient to transfer the color map to the client and then only transmit the color index for each pixel one byte per pixel If the VNC client supports this mode color map mode the VNC server on the L VIS device will tell the client that this is the preferred display mode to optimize speed and bandwidth usage However many
120. all data object folders and removes any objects which are currently not referenced by data points in the project e Devices This button opens the remote devices dialog listing all remote devices which are currently involved in data exchange with the LVIS device e OPC Server This button opens the OPC Server manager This dialog is used to create new OPC client data points from imported LINX device configurations as well as update existing data points when the LINX configuration has changed e Find This button tries to find the first reference of the selected point in the object tree of the main window and if available selects the corresponding object The main window will show this selection when the data point manager window is closed From this first occurrence you may use the Find Next function or F3 of the main window to find similar references throughout the project 9 3 Object Creation New objects can either be created manually or from template objects which were automatically created based on information provided by a file or a network scan The various objects and the way to create them are explained in the following sections 9 3 1 User Register Version 4 5 A new user register is very easy to create Select the folder named Register and click the New button A new dialog appears asking for two names a Datapoint Name and a Register Name The first one is used as a base name for the data objects which will be created The
121. amic network variables in Alex add the L VIS device to your project Select Virtuelle Funktionseinheiten and click on Neue Virtuelle Funktionseinheit Figure 11 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 152 LOYTEC E dii Projekte 1 E LVISDemo E Qj Untersysteme 1 A Netzwerkvariablen 12 Funktionseinheiten 13 8 i 5 4 Kan le 1 H Ger tevorlagen 5 5 Qj Verbindungsvorlagen 1 MonitorSets 0 Figure 11 Alex main window Enter a name in the dialog Figure 12 and press OK Funktionseinheit Neu i Allgemein Virtuelle Funktions Beschreibung Figure 12 Virtuelle Funktionseinheit dialog Open the Netzwerkvariablen collection in the tree view and select Neue Netzwerkvariable Figure 13 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 153 LOYTEC Version 4 5 ALEX 3 0 L ISDemo Subsystem 1 L IS L IS 1 Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Extras Fenster genrk 7e E Toae Ea CA OX ef EHE Pfad A LVISDemo Subsystem 1 LVIS L VIS 1 z Arbeitsplatz x E Q Projekte 1 Ei L ISDemo Q9 Untersysteme 1 EGA Subsystem 1 Ger te 3 Alex EB is E AA Netzwerkvariablen 12 Funktionseinheiten 13 ci Q Virtuelle Funktionseinheiten 1 E List A Netzwerkvariablen 0 Parameter 0 amp Verbindungen 0 Switch Router 0 QQ Untersysteme 0 X Kan le 1 Ger tevorlagen 5 Qj Verbindungsvorlagen
122. ance which was designed for folder A B C the base path of the sub template will be set to C relative to whatever the instance of the top level template uses for A B If the top level template is instantiated and the base path 1s changed from A B to X Y the sub template will use X Y C as its base path e Ifthe template requires a set of internal data points like registers place them in a separate folder and add it to the base paths Later on this register folder must be copied for each template instance and the base path must be changed so that each instance will access its private set of register data points 8 15 3 Instantiating a Template Version 4 5 There are a few different methods to create actual instances of one or more templates on a page of the project e Inthe tree view drag the template object and drop it on the page on which a new instance of this template is desired e From the context menu of the page select Add Template Instance A new template instance object will be created but it will not be connected to a template yet To assign a template to the instance drop the desired template on the instance object This can also be used to switch a template instance from one template to another e To create instances of multiple templates in one step place the related templates in a template folder drag the entire folder and drop it on the page where the instances should be created This will create one instance of eac
123. and attached to the bitmap control On the Mapping property page select one of the entries in the list for example the entry for the value 1 which maps to the text SW NUL Click on the button Select and select a suitable graphic to show for this state A library of icons in PNG format is installed together with the configuration software You may also draw your own graphics as well For best results save them in PNG format for icons including transparency or JPG format for full page background images NOTE Almost any bitmap format like BMP JPG GIF PNG TIF and so on may be used Vector graphics in SVG format can be imported as well but some of the more advanced features of SVG are currently not supported However these are normally not present in icon images Working with graphics is covered in section 14 14 of the manual Once you selected a bitmap file the bitmap control will resize itself automatically to fit the selected 1con Repeat the process for the remaining states until all states have a bitmap assigned to them Use different bitmaps so that you can distinguish between the individual states The size of the control will always be the width of the widest icon and the height of the tallest icon You can test the look of your bitmap control by selecting the individual states in the mapping table and watch the LCD preview The state which is selected when you write the project to the device will become the default state
124. arm Clear via Data Point Version 4 5 Similar to the first example but instead of defining a temperature T2 below which the alarm will clear automatically a manual input should be used to clear the alarm Of course the two examples may be combined to have both automatic clearance below a safe temperature T2 plus manual clearance as long as the temperature is at least below T1 First we need to connect the input data point via which the alarm should be clearable This may be the state component of a switch a Boolean value a register or any other scalar value We will assume an internal register for this example which we assume will be set by the user pressing a button on the display We assume that pressing the button will set the register from 0 to 1 and releasing the button will set it back to 0 again The first part is the same as in the previous example The temperature variable is connected to the alarm generator and configured to cause an alarm when the temperature rises above Tl To clear this alarm we configure the connected register data point as follows LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 104 LOYTEC Set the Alarm Condition to Above Max and enter a time delay of for example 3s This will require the user to press and hold the button for 3 seconds before the alarm will be cleared Enter a value between 0 and 1 for the maximum of the data point value range for example 0 5 would be a good value For the Action sele
125. assseassssonsennas 119 9 311 User Register oes eed et dendi ORE ERE 119 9 3 2 Local Network Variable CEA 709 sss 120 9 3 3 Local Server Object BACnet esssssseseeeeeeneene 120 9 3 4 Remote Network Object eene 121 Local Scheduler and Calendar eee eee eee eee eene eene tn stent 124 DAV Point Cr ation inte tete CIR EE ERE ets 124 9 4 2 Calendar Point Configuration 124 9 4 3 Scheduler Point Configuration sese 124 9 4 4 Schedule Configuration Data sse 125 94 5 System Resout CeScanese seen eo Ree ERG A ERE aec e Rees 126 9 4 6 Resource allocation sesesseeseeeeeeeeeeen eene 127 9 4 7 Using the Scheduler isset eed 128 Local Alarm Server eee eee eee eee ee seen sentes tenens perseen esvarta 128 9 5 1 Intrinsic Reporting 128 9 5 2 Algorithmic Reporting secere nonn e E E E R 128 9 5 3 System Resources sce oec ie ne EEA E EEA 129 9 5 4 Using Alarm Servers ornnes 129 IEciMUUS ME m 129 9 6 1 Trend Data Object and Trend Controls sss 129 9 62 Trend Mode see eedem lacs vest oe teres 130 Remote Scheduler and Calendar eee eee eee eee eene atn 131 Alarm Client betes es soss vao roires 132 E Mail Templates eese eee eese eee eese en seen nenne tune tn setas nonsese 133 9 9 1 Common E Mail Properties esses 133 9 02 E Mail
126. ata point symbol will be shown next to the affected data point and the template instance in the tree view will be marked with a red triangle 8 15 4 Nested Templates Version 4 5 It is possible to build a nested hierarchy of templates by adding template instances to templates This can be useful to build a template for a room which contains templates for light HVAC and other subsystems which again may use templates for individual devices and so on The system will make sure that no loops are built where for example template A contains an instance of template B and template B would try to instantiate template A Whenever a template is instantiated inside another template the base paths of the sub template are derived from the base paths of the parent template This is because the user will only instantiate the top level template and therefore only one set of base paths will be available As a consequence all sub templates have to get their base paths relative to the paths which were set for the top level instance Based on the paths set for the instance of the sub template and the paths set for the design of the top level template the system will automatically select the most suitable relative path It 1s therefore important to use a consistent set of paths during the template design The paths used for the sub template instances should normally be sub folders of paths which are used to design the parent template Although this is not strictl
127. ata trend This is the location intended for access by a human user The file name consists of the object name of the control as seen on the tree view and the unique ID of the control as displayed on the General property page This allows the user to easily identify the data file belonging to a certain control on the device e data uid trend This is the location intended for access by automated tools The filename consists only of the unique ID of the control This allows an automated tool to easily construct a list of files to access independent of the name of the control which may not be known and which may change Example A project contains a trend control with UID 0x122114B1 and name Trend 1 The data recorded by this control will be accessible in CSV format under the following file names on the device data trend Trend 1 122114Bl csv data uid trend 122114Bl csv Spaces in the object name are replaced by underscores to avoid file names containing spaces which may be a problem for some FTP clients NOTE Assign good names to your trend control objects to make it easy to identify the data files and relate them to the trends which are visible on the device Consider to add the name of each trend to the page where the trend is shown so that the user is able to clearly identify each control and its data file Version 4 5 If the trend control object name contains non ASCII characters the resulting file name will b
128. ate there is no additional condition to enter in the formula field since the trigger will fire as soon as any of the connected input data points receives an update Version 4 5 It is possible to add as many data record layouts as needed and define a trigger condition for each of the data records individually To work on the layout of a specific data record first select the record in the tree view to make it visible in the LCD preview You can then continue to work on the record in the LCD view Properties specific to the data log control are configured on the Data Log Control page The options currently allow to define if the control should save the recorded data in persistent memory how often it should save the data and the total number of records to save when this number is reached older data 1s overwritten with newer data It is also possible to enable or disable the navigation bar at the bottom of the control and set the size of the buttons LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 78 LOYTEC As with trend log controls the recorded data is available in CSV format for download via FTP See the section about trend data access for detailed information about the retrieval of this data from the device The following colors may be set for data log controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Highlight Highlight color of 3D frames Shadow Shadow color of 3D frames Horizontal Grid Grid
129. ations to access the data for visualization Property relations are used by some of the more complex data points to provide access to extra information originating from internal data processing For example an alarm server data point provides access to the current number of active acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms and a data point with an intrinsic alarm condition provides information about the current alarm state NOTE Relations are only links to real data points As such they cannot be used on their own like normal data points A real data point needs to be assigned to the relation for the data to be trended or used on a control or as an input for an action or a formula 9 2 3 4 Local Connections This view is used to manage local connections between different data points on the device New connections can be defined organized in folders and data points can be added to connections easily by drag amp drop from the data point list 9 2 3 5 Global Connections 9 2 4 Buttons This view is used to create global connections These connections can be used to exchange data between different LOY TEC devices on the IP network At the right side of the window are a few buttons to create new data objects as well as duplicate and remove objects which provide the same commands as are available through the context menu in the object list There are some buttons which provide additional functionality e Cleanup This button scans
130. ault settings from the template For example if a text control was originally displaying the text Room and this text was changed locally to Room101 the changed value will be used even if the original text in the template is changed to Room later on To revert back to the defaults from the template use the command Restore Defaults from the context menu of the template instance This will delete all stored local changes To let the user know if a template instance has local changes or not a pen symbol is added to the icon in the tree view whenever at least one local change is stored with the instance LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 114 LOYTEC NOTE It is also possible to take back individual changes Either use the Restore Defaults command in the context menu of the object to reset all local changes related to this object or set the property in question back to the same value as currently set in the template The system will recognize this and remove the corresponding change from the list of locally stored changes From this time on changing the property in the template will cause the instance to take over the change again since the local change which would otherwise overrule the template value was removed 8 15 6 Base Path Placeholder Tags Version 4 5 To minimize the need for local changes of a template instance information from the data point base path settings of the instance can be used when
131. aximum value the alarm generator can be used for more complex applications as well Two of the most often used applications are described in more detail in the next sections LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 103 LOYTEC 8 11 2 1 Alarm Condition with Hysteresis Consider you want to issue an alarm when a temperature rises above T1 but the alarm should not be cleared unless the temperature falls below T2 which would be less than T1 Similar to a thermal protection which once it activates turns off the device and does not turn it back on until the device significantly cooled down to avoid constant ON OFF cycles Such an application can be done by connecting the temperature data point two times To distinguish between them append SET to the name of the first data point and CLEAR to the name of the second data point on the General property page On the Alarm Generator property page configure the SET data point to cause the Action set on alarm enter enter T1 as the maximum value of the Data Point Value Range and select Above Max for the alarm condition For the Alarm Output choose the desired output value for the Set Action The Clear Action should be grayed out since the rule specifies no alarm clear action Now there are two options available to configure the CLEAR data point Here is the first one Like on the SET data point keep the Alarm Condition at Above Max but enter T2 as the maximum instead of T1 For the
132. ay be connected to text bitmap number and bar controls but not trend or date controls and so on Using the context menu of an existing object to create a new object automatically will show only the kind of objects which can be attached to the existing object so there is no room for error The individual objects are explained in more detail in the following sections LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 61 LOYTEC 8 2 Menu A menu object is used to manage a collection of menu item objects On the device a menu is a window which opens on the left side of the display and shows the items which are contained in the menu The menu can handle more items than fit on the screen If this is the case a scroll bar is provided for the user to move the contents of the menu up and down to see the hidden items NOTE Every project always has a menu object as the top level object This is called the root menu It must always be there and it cannot be deleted However you may adjust its properties just like any other menu Apart from the root menu the only other places where menu objects may be created are as child objects of menu items If a menu object is connected to a menu item selecting the item will show the connected menu This is called a sub menu To navigate back from the sub menu to the parent menu the sub menu must contain a return item which is a menu item object which has no further objects connected to it no page and no
133. ay be entered e Datapoint Name This is the name of the data object representing the BACnet server object You may leave this empty in which case the server object name will be used e Object Name The name of the server object to be created This is the name which will be seen by other devices on the network e Object Type Select the required object type here Keep in mind that input and output here are according to BACnet naming rules for objects as explained above e Engineering Units Optionally specify the engineering units for your server object This will be available to other devices on the network as a property of your server object e Description As above optionally specify a description for the server object In contrast to the data point description the description given here will be available as a property of your server object for other devices or system integrators to read e Device Type Optional property for your object as above Once all the required information has been filled in the button Create Server Object is used to create the new server object and the required data object s to represent it As explained before you will get two data objects if you create a server object of type value in order to be able to read and write your object 9 3 4 Remote Network Object Since there is a lot of information required to create a mapping for a remote network object such objects are usually only cr
134. ay of the month as a decimal number but a leading zero is replaced by a space E Modifier use alternative format see below G The ISO 8601 year with century as a decimal number The 4 digit year corresponding to the ISO week number see V This has the same format and value as Voy except that if the ISO week number belongs to the previous or next year that year is used instead g Like G but without century i e with a 2 digit year 00 99 h Equivalent to b H_ The hour as a decimal number using a 24 hour clock range 00 to 23 I The hour as a decimal number using a 12 hour clock range 01 to 12 j The day of the year as a decimal number range 001 to 366 k The hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number range 0 to 23 single digits are preceded by a blank See also H l The hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number range 1 to 12 single digits are preceded by a blank See also I m The month as a decimal number range 01 to 12 99M The minute as a decimal number range 00 to 59 n Anewline character O Modifier use alternative format see below p Either AM or PM according to the given time value or the corresponding strings for the current locale Noon is treated as pm and midnight as am LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual P Vor R s S t T u U V Ww W S oX X y Y Z Z 183 LOYTEC Like p bu
135. be checked to instruct the device to update the value on system startup If the underlying data object is a value output the default value or the last stored value will be sent out if it is a LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 90 LOYTEC value input the device will try to request the current value from the sender Both actions can only be successful if the underlying network technology supports them In cases where the requested operation cannot be executed it is silently ignored For example if the polled flag of an input network variable is not set the device will not be able to fetch the current value from the sender since it has no knowledge of the senders network address and therefore can not send a request for a value update e Value Changes Only This option causes the data point to forward updates only if the value actually changed It is very useful to avoid unnecessary operations caused by repeated updates with the same value provided that the data point does not represent an event in which case all updates must be processed and this option should not be used e No Invalid Updates This option causes the data point to filter out updates which set the value invalid for example because the value cannot be determined from the network Normally the invalid state is passed on to the other side If this option is checked the update is not forwarded so that there is no change to the current value e Map Invalid to Defau
136. be used to navigate back and forth by one day single arrow or one week double arrow without leaving the event list page e Plus Button This button is used to add a new event The event editor will be opened and the new event can be entered Note that the currently selected day has no influence on the new event since all data for the new event can be modified in the event editor window e Back Button The button with the arrow pointing to the top left is used to go back to the previous page This can be the time table or the weekly overview depending on how the event list was reached e Lines in the event list Each line of the event list may be selected anywhere on the line not just the edit buttons to open the event editor for the selected event This way existing events can be modified or deleted Each entry in the event list can show the following information e Start and End Time The start and end time of the event e Preset Name The name of the value preset which should be scheduled e Priority Optionally the priority of the event depending on available space and the setup of the scheduler control e Date Specification The dates on which this event will be active as well as a name for this event if available not supported by BACnet at the moment Events are sorted by their start time In case of overlapping events the actual sequence of scheduled values may be different from the sequence in which the events are di
137. bject are set on the Menu Page property page On this page the following settings are available e View Timeout If this timeout is not zero and there is no user input for the specified amount of time the system automatically switches to the next page provided there is more than one page connected to the same menu item After the last page was shown the procedure is restarted from the first page e Page Access This defines the minimum access level required to view the page if it is marked as locked protected see below e Locked Page If this flag is set the page may only be displayed if the current access level is equal to or higher than the level specified for this page see above If the access level is not sufficient a suitable PIN code must be entered e Invisible Page Allows hiding the page on the device which means that it will not be accessible for the user until this flag is removed However the controls on a hidden page work as usual for example a trend control placed on such a page will still be recording trend data A hidden page may also be used as the target of a show page action so that the page may only be visited through this action and not directly via the menu e Default Page Mark this page as the default page of the device The default page is displayed after a configurable amount of idle time and when the device is started e Login Page Mark this page as the login page of the device The login page is d
138. ble data types may be attached to the same scheduler object On a CEA 709 scheduler only data points representing an entire NV may be connected but not individual elements of a structured NV Version 4 5 For each of the attached data points one or more lines appear in the list below the attach button If the attached point is a structure there will be one line fir each element of the structure Enter a Description text in the second column of each line This text will be shown when the user changes a value set on the device later on LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 125 LOYTEC Add new value presets by entering a name and pressing the Create button next to the input field For each new preset a new column will appear in the list In this column enter the desired value for each of the attached points which will be set when this value template is scheduled The user may later edit the values for each preset on the device but cannot add new value presets unless there is only one line one value in the list If there are multiple output values which belong together they can be grouped in order to save space on the device For each group the entered value is stored only once even if there are more data points in the same group When done with the point and value setup switch back to the Configuration tab You should now see the list of defined value presets in a list at the top right of the window Drag and drop presets
139. ble of Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 196 LOYTEC Version 4 5 type SNVT time stamp and bind the nvoDateTime variable of the L VIS device to this input variable see Figure 23 L Vis Timer L Vis Example Figure 23 Turnaround binding for the time network variables Add a text control to the page and name it Hour Use the context menu of the text control to add a data point Select the new time stamp input network variable and select hour in the Element Create two more text controls one for the minutes and one for the seconds Assign the minutes and seconds Elements from the time stamp input data point to the controls On the mapping tab of one of the text controls create new entries for the numbers from 0 to 59 and add the text for the numbers e g one for 1 two for 2 Save this mapping table to a file button Save Go to the mapping tabs of the other text controls and load the stored mapping table Load the project to the L VIS device To show the correct text the update interval of the timer object has to be set to 1 second LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 197 LOYTEC i Users_Manual_101 1 L Vis Configuration De Edt Model Frmwae Yew Heb Os t amp Statue Oire Usage Meru Example Submenu Examples Example 4 Text Watch men Propees Mapping Data Port Cate Menu Psge ROM lori 256 gyph Load For Help press FL Menus2
140. case the configuration may be downloaded and also uploaded at any time from the Connection menu 9 4 5 System Resources To actually implement the scheduler functionality network technology dependant software modules are required on the device The scheduler and calendar data points created here will be connected to these modules and serve as the link to exchange configuration data between the user and the actual scheduler unit NOTE It is important to understand that the scheduler data points used in the project are not actually the scheduler units but only serve as a link to exchange configuration information and thus control the actual scheduler which may be located on a completely different device The device containing the actual scheduler may even be a third party device which is compliant to the standards for scheduling defined for the respective network technology Version 4 5 In case of local scheduler objects the required scheduler units are either automatically instantiated BACnet devices automatically create the required server objects they need to operate the scheduler or need to be defined by the user in a separate dialog For CEA 709 devices the configuration software provides a Network Settings Dialog where the required number of scheduler units may be instantiated and their capacity may be configured how many time value entries value templates bytes per value template and so on The dialog can be accesse
141. ch sub folder If there are data points located directly in the selected data point folder they will be ignored This command is useful to visualize an entire device folder or other high level data point folder which itself does not contain any data points 7 2 10 Add Pages from Data Points Similar to the above command but available for menu items In this mode the selected data point folder will be scanned for data points and pages will be created to visualize them If there are sub folders present a new sub menu will be created to hold the menu items for the data point sub folders similar to the operation above add items from data points The page wizard is described in more detail in section 14 7 7 2 11 Update Instances Available in the context menu of templates causes all instances of the selected template to be updated Note that updates are done automatically whenever an object outside the template is selected after the template was modified so this command should normally not be required 7 2 12 Restore Defaults This command is available in the context menu of template instances and all objects which are part of a template instance The command becomes available on objects for which there are local changes recorded Using this command the corresponding object will be restored to the state defined by the template that is all local changes related to the selected object will be discarded Calling this command on the top level
142. choices the configuration software and the device support user loadable fonts in most common formats including TrueType Typel BDF PCF OTF and others The L VIS configuration software is shipped with a set of selected freeware PCF fonts to cover Western ISO8859 CJK Chinese Japanese and Korean and also Unicode UCS 2 character sets These should cover your immediate needs for a large number of languages NOTE To open a font from the Windows system font directory the font or the entire directory must be copied to some other location first since the file open dialog recognizes the operating systems font directory and switches to a special mode in which normal selection of files from a list is not possible Since the application cannot disable this behavior the files must be copied to some other place from which they can be opened as usual Alternatively the font can be added to the list of loaded fonts via drag amp drop of the font into the font manager window The provided PCF fonts are fixed size fonts meaning that each of them is designed and optimized to a specific resolution Most fonts are therefore available in a number of variants starting at very small sizes up to about 24 pixel resolution For larger sizes or other designs you may load vector fonts as well in which case you will have to specify a font size in points 1 72 inch and the configuration software will render the font in the desired size for you If
143. color applies Text Menu item text Selection Frame Frame drawn around the selected item Icon Bitmap Color of a monochrome bitmap Color of the bitmaps background This will be the color which is shown Icon transparent in the items bitmap if the bitmap has no alpha channel or the Background project is not true color The background of a menu item is always set to transparent mode Table 10 Color assignment for menu items LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 63 LOYTEC 8 4 Page Page objects are simple objects to organize the control elements which are visible on the device When a page object is connected to a menu item and the item is selected from the menu the page and all the controls on it will be shown on the display Previously visible controls will be hidden but will continue to exist on the device so that a trend control may continue to record data for example Technically the function of a page therefore is to group a number of controls together to show or hide them all at the same time 8 4 1 Page Properties Version 4 5 On the Common Properties page a bitmap for the page background may be specified Such a bitmap should match the dimensions of the page for example 320x240 pixels on an LVIS 3E100 Please also see the information in section 7 6 2 before using a background bitmap For a single color background select the desired color on the Color property page All other properties of a page o
144. configuration software with older devices Also the devices are backwards compatible to older project versions so it is possible to use older configuration software with newer devices as well NOTE When using older configuration software to connect to newer devices the software will not recognize the firmware version reported by the device since this firmware was not available at the time the configuration software was built In this case the software will output a warning and save the project in the most recent version it knows This will be readable by the device due to the devices backwards compatibility to older project files but you may not be able to use all features and the LCD preview may not accurately reflect the behavior of the device It is therefore suggested to first upgrade the configuration software and then upgrade the devices The firmware of the L VIS device can be upgraded as newer firmware versions become available To find the current firmware version of your device use the Device Info menu item in the View menu which will be enabled when the software is connected to a device or go to the About Page on your device While it is always possible to upgrade to a newer firmware and keep the device fully functional without changing its configuration data it is often not possible to downgrade to an older firmware version since the older firmware may not be able to read the data stored by a newer firmware If a dow
145. configured on the Action property page This page is divided in two sections The top half is used to define the action that should be executed when it will trigger and the conditions under which it will be repeated The bottom half is used to set options which may be required for some of the actions From the first dropdown list select the action you want to execute Currently available actions are e Show menu Show the current menu just like performing a press and hold operation on an empty spot on the display Useful to build menu buttons which show the menu when pressed e Show page Jump to the specified page To select a page drag a page and drop it on the action object in the tree view or press the Select button to open the page link dialog see section about page links The path to the page will be shown in the option area below e Next page Show the next page of a multi page menu item This is equivalent to the next page touch gesture and is useful to build a next button e Prev page Same as above but show the previous page e Sound buzzer Output a tone on the internal buzzer The frequency and duration of the tone can be adjusted in the Options section Useful to create audible alarms when a data point or register reaches a certain value LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 95 LOYTEC e Turn on backlight Turn on the LCD backlight just as if the user touched the display Useful to turn on the
146. controls numeric controls and bar controls and may be added to these objects A mapping table can include text bitmaps and colors at the same time If connected to a text control the text part will be shown together with the color settings When the same mapping object is connected to a bitmap control the bitmap will be shown Number and bar controls use the color setting only LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 92 LOYTEC 8 7 1 Mapping Table Properties The properties of a mapping table are set on the Mapping property page The New Entry button on this page adds a new entry to the mapping table NOTE If you want to add a new entry but the New Entry button is grayed out you most likely have a control selected in the tree view which does not yet have a mapping table object attached to it Go back to the tree view and add a mapping table object or use the Load button to load a mapping table from a file The value component of the new entry defines the lower limit for the input value to display the given text bitmap and or color Since multiple entries will be present in the table the entered values build up ranges which define the texts and bitmaps to display for every possible numeric value The valid range for each entry in the mapping table is defined to reach from the value of the entry itself up to but not including the value of the succeeding entry If this is the last entry it is used for all values up to infini
147. ct Set on Alarm Enter and select the desired output value for a cleared alarm from the dropdown list named Value for Alarm Set Action This is because we actually define an alarm condition when the button is pressed As a result of this alarm condition we then reset the real alarm NOTE The above examples may of course be combined to have automatic alarm clear when the temperature falls below T2 and manual clear via a button when the temperature is at least below TI 8 12 Data Point Connectors Data Point Connector objects are used to receive a value from one or more input data points and copy the received value to all connected output data points or other objects which accept a value for example action objects A data point connector has no visible representation on the display and is therefore not related to any of the visible objects It can only be connected to a collection object as described earlier To create a new data point connector use the context menu of the collection object to which you want to add the data point connector Other than the general properties like object name and description there are no further properties to set Whenever a new value is received via one of the connected input data points the value will immediately be forwarded to all connected output data points This can be useful for example to connect an internal register to a network output If the register contains the result of a complex ca
148. cts import object definitions from CSV files or scan the network and create new data objects based on the information collected by the network scan Once created a data object may be used to exchange data with other devices on the network store and load internal registers or access internal system parameters Every data object on L VIS has a distinct direction of data flow either read input or write output This is important because the data flow direction determines how a data point will be used by other objects in the tree For example a mathematic object will assign variable names vl v2 to all input data points and write the result of the calculation to all output data points For controls the direction of the attached data points determine if the control will be selectable to input new data or not NOTE The direction is defined from the point of view of the L VIS device in question referring to the network side not the application side Therefore an input data object will receive new data from the network and deliver this data to the application running on the L VIS device whereas an output data object will transmit new data from the L VIS out to other devices Version 4 5 All data objects fall into one of the following categories e System Parameter This is a data object which cannot be created by the user It is provided by the device to modify certain internal system parameters like the time zone IP addre
149. d A number of graphic formats are supported for example BMP JPG PNG TIFF SVG and others Pressing the button Select opens an image manager dialog where all images of the project are shown In this dialog new images can be loaded unused images can be LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 58 LOYTEC removed and existing ones can be replaced by others or resized rotated and flipped as necessary Graphics import is discussed in detail in section 14 15 Depending on the object type the image is used according to the following table Object Type Bitmap is used for Menu Item Icon which is shown to the left of the menu item text Page background The loaded bitmap should match the screen resolution of the device for example 320x240 pixels Smaller background pictures are placed in the top left corner of the display For example a 320x20 bitmap would appear as a page header while an 80x240 bitmap would appear as a vertical bar at the left Page On devices supporting true color the best format for page background images is JPG If the original image does not fit the screen resolution it may be resized in the image manager dialog To place smaller static bitmaps anywhere on a page use a bitmap control and assign the bitmap to the control instead of the page then move the control to the position where the graphic should be located Bitmap to show when the control is created If the control does not have a mapping
150. d otherwise the original data is used if already available in JPG or PNG format or the original image data is converted to JPG or PNG depending on the image properties In VGA Projects dithering will be noticeable when viewing the images from a close distance which will be OK for photo realistic color graphics but might be unwanted for LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 178 LOYTEC Version 4 5 line art graphics which contain large areas of uniform color In such areas dithering to the exact color would not look as good as just picking one color from the VGA palette which is closest to the intended color If this is required it is best to design the graphics using the VGA palette and saving them in 256 color indexed format like for example 8 bit BMP or GIF It is important to make sure that the palette used by the graphic tool is in fact the VGA palette otherwise the image will still need dithering Transparency is handled in different ways depending on the color mode of the project and the properties of the image In VGA projects all images are displayed using VGA colors only and transparency is defined by selecting a color index from the VGA palette All pixels using this color index are considered transparent if transparent background is turned on In true color projects transparency is more complicated Several cases exist e The image contains transparency information alpha channel data In this case transparency is
151. d procedures for CEA 709 devices for detailed information about this topic 2 3 9 Test the Once the project file is written to the device the L VIS reboots and shows the tutorial project on the display If the NVs were created statically in the project they should now be available on the device in the network management tool a refresh of the display or database in the network management tool may be required to make them appear You can now bind the output NV and the input NV together In case of dynamic NVs this was already done earlier Project You should now be able to use the device to set the state and the value of the output switch NV and immediately see the results on the input NV since the two were bound together To change the state press the bitmap control A dropdown list with the tree icons you assigned to the tree states in the mapping table will appear Now select the desired icon to set the state NOTE Whenever an element is selected from a dropdown list of icons or texts the device will search the mapping table to find the value associated with the selected element This value will then be assigned to the output data points which are connected to the control The new state will be sent out and will be received immediately by the input NV The new state should now be displayed on the text control using the texts which you specified in the mapping table To change the value select the bar control and m
152. d in section 14 14 of the manual Once you selected a bitmap file the bitmap control will resize itself automatically to fit the selected 1con Repeat the process for the remaining states until all states have a bitmap assigned to them Use different bitmaps so that you can distinguish between the individual states The size of the control will always be the width of the widest icon and the height of the tallest icon You can test the look of your bitmap control by selecting the individual states in the mapping table and watch the LCD preview The state which is selected when you write the project to the device will become the default state of the control 2 4 7 Write the Project to the L VIS device We are now ready to write the project to the L VIS device but first the project should be saved in a file on the PC Although it is possible to read the project back from the device it should not be considered a 100 safe place for the project to be since the device may erase the project in case it finds a severe error which would otherwise prevent it from booting up again If the erase jumper at the back of the device is set or the Remove Configuration command is selected from the File menu the project in the device may be lost as well so it is a good idea to have a backup copy ready on the PC To save the project select Save as from the File menu and enter a project name To write the project to the L VIS device press the button with
153. d manually after it was programmed outside the network management with the configuration software running in standalone mode To generate an XIF that matches the actual device there are two options LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 147 LOYTEC 11 2 1 Offline A project may be designed completely offline without any connection to a physical device The target device type and firmware version are selected from the menu In this scenario the following extra steps are necessary e Select Model Number Since the project is never downloaded to a device the model number is not set automatically Before exporting the XIF file open the Network Settings Dialog from the File menu and enter the desired model number for your device e Select Transceiver Since no device is connected the configuration software cannot automatically determine the transceiver used Therefore a dialog will appear and ask for the transceiver type which will be used by the device When the project for which this XIF file was created is later actually downloaded into a device make sure to use the same model number as you entered before the XIF was exported NOTE If the device already contains a project using the same model number but the static interface of this project does not match the new project the configuration software will automatically change the model number and the result would no longer match your XIF file In this case remove the
154. d object 7 2 7 Lock Unlock Position This entry is available on collection objects It can be used to lock the screen position of all objects inside the collection so that these objects are not moved unintentionally while working on other objects on the page Note that the lock function applies to the LCD preview window only Locked objects may still be selected in the tree view and moved to a different position once selected The lock only prevents objects from being selected in the LCD view To quickly move a locked collection or individual controls select them in the tree view and move them to their new position in the LCD view without the need to first unlock the entire collection 7 2 8 Hide Show Hide Contents Show Contents Version 4 5 These commands are available on pages groups and other visible items in the object tree They can be used to hide and show the selected object and all of its child objects Hidden objects have their name displayed in square brackets in the object tree LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 54 LOYTEC A hidden object will not be visible on the device after project download but it can be made visible during run time via a trigger command 7 2 9 Add Items from Data Points Available for menu objects starts the automatic page create wizard described in section 14 7 In this mode the selected data point folder will be searched for sub folders and a new menu item will be created for ea
155. d of CEA 709 network The key features of the L VIS device family are Simple graphical programming via the supplied configuration software Support for alarming scheduling and trending Direct interface to one or more LINX automation servers via OPC XML DA Available data points on the servers are easily imported for use in the LVIS project from the corresponding LINX project files Support for the UCS 2 character set of the Unicode standard ISO 10646 to allow for the design of projects in any language including Chinese Japanese and Korean CJK Display of data as numeric value user defined text or graphic elements horizontal and vertical bars or trend logs A special element is available to display date and time in form of digital or analog clocks LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 11 LOYTEC Input of data via a numeric keypad direct drag of a bar or selection from a dropdown list of texts or graphic elements Mapping of values to colors to allow an element to change any of its colors depending on the current value of one or more data points Supports layers and transparency for all display elements Layering is simply defined by the order of objects in the tree view which may be changed easily by moving the objects around as required Support for numeric operations on data points including a simple if else statement Possibility to change location and visibility of objects during device operation
156. d through the File menu and contains the following options and settings which are relevant to calendar and scheduler functionality of the device e Enable Calendar Object This checkbox enables a LonMark compliant calendar object on the device It is automatically enabled together with local schedulers since the two are always used together e Enable Scheduler Objects This checkbox enables local LonMark compliant scheduler objects on the device Checking this box will automatically enable the calendar as well e Number of calendar entries Specifies the maximum number of different exception schedules day classes like holiday maintenance day supported by this calendar object e Total number of date entries Specifies the maximum number of date definitions which may be stored by the calendar This is the sum of all date definitions from all calendar entries A date definition is for example a single date a date range or a week and day pattern every last Friday in April e Number of local schedulers This is the number of local scheduler objects which should be available on the device Each local scheduler data point created in the data point manager will connect to one of these scheduler objects There may be more scheduler objects available on the device than are actually used at a certain time It is a good idea to have some spare scheduler objects ready in case another scheduler is needed e Number of daily schedules This is the ma
157. dd Objects Most context menus contain a number of Add commands to add new objects to the selected object Only those objects which may be added to the selected object are listed in the context menu 7 2 2 Enable Disable Access Control These commands are available in the context menu of menu objects and menu item objects The command Enable Access Control will go through all pages below the selected menu or menu item and turn on the Locked Page flag for all pages which have a non public access level set The command Disable Access Control executes the inverse operation turning off the Locked Page flag on all pages below the selected object This function is useful for testing purposes 7 2 3 Cut Copy Paste Every context menu contains commands to cut copy and paste the selected object Aside from using the context menu objects in the tree view can also be copied using the Edit menu from the main window or the keyboard shortcuts The commands Cut and Copy will place a copy of the selected object with all its child objects into the Windows clipboard The copy 1s therefore not only available for paste into the same project but may also be pasted into another project 7 2 3 1 Data References If the copied object tree contains references to data objects these references data point objects are copied without modification For example the copy of an entire page will reference the same data as the original page If the new copy should r
158. defined separately for each pixel in an additional set of data embedded in the image file the alpha channel If the transparent background option is turned on this data will be processed and pixels will be drawn according to their RGB color values from the main image data and the opacity values from the alpha channel If the transparent background option is turned off the alpha channel data is ignored and all pixels are drawn fully opaque this is usually not desired e The image does not contain any transparency information and uses colors which are not part of the VGA color palette In this case all pixels are drawn fully opaque because there is no alpha channel data available and the specification of a transparent color by VGA color index is not possible This 1s the case for JPG or BMP files and also for resized VGA images e The image does not contain any transparency information but uses only colors from the VGA palette In this case transparency can be defined by VGA color index in the same way as in VGA projects The LCD preview will show the image in the same way as the device so the behavior of transparency can be checked there Also pointing the mouse over an image in the image manager will show a tool tip containing more information about the loaded image In this tool tip it will be noted if the image contains alpha channel data and what the original image format was The following image file types are supported e Bitmaps
159. delete the reference object the data point but not the data object itself 2 Many projects need to link multiple controls to the same data object for example to display a temperature which is received by a certain object from the network on a bar control and on a numeric control at the same time This would not be possible if the data object would be directly connected to a control since it could only be at one place in the object tree at a time A separate link or reference object is required which points to the data object from which the control should receive its value updates 3 Sometimes it is required to apply simple linear transformations to the data objects raw value before it can be displayed For example an object may receive a LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 89 LOYTEC temperature value from the network in degrees Celsius but the temperature displayed on the device should show degrees Fahrenheit or a data object provides a speed in meters per second but the display should read mph or km h Such translations can be done by the data point on the fly while passing values between the control and the data object This makes it easy to display for example a temperature from an input data object both in degree Celsius and in degree Fahrenheit side by side using two data points referencing the same data object but using different value translations It is important to understand this concept to understand what can be
160. designing the template Special placeholder tags allow the designer of a template to access the individual components of the four data point base paths and use them for example to change the contents of a text control or to modify the target of a show page action This may eliminate the need to apply such changes to each instance manually The data point base paths need to be set up anyway A placeholder tag starts with the special character sequence S1 followed by the index of the base path to use b1 to b4 optionally followed by the path component to use f1 is the right most path component with higher indices moving up in the path hierarchy and a closing brace at the end For better understanding the following section lists a few examples of possible placeholder tags and the resulting replacement when the template is instantiated All examples assume a template instance with the first two data point base paths filled in like this 1 L Vis Register Floor1 Room101 2 L Vis Trend HV AC South Wing Base paths 3 and 4 may be used as well but for the purpose of this illustration we will only work with the first two of the four base paths Possible placeholders and their result e S blj Room101 e S bIflj Room101 e S bl1f2 Floorl e b2 b1 South Wing Room101 e b2 b2f2 b2f3 South Wing HVAC Trend Placeholder tags are currently accepted at the following locations e Text Control The text field of a text co
161. desired data point using the Add button Valid data points to use for mail triggers are normal analog binary and multistate values as well as alarm server and client points e Depending on the type of data point select the conditions which should trigger this mail Normal data points can trigger on the current value zero or non zero as well as the state invalid or offline alarm data points can trigger the mail based on various alarm types and or state transitions e Repeat for additional data points if the mail should be triggered by more than one source In case of multiple mail triggers the mail is sent if any of the conditions is met as opposed to all conditions e If required select a single data point to be used as a master enable disable switch below the trigger list If a data point is selected for enable disable its value must be non zero to allow mail sending If no data point is selected the mail template 1s considered enabled 9 9 3 Attachments This tab is used to select files which should be attached to the mail This is used for example to send the current system log file or data log files together with the mail The available files depend on the project and can be selected from the dropdown list Use the Add and Remove buttons to manage the list of attached files NOTE Data from trend log or data log controls can only be attached to a mail if the control has the option Preserve Data enabled Otherwise the
162. dge of the details Expert users may also look up the available placeholders in a C programmers manual for the strftime function Date Control Table 6 Usage of the common text field for visible objects Also available on the common properties page are fields to enter the screen position and size of the selected object if the object is a control However position and size of controls are usually modified directly in the LCD preview using the mouse or the cursor keys For more information about position and size of controls please see step 5 of the tutorial The checkbox Auto Resize is normally turned on so that controls which support it will resize themselves automatically to accommodate the largest content they need to display according to the elements in the mapping table The checkbox may be turned off for some controls to prevent automatic resizing and set the desired size manually NOTE Manual size for text controls is most often used when the selection area should be larger than the longest text In this case the text is often also center aligned using the buttons to the right of the text input field Another case is text received from the network In this case the configuration software does not now the size of the longest text at configuration time therefore the user needs to reserve a suitable size for the text manually Version 4 5 Next to the screen coordinate section is an area where a bitmap can be loade
163. drop it on another page An empty project contains only a root menu and a folder object where global objects can be placed which are not directly related to the user interface for example alarm generators Property View On the top right of the main window is a property view which shows a number of property pages where you can adjust the properties of the currently selected object The number and kind of property pages changes according to the selected object but some of the more basic property pages are available all the time Feel free to browse through the available pages and see what you can adjust there LCD Preview To the lower right of the main window is the preview of the project as seen on the LCD when the project is downloaded This is not a functional simulation of the L VIS device but a layout guide and preview of individual menus and pages The preview changes according to the currently selected object Since the configuration software comes with a library of the layout code used in the various firmware versions of the device the preview is always accurate to the pixel Should the layout or appearance of controls change with firmware versions the configuration software is able to track these changes and display the page exactly as it will appear on the device you are currently connected to NOTE You may select move and resize your controls directly inside the LCD preview Also there are context menus available for each c
164. dure started e Ifthe replace procedure reported missing dynamic NVs before the project has to be loaded again Clear the current project data from the editor and re open it from the project file e Program the device to restore the system to the last working state 10 4 3 2 Failure after Database Update Version 4 5 If the procedure failed after the database update that 1s the device successfully loaded the new project and the database was updated to match the new static interface the only things which could still be missing are dynamic NVs and bindings which would need to be restored after the database update There are two possible options from here e Try to find the reason why the NVs or the bindings could not be restored possibly checking the Binding Report which is available from the View menu for errors then try to use the Recover DynNVs and Recover Bindings functions from the Tools menu to first restore the dynamic NVs 1f any and then restore the bindings e Revert back to the last working setup by removing the device from the network database and roll back the device configuration by following one of the procedures for integration of a new device but using the last working project While doing this do not run the configuration software in plug in mode at any time Also skip the step of manually creating dynamic NVs if instructed to do so by the standard procedure If the old project actually used dynamic NV
165. dynamic NVs then this project assumes a different set of dynamic NVs and is most likely not the right version of the project Repeat the process with other projects The only time when such reports are to be expected is during the first download in a two stage replace procedure as required for mixed projects static and dynamic NVs 10 4 2 Change Network Configuration There are a few cases where the network definition of the device is changed to match the current configuration of the device Such changes are normally handled by the network management program but may be supported by functions of the configuration software as well While changing the device configuration requires one of the device replacement procedures to be executed changing the network configuration usually means to restore a database backup which matches the configuration of the current device If the device uses static NVs only and the bindings which were originally used together with this project were saved and are available in a file the network configuration may be adjusted by completely removing the old device definition if any executing the integration procedure for a pre programmed new device followed by a binding import to restore the original bindings 10 4 3 Recover from a failed Update When a project update including a change of the static interface fails there may be some extra steps necessary to restore the last working setup or to resolve the original
166. e e Communication is possible even when the device is not commissioned or otherwise not reachable on the CEA 709 port e No LNS or special network interface hardware is required The standard Ethernet port which is available on every PC is enough LIMITS e Noconnection to LNS if present and therefore no way to update the database in case the new project changes the static interface of the device Projects which add or remove static network variables or otherwise change the static interface may not be loaded via this method if the device is part of an LNS database since the database will be out of sync after the download and cannot be repaired by the user only the configuration software can apply the necessary changes Use the LNS connection method in this case see section 2 2 1 1 e Any dynamic network variables which were created on the device using a network management tool will show up as usable data points in the project but the available information is limited to the data stored in the device For example the functional block in which the NVs were created will be unknown since this information is only stored in the LNS database and is not available on the device e Network scans are conducted by the device itself using a built in scanner engine This scan is slower than an LNS scan and cannot provide as much information for example device names will have to be set manually 2 2 1 3 CEA 709 FT 10 CEA 852 Connections
167. e touch the value preset name of the entry which is to be removed and select the remove command from the dropdown box If this operation is restricted the remove command will not be selectable 6 2 1 10 Activate Deactivate Days To activate or deactivate individual days select the desired day from the left column and touch the headline of the time table to open a dropdown menu From this menu select activate or deactivate only one of the two commands will be shown If this operation is restricted the time table menu will not open 6 2 1 11 Clear or Copy Time Tables To clear all entries in a time table or copy them to a different day select the day to clear or to copy from in the left column and touch the headline of the time table to open a dropdown menu From this menu use the clear or the various copy commands to perform the desired operations If this operation is restricted the time table menu will not open Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 41 LOYTEC 6 2 1 12 Edit Exception Days To change the days on which a certain exception schedule is active select the exception day in the left column and touch the headline of the time table to open a dropdown menu From this menu select the edit command to open a new window in which the definition of the active days may be modified The window has two columns to show the type of entry and the data The following entry types are possible e Single Date This type of
168. e L VIS configuration software I LVisDemo Echelon LonMaker LVisDema vad Subsystem 1 jej E Be tdt Mem wet Format Tods Sape Qon Wow tb INO No 3ye ni ex B 7 u SEa AZ Iman D c ESR GAY SBA c AREA a n Boo Closed Loop Sensor EMS 1 Closed Loop Actuato t 1j Te Sedis Width 0 640 Height 0 40 Ange 0 deg Page ijt Figure 8 New dynamic network variable 11 4 2 NL220 To create dynamic network variables in NL220 first add the L VIS device to your project Then browse to the node which holds the complementary network variable of the new dynamic network variable to be created Drag the complementary network variable and drop it on the desired L VIS LonMark object of the L VIS device In the dialog Figure Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 151 LOYTEC 9 enter a name for the new dynamic network variable and set the direction and the poll attribute as required When done click on OK NOTE Make sure to set the poll attribute of the NV to Set if you are creating an input NV in order to allow the device to support the receive timeout and poll on system start features Add network variable s Direction C Output Input Cancel Poll attribute Clear C Same as source NV Help C Set Opposite of source NV Number to create fi Start rank o v Remove array subscripts Variable name Figure 9 Add ne
169. e device e The device restarts and is ready to use 10 2 2 Static NV Projects A device with a project using static NVs only is easy to replace if it is possible to connect the new device to an IP network for programming purposes Here is the recommended procedure Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 139 LOYTEC e Connect to the new device in standalone mode using a TCP IP connection requires to set up the IP settings for the new device e Make sure the device is empty and remove any existing project if required This can be done through the configuration software using the command Remove Configuration from the File menu e Load the project from the file and download it to the device A warning will appear stating that the static interface will change and that an already integrated device cannot be upgraded This is OK since we are changing the interface so that it will match the already integrated device e Once the device restarted it is ready to use Connect it at its final location replacing the old device and use the standard procedure of your network management tool to replace the device If an XIF file is required for this operation you may use the one which was originally used to integrate the device or create a new one from within the configuration software In case it is not possible to program the new device using a standalone connection the procedure becomes more complicated because the dev
170. e device to be replaced If this is not the case and the model number is not adjusted before the download the replacement of the device may fail with an error stating that the new program interface does not match the previous program interface 10 2 3 Mixed Projects static and dynamic Version 4 5 These projects are the hardest to replace since it takes a two step process to complete the replacement First the new device needs to be loaded with the project to match the static interface of the original device then it may be commissioned in the network to get the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 140 LOYTEC dynamic NVs created and then the project needs to be loaded again so that the dynamic NVs which were not available the first time can be used The recommended procedure is a combination of the above two procedures e Follow the procedure to replace a device with static NVs to prepare the new device with the original project When the project is loaded from the file a dialog will appear and list all dynamic data points in the project stating that they could not be found on the device e Finish the dialog by removing all data points listed Since the device does not yet contain any dynamic NVs these data points cannot be used for the moment e Download the modified project into the device but do not save this project over your original project Remember that it has all dynamic NV data points stripped You may save th
171. e encoded in ISO 10646 Unicode and will be transferred to the client in UTF 8 encoding according to the FTP protocol extension RFC2640 Clients who support this extension can then display these file names correctly Most web browser based FTP clients either detect the UTF 8 encoding automatically or provide an option where the user may set the desired encoding To maximize compatibility to existing FTP clients it is desirable to use only ASCII characters for the name of trend control objects An easy way to manually access the files on the device is to use the windows explorer or a web browser and type the following into the address URL field ftp lt user gt lt address gt Replace lt user gt with the user name for data access as defined in the project settings and lt address gt with the IP address or DNS name of the device for example ftp data 192 168 1 20 You will then be asked for the password and the file system contents will be shown You can now navigate to the required files and download them to the local hard disk of your PC for further processing LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 76 LOYTEC NOTE Since the trend data files are actually symbolic links to a device driver you cannot directly open the files on the device Also the file size may be shown as 0 because it is not immediately known the data is generated on the fly while you are downloading it You may only download the files Some FTP cl
172. e maximum number of events which can be stored in the CEA709 LonMark scheduler unit since each event will consume one entry in the table of daily schedules Also note that a default event is implemented as an exception schedule as well and that it will apply for all days Since the weekly schedules have a fixed priority which is lower than the lowest priority of any exception schedule such a default event will immediately mask out all data which might still be present in weekly schedules If this is the case the user will see the available weekly schedule data at priority 255 but since they will not apply there will be no value names shown for these events until the user converts them to events using exception schedules Therefore do not use a default event when you are still using weekly schedules 6 3 Setup Menu Version 4 5 All devices come with a built in setup menu which is used to set device specific parameters such as the devices IP address control network settings or date and time zone These settings are related to the installation of the device and are usually configured at installation time Once the device 1s installed and a project is downloaded to the device the built in setup menu may be hidden so that it is no longer accessible to the users of the device Alternatively access to the setup pages may be protected by a PIN code Both options are available in the Project Settings dialog which can be accessed from the
173. e only power supplies with the characteristics shown in Table 1 Connect earth ground to the stud labeled with the earth ground symbol Loosen the top nut and attach the earth ground wire to this location The FT 10 or LP 10 network is connected to the terminal labeled FT LPT The signal wires are connected to terminals A and B the shield if available is connected to terminal EARTH This EARTH terminal is internally connected to the main earth terminal When in MSTP mode the RS485 bus is connected to the terminal labeled MSTP Up to four external temperature sensors can be connected to the terminal labeled TEMP Compatible temperature sensors are available from LOYTEC under the part number L TEMPI The temperature range of this electronic sensor specified as 55 to 125 C and the accuracy is 0 5 Celsius within the range from 10 to 85 C The resolution of the sensor is 0 0625 C The sensor device contains an integrated circuit which is connected via a digital interface to the main unit so that no further calibration is needed Multiple sensor devices are connected in parallel bus topology The measured temperature is available in four internal system registers Sensor 1 Temp to Sensor 4 Temp where the sensors are assigned to the registers by increasing serial numbers of the sensor hardware The terminal cannot be used for direct connection of passive NTC or PTC elements DO NOT CONNECT ANY DEVICES OTHER THAN L TEMP1 SENSORS to t
174. e project to a different file but this is not necessary e Now take the device and execute the procedure for replacing a device using dynamic NVs that is physically replace the device and continue with the procedure If an XIF file or a device template is required for the replacement use the same XIF which was used to initially integrate the device or use the same device template as the device to be replaced Since the device already has a project loaded which matches the final static interface it will be possible to replace the device without changing the static interface in the database Commissioning the device will create all the dynamic NVs stored in the database e The original project must now be loaded a second time but this time the dynamic NV data points can be assigned to the existing NVs and the project should load without errors 10 3 Configuration Change This section describes the necessary procedures to change the configuration of an already integrated device It depends on the existing project and the kind of changes done to the project how the update may be performed NOTE For all configuration changes it is strongly recommended to first execute the download procedure and then store the new project on the PC usually overwriting the last stored project since this guarantees that the model number stored in the file on the PC matches the model number which was automatically selected during the upgrade procedure and t
175. e steps necessary to replace an already integrated device with a new device using the same project as the old device Depending on the situation this may not be a trivial task The procedures for the possible situations are detailed in the following sections NOTE The following procedures assume that the L VIS project file is available to the PC which runs the configuration software If this is not the case the project must first be uploaded from the old device and saved to a file 10 2 1 Dynamic NV Projects Devices using dynamic NVs only are relatively easy to replace since the device may physically be replaced right away and the configuration software may then be run in either mode The recommended procedure to replace a device using dynamic NVs is as follows e Physically replace the device in your network the new device still being empty that is no project is loaded yet e Execute the standard replacement procedure of your network management tool and use the already existing device template which was installed by the configuration software This is the same template as used to originally integrate the device since the device does not change its static interface in such a setup e After the replacement make sure that the device is commissioned so that the dynamic NVs are created on the device e Run the configuration software either in plug in mode or in standalone mode load the project from the file and program it into th
176. e template to add additional content to each of the auto generated pages set the page margins to restrict the generated content to the area reserved for it e Allow data entry for input data points Creates input controls for input data points such that their value may be modified This can be useful for OPC client data points e Allow data entry for output data points Creates input controls for output data points This is on by default but may be turned off to create a project where the user can see the current value of output data points but may not change their value e Add data point folder path headline This option adds one line at the top to show the current location within the data point folder hierarchy A show menu action is attached to this line allowing the user to open the menu when touching the headline e Add page numbering This option adds a page numbering current total at the right end of the headline If the folder path headline is not activated the headline will be enabled without the path just the page numbering e Add links to sub folders This option places the names of all sub folders at the beginning of the page and then continues with the actual data points Each of the folder names has an action attached to it which links to the first page of the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 170 LOYTEC respective sub folder such that navigation to sub folders is possible without opening the menu
177. eate a menu item and add a page to the menu item Name the page e g to Temp Example C Add a text control to the page and enter a header text for the page e g Temperature e On the page create a bar control select Add Bar from the context menu of the preview frame Name the bar graph e g Temp Bar in the General tab e Onthe Bar Graph tab enter the value range for the bar graph e g 20 to 40 and set the flag for Thermometer Style e Select Add Data Point from the context menu of the bar graph From the data point template list select the nviTemp input data point e Make sure that the Value Translation Setting on the Data Point tab is set to OFF Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 193 LOYTEC e Select the page in the tree view In the context menu of the page choose Copy Go to the menu item e g Example 2 open the context menu and choose Paste A copy ofthe page is inserted n the menu e Change the name and text of the page to Temp Example F e Select the input data point which is connected to the bar graph in the newly created page Set the Value Translation Setting to C gt F e Depending on whether the Temperature should be shown in Fahrenheit or Celsius set the Invisible Page flag on the Menu Page tab of the corresponding page Load the project into the L VIS device Only the page which does not have the Invisible Page flag set shows up in the L VIS device see Figure 19
178. eated from existing templates The first step therefore is to either scan the network for remote network objects or import a file to get a list of available template objects from which new client mappings may be created 9 3 4 1 CSV EDE Import Version 4 5 Use the context menu of the file import folder and select the command mport File Browse to the CSV file you want to import and select it For BACnet models standard EDE files may be imported through this method For CEA 709 models a similar file format was specified so that tools may be developed which are able to output data in a format the configuration software is able to read An example CSV file for CEA 709 is installed together with the configuration software Once opened the contents of the file will be parsed and suitable data object templates will be created in the file import folder These templates are then used in a later step to create client mappings for use on the L VIS device see section 9 3 4 3 below LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 122 LOYTEC 9 3 4 2 Network Scan Scanning an existing network is another way to generate template points Depending on the type of device and the current operating mode of the configuration software there are different ways to scan the network e BACnet no connection to a device In this mode there is currently no way to scan the BACnet network To execute the scan a connection to a BACnet device must be established
179. econdary Scale If enabled the secondary scale is drawn on the right end of the graph and the final scale range is adjusted such that a common horizontal grid between the primary and the secondary axis can be drawn To assign the connected data points to one of the two value axis select the data point from the tree view and set the desired radio button which 1s shown next to the value range input fields On the right side the Time Axis is configured Select a suitable Time Span which is given in time per page For example if you set this to one hour per page the graph will show the values of the last hour together on one page To keep older data as well which is not visible on the first page because it is older than the given time span set the desired amount of History Buffer that should be used by this control This value is given in pages that is 1f you set the time span to one hour and configure one history page the control will store the values of the last two hours Older data will be overwritten by new data LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 73 LOYTEC NOTE For trend controls which are recording trend data locally whenever a simple data point is connected to the control the memory requirements can get significant if you use a larger number of such controls and set a high number of history pages Check the project statistics for more information In case the control is used to display the contents of a trend data poi
180. ect through which the schedules may be viewed and edited For this purpose there 1s a specialized type of control available the Schedule Control To use it create a control of this type on the page and connect one or more scheduler data points to it Please see section 8 5 9 for more information about schedule control configuration and sections 6 2 1 and 6 2 2 for a guide on how to operate a schedule control on the device 9 5 Local Alarm Server To use a local alarm server create an alarm server point in the folder called Alarm On CEA 709 devices there may only be one alarm server for the entire device BACnet devices support an arbitrary number of alarm servers There are two different types of alarming available The current software supports one type for BACnet and the other type for CEA 709 devices 9 5 1 Intrinsic Reporting BACnet devices support an alarm mechanism called intrinsic reporting In this concept high and low limits are specified for individual server objects and alarms can be generated by the server object and reported to an assigned alarm server when the value of the server object exceeds these limits for a specified time period Other devices in the network can register for alarm updates at the alarm server object which is a notification class object and display the current list of alarms as well as acknowledge individual alarms To set up a local alarm server and assign it to server objects the following steps a
181. ect on the operation The touch display is able to detect three different input actions e Touch one point at a time e Touch and hold long press e Touch and move LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 36 LOYTEC The simple and intuitive touch operation 1s used to select menus select controls and enter data on the input keypad This 1s straight forward A short touch on a control will also trigger touch release short press and selection actions connected to it The touch and hold operation opens the navigation menu after a configurable time 0 to 5 seconds when done on a free sport on the display If the area of a normal input control is touched the control enters input mode and all further input is processed by the control If the control has an action object which is set to trigger on a ong press the action will be executed by a touch and hold on the control The touch and move operation can be used to adjust values on a bar graph control or move the cursor in a trend control If executed in a free space on the page there are tree touch gestures which the device can react to e Touch and move up This will immediately bring up the navigation menu so the user does not have to wait for the timeout as is the case with the touch and hold action e Touch and move right This switches to the next page connected to the currently selected menu item If there is only one page connected this gesture does nothing it does not m
182. eeks e Plus Button This button is used to add a new event to the scheduler unit A new dialog window appears which allows the user to define the desired event This dialog is explained later on e Pen Button This button opens the global event list e Page Title Touching the page title will switch the preview to the current week e Day Columns Touching one of the seven day columns can have different effects depending on the touch position and type o Touch on a scheduled value Opens the event editor for the event which corresponds to the selected value Note that multiple areas on the same day or on different days may correspond to the same event o Short touch on a free area Switches to a detailed view of that day Depending on the configuration of the scheduler control this can be either the time table or the event list o Long touch on a free area Opens the event editor to add a new event at the selected time and day depends on the touch position e Day Column Headings Touching the heading of a certain day column switches to a detailed view of that day Depending on the configuration of the control this will be the event list or the time table In any case it will be the opposite from the page that is shown by a touch of the day column The schedule control can be configured to switch back to this page and show the preview of the current week whenever the device enters idle mode the display is dimmed after the user d
183. een Example 1 Define a solid color for the bar and the transparent background color for the container and the frame Now you can prepare a page background showing a sunblind which is completely rolled down Place the bar in front of this image and you are able to cover up parts of the sunblind with the solid bar color making it look like the sunblind is going up and down If you switch color assignments you can use the moving bar to selectively uncover parts of the background Example 2 In front of the above window showing the moving sunblind a completely transparent bar control may be placed both bar color and container color are set to the transparent background and drawing of the bar can be disabled using the Invisible Bar option to increase efficiency By connecting an output data point to this control it becomes selectable and accepts user input Now the user may touch any position on the window which will result in a value update on the output data point This value may now be used as a position indicator and the sunblind may be moved to the indicated position automatically without the user keeping a down or up button pressed all the time LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 71 LOYTEC NOTE The static sunblind image in the background may be replaced by a bitmap control with a mapping table to show the current rotation of the sunblind Example 3 A combined display of a current value and a set point can be c
184. een the PC and the device the SSH protocol is preferred over the FTP Telnet connection Check your firewall rules if necessary Note that SSH connections are not possible for the LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 devices Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 17 LOYTEC NOTE In case FTP is used over a wide area network and a connection is not possible try to change the passive FTP option In some cases only one of the two methods is working depending on firewall settings and NAT router capabilities on both ends of the connection In the worst case when the configurations on both ends are contradicting each other neither active nor passive FTP may be possible If possible use SSH for WAN connections 2 3 Quick Start Tutorial CEA 709 This tutorial describes the steps to create a first demo project and load the project into a CEA 709 device like the LVIS 3E100 The tutorial assumes that the configuration software is already installed and the LNS plug in is registered as described in the prior section For the LNS specific part of this tutorial the LonMaker 3 1 network management tool is used Other network management tools which are based on LNS 3 or above which support dynamic network variables and the LNS Plug in Interface can be used as well for this tutorial e g Newron s NL220 SPEGA s Alex 3 Professional 2 3 1 Add the device to the network The first step is to integrate the device into an existing netw
185. eference other data objects use the command Manage Data Points from the context menu of the copied object and reassign the data point objects to other data sources as explained in section 7 2 5 or consider using templates If the copy is pasted into a different project the referenced data sources may not be available at all In this case the required data sources are automatically created in the destination project so that the references may be resolved For example it is possible to copy a page which operates on register data only into a completely different project and the page will function the same way it did in the original project Registers which exist for example system registers will be used directly while others will be created as necessary NOTE Not all types of data sources can be created automatically This is especially true for complex data sources such as alarm servers or local scheduler data points These references must be resolved manually after the copy was inserted 7 2 3 2 Fonts If the copied object uses custom fonts and the object is pasted into another project these fonts may or may not be available depending on the setup of the destination project The software will search all loaded fonts in the destination project to find the required fonts based on the font size type and family as displayed in the font dropdown list If a suitable font 1s found it will be used automatically If the required font
186. elect Bitmap and choose a bitmap which is displayed when the alarm condition is met Load the project into the L VIS device Statue Mar Monu Example Suomen j Eximles J Example 3 Fresas Alarm Frosa State Mapping Data Poirt Color Text Bimap wr porre Figure 22 Freeze alarm with text and bitmap controls 15 4 Example 4 Using text mapping and Date Control This example describes how to integrate a date control into a project The date control will display an analog clock It will get the time value from the internal real time clock In addition three text fields will be created which display the actual time in a textual format The time value for this text will be received from a turnaround binding of the real time keeper object Create a new menu item and assigned a page to this menu item On the page add a text control for the header text name it e g Header and enter a text in the Text field of the Common Properties tab e g Text Watch In the context menu of the new page select Add Date In the context menu of the date control select Add Data Point In the dialog window select the System Time parameter and click on OK On the Date Time Control tab select Graphic for the Style and choose a Graphic Style For the text display we need a turnaround bound dynamic network variable which allows to access hours minutes and seconds separately Create a dynamic network varia
187. emote scheduler points will change the static interface of the device Version 4 5 To keep the project reusable in different networks it 1s desirable to create the remote scheduler and calendar data point manually on CEA 709 devices and define the connection to the scheduler server by the network binding of the link NVs only Instead of using data from a network scan the required data points can be created as follows e Select the data point folder named Calendar and use New Remote Calendar from the context menu in the data point list to bring up a dialog to create a new remote calendar point e Enter a name for the calendar point a name for the input NV which will be used to connect the calendar from another device to this data point and select the desired functional block in which the NV should be located e Press OK to create the calendar point repeat for more calendar points if required There should be one calendar point for each device from which schedule data is viewed since the calendar point will carry the information about exception days used in the schedules e Select the data point folder named Scheduler and use the context menu to create a New Remote Scheduler point Enter a name for the data point a name for the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 132 LOYTEC input NV which will be used to connect the point to a scheduler server and select the functional block in which the NV should be located e Press
188. en checked instructs the control never to show ACK buttons It is intended for users who want to create a view only alarm list with no possibility to acknowledge alarms While a similar effect may also be obtained by setting the controls access level for example to level 15 the result is different Using access control the ACK buttons will still be visible so there will be less room to show other information Also a user with a high enough access level will still be able to acknowledge alarms in this case Enable Navigation Bar This option enables the navigation bar This will usually be enabled to allow the user to navigate to older entries of the list which do not fit on the first page 12 hour time format am pm Changes the display of time from 24 hour to 12 hour format Use am pm as prefix Available when 12 hour mode is enabled tells the control to use the strings for AM and PM as a prefix instead of a suffix This option is required for some languages to yield correct 12 hour time representation Use year month day suffix This option is available when the date format is set to ISO 8601 It changes the date format to add the localized strings for year month and day as suffix to each date component replacing the hyphens This option 1s required for some languages to yield commonly used date representations for example Japanese 2011 12 H 14 Use hour minute suffix This option is availab
189. encode b1 sin v1 cos v1 tan v1 sinh v1 cosh v1 tanh v1 asin v1 acos v1 atan v1 asinh v1 acosh v1 atanh v1 gamma v1 abs v1 Return Value logical AND of the Boolean values b1 and b2 b1 amp amp b2 logical OR of the Boolean values b1 and b2 bi1 b2 logical exclusive OR of the values bi and b2 b1 b2 logical inverse of the Boolean value b b returns 1 if v1 is lower than v2 else returns 0 v1 v2 returns 1 if v1 is lower or equal v2 else 0 vi lt v2 returns 1 if v1 equals v2 elseO vi v2 returns 1 if v1 is greater or equal v2 else 0 vi gt v2 returns 1 if v1 is greater than v2 else 0 v1 v2 returns vt if b is true else returns vf b vt vf Reads all values from the stack converts them to Boolean values and encodes them into an integer value where the first value is used as the LSB and the last value as the MSB Returns the sine of v1 where v1 is given in radians Returns the cosine of v1 where v1 is given in radians Returns the tangent of v1 where v1 is given in radians Returns the hyperbolic sine of v1 which is defined mathematically as exp v1 exp v1 2 Returns the hyperbolic cosine of v1 which is defined mathematically as exp v1 exp v1 2 Returns the hyperbolic tangent of v1 which is defined mathematically as sinh v1 cosh v1 Returns the arc sine of v1 that is the value whose sine is v1 Returns the arc cosine of v1 that is
190. ent selection of base paths LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 113 LOYTEC NOTE As a rule of thumb for selecting base paths for sub template instances always stay within the data point folder hierarchy which is set for the design of the parent template If an instance of the sub template actually needs data from an unrelated folder hierarchy it is usually required to add another base path to the parent template to make the new folder hierarchy accessible and settable by the user when the template is instantiated The first part of any relative base path has the following notation N folder A sign followed by the number of the base path of the parent template which was chosen as the basis for the relative path 1 to 4 followed by the actual path in parenthesis which is currently set at this location Since a template may have up to four different base paths it is necessary to know to which one of them the sub template path is relative NOTE In case the base paths of the template are changed the relative paths of all sub template instances are re evaluated and adjusted for the best match based on the new set of base paths available Also if a base path of a sub template instance is changed a new relative path will be calculated based on the available base paths of the parent template and the selected data point folder 8 15 5 Local Changes Version 4 5 Once a template is instantiated it is often
191. ent tool it has to be registered in the LNS project Please refer to the documentation of your network management tool how to register an LNS plug in in a network management project During the registration process of the L VIS Configuration software plug in LNS device templates are created for the FT 10 and IP 10L Ethernet versions of the device 2 2 Connecting to the Device There are several ways in which the configuration software can be run and used to configure a device While this is straight forward for BACnet models it is important to know the advantages and limitations of each method for CEA 709 devices NOTE All devices running firmware 4 0 or newer will require user authentication to establish a fully functional connection The default password for firmware 4 0 is admin All newer firmware versions use loytec4u as the factory default Note that a basic connection without password may be possible inquiry of device model firmware and status but any access to the device configuration will fail if a password is required and was not provided during initial connection 2 2 4 CEA 709 Devices Version 4 5 CEA 709 devices may be configured in several different ways e Through LNS software run as LNS plug in e Viaa TCP IP connection using FTP Telnet or SSH e Via a CEA 709 connection FT 10 or IP 852 Each of these methods has some advantages and some limitations in what they can do Please see the follo
192. enting the system parameters or data objects representing dynamic network variables which may be present on a CEA 709 device NOTE Data objects may be thought of as the source or sink of a data flow where every object has a defined direction either source or sink e g data coming in or data going out For internally created registers two such data objects are created one to write data to the register and one to fetch the current register value Input and output network objects are represented by a single data object with the appropriate direction BACnet value objects and other objects which may be read and written are represented by two data objects one for read access and one for write access Version 4 5 Structured network objects as available on CEA 709 devices are represented by individual data objects for each of the structure elements in addition to the object representing the entire network variable However most of the complex data objects which represent more than a single scalar value are not supported by most controls and cannot be attached to them The following exceptions to this rule apply for the current devices e SNVT switch Data output objects of this type may be directly connected to an alarm generator to control the entire switch See also section 8 11 for detailed information about alarm generators e SNVT alarm2 As above data outputs of this type may be connected to an alarm generator to send out ala
193. enu To do this right click on the root menu object in the tree view and select Add Item from the context menu A new menu item is created and connected to the menu object The new menu item is automatically selected so that you may browse the property pages and see what you want to change The name of the item object can be changed in the Name box of the General property page This changes the name of the object in the object tree and has no effect on the appearance of the menu item on the device To change the text of the item itself go to the Common Properties page and change the contents of the Text box The display in the preview window changes as you type so you can immediately see the results You may want to change the font to the 12x16 ROM Fixed R font so you get a larger item which is easier to select on the touch screen The menu item object is described in detail in section 8 3 Repeat the steps above to add another menu item and call it Setup Again change the Text of the item to read something like Setup and change the font to make the item a comfortable size This item will be used to enter the devices setup menu LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 20 LOYTEC NOTE The device will check the last item of the root menu and see if it has any pages or sub menus attached to it If the item has no further objects attached this is called a return item and is located at the last position in the root menu the
194. es Version 4 5 CEA 709 On this page the device can be given a CEA 709 address domain subnet node and can be set online This is useful to connect to the device in standalone mode before the device is actually commissioned in a network for example because the project needs to be downloaded first to define the static interface of the device and there is no TCP IP connectivity available CEA 852 RNI On this page the IP 852 parameters or RNI parameters depending on the mode of operation can be specified Supported parameters are the escrow and aggregation timeout the IP 852 port number the MDS key and the NAT support mode Please refer to the documentation of your configuration server for more information about these parameters The defaults should normally be OK unless your channel uses MD5 encryption in which case you need to enter the MDS key and activate it by selecting Enable with new key gt from the dropdown list after the key was entered Starting with firmware 4 0 2 it is also possible to enter the address of the configuration server on this page LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 48 LOYTEC NOTE The key is displayed as 8 groups of 4 digit hex values which is a common representation of MDS key values The order to read the key is from left to right and top to bottom To add the device to an IP852 channel you can either enter the address of the desired configuration server on the device or add the de
195. et name All selected sources will be processed and the target name will be chosen to be as close to the source name as LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 52 LOYTEC possible For example the duplicate operation when run with this naming rule will create a data source Test from the original source Test e Search and Replace This setting is used to specify a simple search and replace algorithm All data sources which contain the search string given in the first input field will be processed The last occurrence of the search string in the original name will be replaced by the replacement string given in the second input field to form the new name Most often used in conjunction with the reassign operation for example to automatically reassign all data points referencing xxx Room001 with xxx Room002 replace 001 with 002 e Regular Expression This is the most powerful setting The regular expression given in the first input field 1s matched against the original name If the expression matches the entry is processed otherwise ignored If processed the matching groups if present are extracted and are used together with the name template given in the second input field to build the new name The new name will be composed of the text in the name template with all occurrences of NO replaced by the contents of the first matching group all 1 replaced by the contents of the second matching group and so on For example the regular
196. etting from 80 to 100 percent e Define new presets This operation allows the user to define new value presets if the scheduler unit controls only one value e Add and remove entries This operation allows the user to add and remove entries in the time table Also bound to this operation are the related operations to clear entire days copy them to other days as well as enabling and disabling individual days LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 83 LOYTEC e Change effective period This operation allows the user to change the effective period of the schedule thereby enabling and disabling not only single days but the entire scheduler unit e Edit day patterns of exception days This operation allows write access to the contents of the calendar which is connected to the scheduler unit The user may add remove and edit entries in the calendar which define the days on which a certain exception schedule is active Also linked to this access right is the setting of the exception day priority To change the minimum required access level to perform one of these operations select the operation from the list and select the desired access level from the dropdown box below the list Keep in mind that the minimum access level specified for the entire control on the Common property page must be satisfied in addition to the levels specified here 8 5 10 Alarm List Control Version 4 5 The alarm list control is a specialized control to d
197. font source file so the reduced size has no meaning in this case e Disable anti aliasing In cases where a vector font is rendered in a small size the line width may fall below the LCD resolution causing lines to fade out If the font does not automatically provide an optimized pixel rendering for small sizes the font rendering can be changed from anti aliased to monochrome avoiding faded lines in expense of edge smoothness The effect is immediately visible in the LCD preview e Do not embed font source If possible the original font source file will be embedded in the project file such that the source is available no matter in which environment the project is opened For most fonts this will be OK but font files can vary a lot in size ranging from some 50kB to over 20MB Font sources which are obviously too large will be excluded automatically but for other fonts the user may choose to not embed certain font sources to trade off project size with project portability If available the size of the original vector data will be shown in parenthesis following the path to the source file If the font source is embedded some operations like resize and new size can be executed without the need to locate the original file on the PC In case the original file is not embedded it will be searched on the PC where the configuration software is running This mechanism is detailed in the next section 14 13 2 Font File Location Version 4 5
198. from situations where the current configuration of the device does not match the current definition of the device in the network This may happen as a result of a failed upgrade procedure or because the definition of the device in the network changed because the network had to be restored from an older backup Basically there are two ways to resolve any such conflict e Change the configuration of the device to match the current definition in the network e Change the definition of the device in the network to match the current configuration The decision depends on the desired end result that is 1f the current network definition or the current device configuration is closer to the desired end result 10 4 1 Change Device Configuration Version 4 5 In case the current definition of the device in the network represents the desired end result the configuration of the device should be set back to match the definition in the database This of course is only possible if a matching project is still available as a file on a PC Assuming that a suitable project file 1s available the device may be easily restored by following the appropriate procedure for a device replacement as outlined earlier in this document LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 143 LOYTEC To determine if a project is suitable or not it is not necessary to execute the whole replacement procedure just to find out that the result still does not match the definiti
199. from this list into the time table area to define the desired output values throughout the day Days may be copied to other days using the Copy to button At the bottom left there is a list of all available days which consists of the seven week days which can be used to define default schedules for each day of the week plus any additional special days defined by the local calendar For the special days a priority must be assigned so that the system knows which schedule to follow on a day which is part of more than one calendar pattern NOTE The priority settings are according to the underlying network technology For CEA 709 the highest priority is 0 the lowest is 126 127 is reserved for the default weekly schedules For BACnet the highest priority is 1 the lowest priority is 16 When the setup is done save the changes and exit the configuration dialog 9 4 4 Schedule Configuration Data Version 4 5 It is important to note that the configuration of the scheduler and calendar objects consists of two parts One is the point setup meaning the number of calendar patterns number of scheduler objects and which points are controlled by which scheduler This information is part of the data point setup of the project similar to the definition of local and remote network objects It is always in effect when the project is downloaded and it will have an influence on the static interface of a CEA 709 device The other part is t
200. ge are used to directly edit the formula using the reverse polish notation To add a variable to the stack either double click the variable in the list at the left or select it and click the Add Variable button To add a constant value to the stack enter the value in the input field above the button Add Value and then press the button To add a function to the stack select the desired function from the dropdown list and press the Add Function button When a function is added to the stack it will first fetch as many values from the current stack as it needs input values then execute its operation and put the result back on the stack NOTE Even if you use the infix notation at the bottom to enter your formula the dropdown list of available functions will be useful to look up the names of functions you want to use and see how many arguments they accept 8 13 2 Application Hints Version 4 5 A few functions end with a three dots in the argument list This means that they accept a variable number of arguments When used in the formula they will fetch all available values from the stack in RPN syntax and then calculate the result which will be put back on the stack and be the only value on the stack since all other values were used as input to the function LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 106 LOYTEC This behavior causes some limits in how these functions may be used You are on the safe side if you use such a
201. generators data point connectors or mathematical objects However it 1s recommended to keep all objects which are required for a specific control or control group to function together on the same page This way the page continues to work when it is copied or moved to another project because the required invisible objects are copied together with the page The base collection outside of the main menu should only hold objects which are related to the device rather than specific page functionality The last collection in the tree view is called Templates It is used to collect all template pages of the project Templates are a complex topic which is covered in more detail in section 8 15 of this manual 8 10 1 Collection Properties Aside from the properties on the General property page which apply to all objects a collection keeps record of the position and size of the bounding box which can be drawn around all visible objects contained in the collection This data can be seen on the Common Properties page In the context menu of the collection are a number of commands to add new objects and control the visibility of the entire collection Hide Show Contents 8 10 2 Collection Handling If a collection is part of a project page and contains visible objects a bounding box around all objects contained in the collection 1s drawn in the preview when the collection is selected Using this box the entire collection may be moved to another locat
202. ges The wait time comes into effect if there is no value change to report during the hold time It defines how much longer the server should keep the request and send a delayed response if a value change is detected If there is no value change even during the wait time the request times out and an empty response is sent 13 4 4 Auto Convert to L WEB Version 4 5 This area is used to set up automatic generation of an LWEB project matching the current L Vis project It can optionally be downloaded to the device together with the L Vis project where it can be used by LWEB 800 802 clients to display the same project as currently running on the L Vis device also on the PC The following settings are available e Automatically save LWEB project This option must be enabled to make use of any of the following options When enabled instructs the configuration software to build and save an LWEB version of the project whenever the L Vis version is saved To do this automatically the user needs to specify host name and port number of the device which will be used by LWEB to fetch data point values o Host In most cases you can leave this at the default of localhost This will build an LWEB project which fetches the data points from the same device from which the LWEB project was loaded which is usually what you want Only in cases where the generated project will be loaded from a central server instead of the L Vis device enter the name or addre
203. h lists different input values and their corresponding colors Please also review the functional description of the mapping table object for more details There are two major differences when compared to a normal mapping table 1 Mapping table objects are passive lookup tables They are only used by the control to support the display of values received and to build value selection menus for the user to select a value to enter The control itself is the object receiving or sending values The mapping table object only assists the control in value translation In contrast color mapping objects are active similar to trigger objects They receive their own values from separate input data points connected directly to the color mapping object Whenever a new value is received the color mapping object will translate it to the desired color and reconfigure the control accordingly This means that color changes through color mapping objects are completely independent from the value currently displayed by the control itself 2 Any number of color mappings can be connected to the same control with each mapping targeting one or more different control colors While the color from a standard mapping table 1s always assigned to a specific fixed color usually the text or container color a color mapping object can be configured to control any of the available colors 8 8 1 Color Mapping Properties The properties of a color mapping table are set on the
204. h screen The setting defines the amount by which the value 1s increased or decreased with each turn of the jog dial e Acceleration This setting is only used by the older LVIS 3ECTB model which has a jog dial instead of a touch screen It defines how much the dial speed increases the amount of value change starting at the given input resolution for low speeds and increasing gradually as the jog dial is turned faster The Flags area contains the following additional options e Convert Data Point Value to Integer This check box needs to be checked when you want to use an integer format specifier in the format string like x or d If the format string wizard is used to generate the format string this check box is also controlled by the wizard as required e Hexadecimal Input Keypad This check box can be used together with a x format to provide a hexadecimal input keypad matching the way the value is displayed It would be confusing to enter a decimal value and then see it converted into hexadecimal on the control so the display format and the input keypad should use the same number system e Password Input Keypad This option may be used to enter a PIN code The keypad starts out empty instead of showing the current control value and for each digit entered it only shows a star The Format String Wizard on the right side of the page allows creating a correct format string easily by setting a few options e Style The basic style
205. h template located below the template folder The new template instance looks and operates similar to an object collection The symbol in the object tree 1s also similar to a collection but the color is different Similar to a LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 112 LOYTEC collection the template instance can be selected and the bounding box in the LCD preview can be moved to change the location of the objects inside the collection Whenever a template instance is selected there are two new property pages available e Template Instance On this property page the desired data point base folders for this instance must be selected It depends on the template how many base paths are available For each path the path which was originally used to design the template 1s shown above the input field This makes it easy to know which kind of data point folder is expected at this location The number in front of the selected replacement folder is used when a template is instantiated inside another template explained later on Also available is the display offset for this instance which can either be entered here or simply set by moving the bounding box in the LCD preview window e Data Point List On this property page a list of all data points which are used by the template instance after reassignment to the new base folders is displayed for review In case the new base folder is missing some of the required data points the broken d
206. hat in cases where the upgrade must be aborted the device may easily be restored to the last working project since it is still intact on the PC and not already overwritten by the new project 10 3 1 Same NV Configuration This is the easiest of all configuration changes As long as there are no changes to either the static or dynamic NVs of the device there are no special requirements and no special procedures to follow The new project may be downloaded to the device through any of the available methods where a TCP IP connection is usually preferred The device will restart after the download and will be ready to operate without any further steps 10 3 2 Dynamic NV Change Version 4 5 If the project change includes the addition or removal of dynamic NVs without any changes to static NVs the following procedure is recommended LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 141 LOYTEC e Execute all required changes to the dynamic NV interface using your network management software This includes adding new NVs and removing old NVs as required e Once the required changes were made start the configuration software or if it is already running use the Update Data Points button from the tool bar to read the new set of available dynamic NVs from the device The configuration software may run in either mode for this type of configuration change e Load the project and modify it as required If the project still uses some of the dyna
207. he possibilities for and are considered longest first nested constructs are considered from the outermost in and concatenated constructs are considered leftmost first The match that will be chosen is the one that uses the earliest possibility in the first choice that has to be made If there is more than one choice the next will be made in the same manner earliest possibility subject to the decision on the first choice and so forth For example ab a b c could match abc in one of two ways The first choice is between ab and a since ab is earlier and does lead to a successful overall match it is chosen Since the b is already spoken for the b must match its last possibility the empty string since it must respect the earlier choice In the particular case where no operators are present and there is only one or the net effect is that the longest possible match will be chosen So ab presented with xabbbby will match abbbb Note that if ab is tried against xabyabbbz it will match ab just after x due to the begins earliest rule In effect the decision on where to start the match is the first choice to be made hence subsequent choices must respect it even if this leads them to less preferred alternatives 14 19 Security Hardening Guide This guide contains security relevant information for operating the product on IT networks For devices operated solely on a field bus network like FT 10 without any connection
208. he configuration software and downloaded to the device Note that it is also possible to save an entire project in XML format or export global parts of the configuration like the font set the project settings or the data point configuration See section 14 14 for details about this function 7 2 5 Manage Data Points This command is available in the context menu of menus items pages and folders It will open a new dialog listing all data point objects below the selected object which data object they reference and which type and direction they have This dialog is useful to organize data references do batch renaming of data sources or reassignment of data points to different data sources as is often required after copying parts of a project for example to add a page for a new room based on the page of an existing room but referencing the data objects of the new room Depending on the selected objects in the data point list multi select is possible some of the operations available using the buttons at the bottom of the window may be disabled 7 2 5 1 Naming Rules Version 4 5 Many of the batch operations open a dialog to set the naming rules for the batch operation The dialog provides three different levels of naming rule specification from very simple to very complex and powerful The three options are e No Custom Naming Rule This is the most basic setting It does not apply any special rules on the source name or the targ
209. he dates entered in calendar patterns and the actual schedule of each scheduler when the scheduler should output which value preset as well as the definition of the value presets themselves This information 1s usually changed during the runtime of the device that is it is considered dynamic data similar to the current value of a network variable or server object this data 1s in fact the current value of such objects Therefore this data is not reset with every project download since the user wants to keep the current values if possible Only if the scheduler setup itself changed the device will not be able to take over the current settings since they do no longer apply LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 126 LOYTEC NOTE The scheduler and calendar configuration entered in the configuration dialogs is stored together with the project It can also be exported to XML format or imported from XML format Once the project itself was downloaded to the device for the first time the scheduler configuration should usually be downloaded as well to initialize the created objects with some data Since this is normally not wanted in subsequent project downloads the configuration software will normally ask the user if the scheduler and calendar objects should be initialized with the configuration data from the project or not The behavior may be changed in the Project Settings Dialog between ask always download and never download In any
210. he desired data point e The selected point will be added to the list of data sources e Select the data point from the source list and make sure the dropdown box below the list is set to Selected Data Source Value e Set the cursor to the position in the mail text at which the value of the data point should be inserted and press the Paste to Text button to add the required placeholder string to the mail text LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 134 LOYTEC Alternatively the placeholder string may be entered manually while typing the email text The placeholder format is variable where variable is vl v2 v3 and so on The variable name assigned to a specific data source is shown in the source list NOTE There are two special variable names which may be used in a placeholder string The special variable name mailid will be replaced by the unique mail ID the variable timestamp will be replaced by the date and time the email was sent Both placeholder strings can be inserted automatically using the dropdown box and the Paste to Text button 9 9 2 E Mail Trigger This tab is used to configure automatic mail sending based on the value of certain data points If nothing 1s configured here the mail may still be sent using an action object in the L VIS project please refer to section 8 8 for a description of action objects To send the mail based on the value or state of a data point follow these steps e Add the
211. he effective period 1f enabled right aligned If the font is too large or the scheduler names are too long there may not LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 80 LOYTEC be enough space and the effective period must either be disabled or shown on a separate line Enable extended user interface This option is available if the device firmware is 4 2 0 or newer and there is only one data point connected to the control Activating this option sets the control to extended user mode The following options are available when the control is in standard mode Scroll daylist This option enables a scroll bar for the list of days left column If the number of total days 1s known and the control is sized such that all days are visible the scroll bar may be disabled to save space in horizontal direction Scroll time table This option enables a scroll bar for the time table right column Since the number of entries in this table is usually not known it is a good idea to keep this option checked However special applications may benefit from the possibility of removing the scroll bar and gain even more space Don t show effective period This option can be used to hide the effective period altogether Useful to either save space or to make sure that the effective period is never modified through this control The following options are available when the control is in extended UI mode Version 4 5 Hide priority in event list This
212. he integration procedure may vary depending on the type of network variables used in the project The following sections detail the three possible variants 10 1 1 1 Dynamic NVs Version 4 5 In case your project uses dynamic NVs only there must be a network database system which provides support for dynamic NVs The configuration software may be run in plug in mode as well as in standalone mode since no complicated database updates are required in this scenario The followings steps will be required to integrate a new device e Create a new device in your database using the provided device template for the L VIS device you are using FT 10 or IP 10L e Create all dynamic network variables on the device which are required for your project e Commission the device so that the dynamic NVs are created and the configuration software can communicate with the device e Run the configuration software either as a plug in on the newly created device or standalone using a TCP IP or CEA 709 connection If everything worked OK the configuration software will be able to contact the device and determine model number and firmware Suitable data points will be automatically created for all LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 10 1 1 2 Static NVs 136 LOYTEC dynamic NVs present on the device If you have communication problems an error message will be displayed and the procedure cannot continue until communication is possible Load t
213. he items of the resulting list can be selected and the object will be selected in the main window for review The find dialog may be kept open side by side with the main window so that new search requests can be executed and the resulting item list can be used to jump to the found objects in the project The basic settings in the search dialog can be found on the top line e Search Pattern This input field can be used to enter a search pattern to apply to the name and or the object path If the field 1s left empty no restrictions are placed on the object name or location e Include Path If this option is checked the search pattern is not only applied to the object name but the entire object path the location within the project is searched e Match Case This option causes the search pattern to be case sensitive e Regular Expression Check this if the search pattern is a regular expression instead of a simple DOS pattern In contrast to a simple pattern which only accepts one star to denote an arbitrary number of unknown characters a regular expression is a lot more flexible and can be used to match almost any complex naming scheme See section 14 18 3 for more information about regular expressions Below the basic settings there are a number of areas to filter objects based on type or location The following filter options are available e Object Type In this area one or more of the available object types may be selected to
214. he most commonly used trend mode A new value is recorded at a certain fixed interval for example once every 10 minutes Given a certain maximum size of the trend log buffer the time frame covered by the trend is known For example taking one reading every hour with a maximum buffer size of 240 entries will provide a history of the last 10 days 9 6 2 2 Change of Value Version 4 5 In this mode a new recording is made whenever the current value changes by at least the amount specified as the COV delta This may reduce the number of records stored when the value does not change significantly However it is no longer known for how long the allocated log buffer will last since the number of records varies Also note that for small COV delta settings or data points which are constantly change their value the number or recorded entries may be higher than desirable This mode is best suited for binary data points where every change On Off must be recorded LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 131 LOYTEC 9 6 2 3 Trigger This mode uses an external trigger event to record a new reading The trigger is controlled by a separate data point which may for example be scheduled by a local scheduler unit to store a new record once every day at a certain time This is very useful in recording meter readings or similar data where readings should be recorded at a specific time of day 9 7 Remote Scheduler and Calendar Adding remote access
215. he project which was already prepared or design a new project If a prepared project is loaded the contained dynamic NV data points will be synchronized with the existing data points based on the NV name direction and type If there are any data points which cannot be assigned automatically a dialog for manual assignment will be displayed Now download the project to the device The device will restart and activate the new project It is now ready to use Projects using static NVs have the advantage that they do not require the network management to support dynamic NVs Also it 1s possible for such projects to run in a special mode where the device is compatible to the older CEA 709 1 A network management commands compared to the extended network management defined in the CEA 709 1 B standard To integrate a device using static NVs the configuration software may be run either as a plug in or standalone The procedure when run as a plug in is fairly automatic Create a new device in your database using the provided device template for the L VIS device you are using FT 10 or IP 10L Commission the device so that the configuration software can communicate with it Run the configuration software as a plug in on the newly created device and load the prepared project or design a new project Download the project to the device A warning will appear notifying the user of the required database update The update and the selection of a ne
216. he software will keep the last 32 snapshots removing older snapshots when new snapshots are taken NOTE The snapshot buffer will be cleared when the project or the configuration sofiware is closed If a certain state of the project should be saved for later reference it must still be written to a file on the PC 14 3 Layout Tools To aid in the layout of controls on the page there are a few buttons located in the tool bar which become available when two or more controls are selected in the LCD preview To select more than one control at the same time select the first control press and hold the shift key and select additional controls NOTE It is important which of the controls you select first The control which was selected first will act as the reference for the layout functions as explained below Once the controls were selected execute the desired layout functions by pressing the buttons in the tool bar or using the commands from the Layout menu of the main window 14 3 1 Alignment Functions The alignment functions will align the left right top or bottom edge or the horizontal or vertical center lines of all selected controls The reference will be the first selected control 14 3 2 Make Same Size These functions make all selected controls the same width or height as the first selected control This function is usually used together with controls of the same type 14 3 3 Space Evenly Version 4 5
217. he static interface of the device will therefore break the connection since the device will have to reset its CEA 709 network configuration in that case The device must then be re commissioned in the network management tool and the connection must be re established Especially in FT 10 mode project downloads can still be slow The same is true for firmware downloads If possible the TCP IP connection method should be used for such tasks Transfer speed is considerably improved when there are no routers with limited buffer size between the PC and the device Routers which are able to handle large packets 254 byte will have no real impact on the transfer speed Routers which allow a maximum packet size of 64 bytes only will degrade the transfer speed Only network interface hardware from LOYTEC can be used for this type of connection Any LOYTEC NIC may be used to run the configuration software that is the software is not registered to specific network interface hardware There is currently no way to conduct a network scan using this connection method since the built in scanner engine on the device can only be controlled using a TCP IP connection 2 2 2 BACnet Devices To configure BACnet devices the software is always run in standalone mode and a connection to the device is made over TCP IP The PC must be able to establish an FTP and Telnet connection or a single SSH connection to the device If NAT routers or firewalls are located betw
218. he system log of all entries Consider all protected pages to be locked again after the PIN code was entered and the pages were unlocked before This basically sets the current access level back to zero Lock Pages Logout Calibrate Touch Screen Start the touch calibration routine Sends a short mail message to the recipient specified Sed TESE Mall as the test receiver in the project settings Clear all persistent data user data points forget their Clear Data and Reset stored value Reset Device Perform a clean shutdown and reboot All persistent data will be saved before the device restarts Standby Puts the device into standby mode Disable HTTP Server Enable HTTP Server Disables the web server on the device Enables the web server on the device on by default Storage This page is available on devices which support external data storage like USB and SD card memory The buttons on this page can be used to save and restore device backups L Vis project files and to write current trend log data to the external memory Info This page contains some basic status information of the device to check CPU load and temperature available memory and also the status of externally connected switches and temperature sensors verify device installation About Show the about page default title page Exit Exit the setup menu and return to the main menu The CEA 709 models provide the following additional pag
219. his terminal Two external switches push button or open close can be connected between terminals INO and GND as well as INI and GND on the connector labeled SWITCH The status of the switches is available on the device in two system registers Switch Input 1 and Switch Input 2 On the LVIS 3E100 device INO is also used to control the integrated Lamp Actuator object which is always present as part of the static interface of the device In case a CEA 709 unit is connected to an IP 852 channel or a BACnet unit is connected via BACnet IP connect the Ethernet cable to the connector labeled 100Base T The device also accepts 10Base T connections via this port All 12 inch and 15 inch devices have two Ethernet ports which are internally connected through a switch To remove the currently stored project from the device set the jumper labeled CLEAR disconnect power and connect power again Wait until the unit has started and remove the jumper again Table 3 Terminals and Jumpers 4 6 LEDs and Buttons All LEDs and buttons are either located at the bottom side of the unit enclosure LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 or at the top side 12 inch and 15 inch models Please see the descriptions below for their functionality Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 32 LOYTEC Status button Reset button Power LED Status LED ACT 709 LED ACT BAC LED LINK Ethernet LED ACT Ethernet LED ONLINE LED LVIS 3E1 xx
220. hopefully based on user feedback The example and solution sections remain unchanged for now The new BACnet model LVIS ME200 is now also covered by this manual 2006 02 08 2 0 4 CZ Added new sections about data point management and standard solutions as well as some smaller improvements and corrections 2008 05 05 3 1 0 CZ Updated for Release 3 1 0 also including documentation which is relevant to the 3 0 x series of firmware which was not included in the last version 2008 06 26 3 2 0 CZ Updated for Release 3 2 0 Also incorporated some clarifications and additional sections which were missing from the previous version 2010 05 12 4 0 2 CZ Updated for Release 4 0 2 LVIS 3E112 LVIS 3E115 LVIS ME212 and LVIS ME215 are added Additionally LWEB 800 Visualization support 2011 04 08 4 2 0 CZ Updated for Release 4 2 0 2012 01 26 4 3 0 CZ Updated for Release 4 3 0 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
221. ht of the text whose color you want to set in the color bar A color selection dialog will appear from which you may select the desired color NOTE To define a mapping table entry which should not modify the current color set the color of the entry to Unset shown by the black cross Version 4 5 To define a color gradient for a number of entries for example going from red to green set the desired colors for start and end of the gradient and then multi select the range of entries over which the gradient should be calculated Hit the button to the right of the New Entry button to calculate a color gradient from the color of the first entry in the selected range up to the color of the last entry in the selected range LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 93 LOYTEC NOTE The gradient function will operate on the alpha channel in the same way as for the normal color value so that on devices which support ARGB color mode this function can be used to generate gradients from opaque to transparent To set a range of entries back to unset or to a specific color you can multi select the entries from the list and then set or reset their color all at the same time 8 8 Color Mapping Color mapping objects are used to change individual colors of a control depending on the value of a data point Mapping data point values to colors works the same way as in a mapping table The desired color is selected from a table whic
222. ialog shows two lists The first one is a list of all the different types of objects For each type the number of instances 1s shown together with the total resource usage Also shown is the largest item with its size and location in the project The second list shows objects sorted by size where each objects size is the total size of it and all child objects Therefore this list will most likely start with the root menu and continue with the largest menu items and largest pages and so on This list makes it easy to find the menu item page or control in the project which uses the most resources 14 18 Format strings This chapter describes the various types of format strings as well as regular expressions which are used by the configuration software Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 180 LOYTEC 14 18 1 Number format strings The format string used in text controls and numeric controls is equivalent to the format strings used by the ANSI C printf function L VIS will always use the given format string to format exactly one argument which will be a string an integer or a double precision floating point number depending on the type of control and its configuration Therefore there should always be exactly one conversion specifier in an L VIS format string and its type needs to match the argument provided by the control For example it will not work to use a d specifier for a text control or a s specifier for a n
223. ice needs to be commissioned in the network to be programmed but the device currently in the database does not match the empty device and cannot be used for this task The following procedure is recommended in this case e Create a new database or network project in your network management tool adding the PCs network interface and a new L VIS device and connect them using a suitable channel e Connect the new device physically to the network interface of your PC or otherwise make sure that the PC can communicate with the device in the new network project e Commission the new device e Run the configuration software on the empty device and program the device with the required project as explained in the section about integrating a new device using static NVs and plug in mode e The device will be programmed the database will be updated and the device will be commissioned in your small network project e Decommission the device in your helper network close it and open the final target network in which the device should be replaced e Connect the device at its original location in the network and execute the standard procedure of your network management tool to replace a device NOTE In both cases make sure that the stored project which is programmed into the replacement device has the correct model number set This can be checked in the Network Settings dialog The number must match the last byte of the program ID of th
224. ice through this type of scan does not necessarily mean that the device will actually be available on the physical network whereas the results from a direct network scan will reflect the network as currently seen by the L VIS device running the scan To start the scan use the context menu of the scan folder and select Scan LNS Database A new window will open which is used to conduct the network scan Depending on the type of scan the window will contain different controls and options to conduct the operation A few things to note are e BACnet Scan As the first step the current list of devices should be updated using the button Refresh Device List After a while the list of available devices on the network will be shown in the device list Now one or more devices may be selected from this list and the objects available on the selected devices can be scanned by pressing the button Scan Objects This step may be repeated for all required devices For each device a new sub folder will be created and the objects found on the device will be created in this sub folder e CEA 709 Scan Note that the device you are connected to must be commissioned in order to execute the scan If it does not yet have a valid network address a suitable address may be assigned in the area called Connected Scanner Device If you want to see a list of all reachable devices use the button Discover Devices alternatively start scanning for service pin messages by pressi
225. ices 9 6 1 2 Recorded by a Trend Object e Trends recorded by an independent trend data object will record data at intervals which are not optimized for a particular use so that the graphical representation may not be as smooth and processing may not be as fast as with data recorded for a particular trend control e Trend objects are not related to a particular way of visualization and can operate even without any trend control showing the data on the local device The advantage 1s that the visualization may be changed or even temporarily removed from the project without also removing the trend recording e In cases where the same trend recording needs to be shown on different pages in the project using an independent trend object to record and hold the data in one place may be preferable to having multiple independent trend controls record the same data multiple times e Incase of BACnet L Vis devices data recorded by a trend object is accessible to remote devices on the network However this places some restrictions on the functionality of the trend object Only one data source may be trended and it must be a BACnet server object located on the local device 9 6 2 Trend Mode 9 6 2 1 Interval When creating a new trend data object there are a number of different modes of operation available to choose from Since they can have a big influence of the resulting trend data they are explained in this section in more detail This 1s t
226. id Users_Manual_101 1 L Vis Configuration General Common Properties Mapping Data Port Coke Menu Page Page Monu View Timeout 0 sec Container Width 7 Eeke Page Bitmap Width d is Scriba Wilh DLOYTEC Figure 19 Hiding pages 15 3 Example 3 Freeze warning Alarms and Registers Version 4 5 This example shows how to create a translation table which converts a numeric value to a text value and to generate an alarm output on special occasions It also shows how to use registers to exchange data between internal objects The example takes an nvoTemp input data point and checks if it is below 0 C freeze warning or not It controls an output text and an alarm output register of type SNVT_alarm_2 Generate a new menu item Example 3 and a page for this menu item and name the menu item and the page Generate a header for the page Freeze Warning Add a new text control to the page Set a label for the text control e g Temperature State s in the text field of the Common Properties tab Add the nviTemp data point to the text control Select the Mapping tab on the data point Select New enter 0 for the value and FREEZE for the text Add two more mapping values 0 1 ATTENTION and 3 NORMAL to the mapping table This will cause that for input LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 194 LOYTEC values up to 0 1 C the FREEZE text will be shown Values between 0 1 C and 2 99 C will show ATTENTION whe
227. id not use the device for a while 6 2 2 2 Time Table This page displays a list of scheduled preset values for the selected day The page header contains buttons to navigate back and forth by one day single arrow or one week double Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 43 LOYTEC arrow The pen button opens the event list for the selected day the button with the arrow pointing to the top left goes back to the weekly overview The information shown on this page represents the sequence of preset values which will be scheduled on that day as a result of individual events that are applicable Each line contains a start time an end time and the name of the value preset which will be in effect during this period of the day The list covers the entire day starting at midnight 6 2 2 3 Event List This page displays a list of all events which are applicable to the selected day Note that an event which is generally applicable to a certain day may not yield to a new value being scheduled since the event may partially or fully overlap with other higher priority events Partially overlapped events may cause the start and or end times of the actual time table to be different from the start and end times of the individual events The event list is normally used to modify add or delete events The following areas of the page can be selected to execute various operations e Single and double arrow buttons These buttons can
228. ide a user interface They have no position and size coordinates or other visual properties Depending on the data point objects connected to the control the control will either show static content only show dynamic content based on values which are received from connected input data points or become selectable and accept new values from the user which are then written to the connected output data points Controls which accept user input are called input controls The following sections describe each of the available controls and their properties 8 5 1 Text Control Text controls are used to display one or more lines of text The text is entered on the Common Properties page in the Text area as explained in the section about the common property pages Dynamic text from a mapping table or from a connected string data point may be inserted at the s placeholder otherwise the text remains static On the Color property page the following colors can be set for the control Color Name Element to which the color applies Text color This color may be overridden by color specifications from a Text connected mapping table Frame drawn around the text if the control is selected Also used to draw the grid of the drop down list from which a new text element is chosen input controls only Selection Frame Color of the controls background The background of a text control may be Background set to transparent using the check b
229. ient software is known to have problems processing symbolic links to files They tend to display these files as being directories but any attempt to open this directory will fail since it really is a file Examples for such programs are FileZilla and Leech FTP If you encounter this problem with your FTP client use another client or fall back to the windows explorer or the command line FTP client which is known to work as well If your device supports secure connections programs like WinSCP may also be used as an alternative to FTP clients The SCP protocol uses only one port and is therefore easier to handle in environments where NAT routers and firewalls are present 8 5 6 3 Operating Trend Controls Trend controls do not allow data input but they can be marked selectable If the control is selectable touching it on the screen will display a vertical line at the touch point and open a data window showing the exact data which was recorded for the selected point of time The control will show the absolute date and time for the recorded data as well as the value for each of the curves displayed Each value is printed in the same color as the corresponding curve to relate the displayed numbers with the curves The vertical line may be moved around in the control by dragging it around or touching another location of the curve The data in the data window will be updated accordingly If there is more than one page the number of history pages
230. il the excess data points are removed from the control Please see section 6 2 2 for detailed information about how to operate a schedule control in extended UI mode on the running device 8 5 9 3 Font Settings When operating the control in standard UI mode it is usually required to load a user defined font The smallest built in font is too small to operate the control on the LCD and the medium size built in font is too wide to be useful for many applications Therefore the configuration software automatically searches the list of loaded fonts for a suitable font and if none was found automatically loads a font which should be a good choice to get started A specific font may be selected or loaded any time on the Common Properties page NOTE In extended UI mode the control will try to keep all touchable areas large enough to be usable even if the selected font is small In this mode it is therefore possible to use the smallest built in font to save space on the screen and enable the user to see as much information as possible especially on the smaller L Vis devices 8 5 9 4 Schedule Control Properties Version 4 5 The properties to set on the Schedule Control property page define the basic appearance of the control and control access to various operations which modify configuration data If a local scheduler data point is connected to the control its configuration will be shown in the preview as well If more than one l
231. in the calendar folder and the required scheduler points in the scheduler folder as described earlier in this chapter 9 4 2 Calendar Point Configuration Once the calendar point is created attach new calendar patterns as required to describe the individual day classes like holiday maintenance day and so on Do this by using the command Create Calendar Pattern from the context menu of the calendar point A new dialog appears where you can enter a name for the calendar pattern and edit the days which should belong to this day class When done close the dialog using the Create Pattern button Repeat this step to create all required patterns All patterns configured here will later be available on the local schedulers for use 9 4 3 Scheduler Point Configuration To configure the local scheduler points select the command Configure Schedule from the context menu of the scheduler point The same dialog which appears when a new scheduler Is created is shown and allows one to configure the scheduler Of course this step can also be done directly when the point is created First attach the data points which should be controlled by the scheduler Switch to the tab Scheduled Datapoints and use the Attach Datapoints button to select and attach one or more data points to the scheduler NOTE There may be limits in how many and which data points may be attached to a scheduler For example on a BACnet scheduler only data points with compati
232. in turn is set invisible in order to hide the selection frame This may cause problems when editing the project in the configuration software because the LCD preview normally shows the behavior of the device therefore such a selection frame is invisible in the editor as well To force the editor to ignore the device behavior and always draw a visible selection frame when a control is selected in the editor the button Edit or Preview Mode which is a toggle button can be pressed in the tool bar or the option Edit Mode may be checked in the Edit menu of the main window LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 172 LOYTEC 14 9 Remote Network Interface On newer hardware of the CEA 709 model there is support for remote network interface functionality similar to that of a NIC IP The function is only available if the device is operated in FT 10 mode not IP 852 mode and only if the hardware can support it If active the device accepts connections from a PC on the TCP IP interface and can act as a remote network interface providing access to the FT 10 channel to which the device 1s connected It also provides functionality to run the LPA software on this interface to monitor the FT 10 channel NOTE Using this feature will cause additional load on the device which should be considered at the time of project design If the project already requires a lot of CPU time to run it may not be feasible to use the same device as a remote ne
233. in which the available system data objects are located All these objects are automatically created and cannot be removed or modified in any way They can only be selected to create a new data point for the object tree e Calendar This folder is used to hold a locally available calendar object with its calendar patterns definitions of day classes like holiday maintenance day and so on Current devices allow one local calendar object To create it select the folder and use the New button or the context menu e Scheduler This folder is used for local scheduler objects Each of these objects will connect to a local scheduler on the device and will be configurable through this data object that is the data objects transfers scheduler configuration data between the actual scheduler present on the device and the user interface e Alarm This folder is used for local alarm servers On CEA 709 devices only one alarm server may be created which basically represents the node object of the device which is used to manage system alarms On BACnet devices an LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 118 LOYTEC arbitrary number of alarm server objects may be created where each alarm server object will be connected to a separate notification class object on the device e Trend This folder is used for local trend service data points Trends which are defined on this level as opposed to trends recorded by trend controls are independent of the vi
234. incompatible project first and then download the new project 11 2 2 Online In cases where the project is designed online while connected to a device all required data can be determined automatically To make sure that the model number in the XIF file matches the model number which is automatically selected during project download first download the finalized project to your device and then export the XIF file 11 3 CEA 709 1 A Operation The CEA 709 models normally support the CEA 709 1 B standard which means that the device accepts the extended network management commands used to configure the extra resources available on such devices for example up to 512 address table entries on L VIS However since the standard requires devices which were once configured using extended network management commands to no longer accept any of the older commands Such a device would no longer be usable together with older management software which does not provide support for the extended command set To guarantee that the device will be usable together with older tools the Network Settings dialog which is accessible from the File menu has a checkbox to enable a so called CEA 709 1 A restricted mode In this mode the device will not accept any of the extended commands and react according to the old standard This also means that the device is limited to 15 address table entries 11 4 Dynamic Network Variables Some of the installation scenarios
235. ion controlled by value If both are used together they use the same settings differing value settings for the trigger and the execute condition would not make any sense since the condition must match at the time the trigger fires The two special entries in the Value dropdown list called to invalid and to normal check the reported value state rather than the value itself They will evaluate to true every time the value state changes from normal to invalid or vice versa e Sound buzzer Used by the action type sound buzzer to set the frequency and the duration of the tone Useful values for the frequency range from about 500 up to 8000 The most intense sound can be archived at around 4000 Hertz The duration is normally a value between 100 and 3000ms 0 1s to 3s Note that the repeat delay should be larger than the tone duration since the repeat delay starts to run immediately after the action was triggered not when it completed e Link This is not an input field but a display of the destination page for a show page action or the name of the selected mail template for the send mail action To set a new page drag and drop the desired destination page on the action in the tree view To select a new mail template use the button next to the link field 8 9 2 Page Links Version 4 5 The action Show page requires a link to the desired target page to show There are different link types available depending on the project type and firm
236. ion on the page It is also possible to resize the bounding box which will evenly spread out the contained objects For example if a collection contains three objects in a horizontal row where the second object is located in the center resizing the bounding box will keep the leftmost object at the left edge the rightmost object at the right edge and the middle object in the center of the bounding box that is the relative position of each object in the collection does not change NOTE A collection can only be resized if there are at least two visible items inside the collection In addition resizing is only possible in a direction where at least two controls are not at the same position This is a direct consequence of the way resizing works Version 4 5 To select a control inside a collection the easiest way is to select it from the tree view at the left If the control 1s to be selected directly in the preview there are at least two objects on top of each other the collection and the control If there are nested collections or if controls overlap on the page there may be even more layers of objects There are different ways to select a specific object in such a case Each of these methods will e Left mouse button double click moves the current selection down to the next object under the cursor in the layer stack When the bottom most control is reached the selection moves back to the topmost control e Middle mouse button
237. ion uses a trigger mode which depends on user input for example touch release or selection the user input will no longer be processed by the control but will instead be forwarded to the action This will effectively prevent the control from entering input mode and accepting user input even if an output data point is connected to the control Version 4 5 The action type and trigger mode are now selected The next step is to select the condition under which the action may be executed The following conditions are available from a dropdown list directly below the action type e Execute once When the action trigger fires the action is executed once without further conditions This is one of the most widely used settings e Repeat action As above but the action is repeated for a fixed number of times which is entered in the field to the right of the dropdown box This is the total number of times the action is executed at most including the first time After each execution a delay which is configured next to the repeat count is inserted If there is an additional condition for example a value condition and the condition becomes false any further execution of the action is stopped immediately e Controlled by value The action is executed as long as the value of the parent object meets the requirements specified in the Options section Note that if this condition is false at the time the action trigger fires the action will not be e
238. is not loaded the software will try to load and use the font from the copied object If this fails for example because the additional font would exceed the capacity of loadable fonts an alternative font from the destination project must be assigned by the user 7 2 3 3 Images and Sounds Version 4 5 If the copied object uses images or sounds and the object is pasted into another project the referenced items will be copied to the destination project automatically if they are not available yet This will ensure that the copied object stays fully functional LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 5 LOYTEC 7 2 3 4 Template References If the copied object contains instances of templates and the object is pasted into another project the configuration software will try to identify a suitable template in the destination project based on the number type and order of objects in the template Template instances for which there is no suitable template available will cause the original template from the source project to be copied over to the destination project automatically NOTE It is possible to change details of the template like for example the position or other properties of the contained objects without causing problems for the software to recognize the template as suitable for use If a template is automatically created by a paste operation and the template is then changed slightly before another paste operation requesting
239. isplay a list of alarms from an alarm server or alarm client data point It is possible to connect more than one alarm data point to the same control in which case the control will display a list of all alarms from all connected points in chronological order The control always displays the newest alarm at the top with older alarms following further down At the bottom of the control is a navigation bar which displays the number of pages the list currently uses and allows to navigate through the pages Alarm entries which may be acknowledged are shown with a small ACK button at the right end of the alarm entry Pressing this button will send an alarm acknowledgment back to the reporting alarm server and change the color of the button Once the server received the acknowledgment it may send an updated alarm status and the button or the entire entry may disappear depending on the configuration of the control The default information displayed for each alarm is the date and time the alarm was first reported the type of alarm the current state of the alarm and in the second line an identification of the alarm source as well as a description and possibly the value which caused the alarm The layout and display of the various information fields can be freely configured using the two lists on the List Entry Setup property page The list at the very left contains all available information fields and at the end of the list a special item to insert a
240. isplayed when the user switches to a protected page for which the current access level is too low On the login page there should be at least one numeric input field to enter a PIN code write the value to the PIN Code Enter register It is useful to place other information on this page as well for example the current access level and the minimum access level required to view the protected page A button to execute the back one page action is also useful in case the user does not have the required PIN code and wants to go back to where he came from e About Page Mark this page as the about page of the device This page is shown when the user selects the About item in the setup menu or when the device switches to the default page after the idle timeout and there is no default page set LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 64 LOYTEC 8 5 Controls All objects which can be displayed on a page are called controls This is because they are usually used to provide to user with an interface to control a data point value or trigger actions Controls are also used to display the current value of a data point and sometimes even display just static content to enhance the visual appearance of a page NOTE There are other objects which are used to control or process data point values and which are not documented in this section for example mathematical objects or alarm generators These objects are not control objects because they do not prov
241. ist is used to set the behavior of the configuration software when a project was downloaded to the device or uploaded from the device and there are local schedulers configured Depending on the setting here the configuration software will either automatically synchronize the scheduler configuration data ask the user if the configuration should be updated or not update the configuration in which case the user may manually update using the commands from the connection menu Keypad Button Size Specifies the desired size of the keypad buttons on the display width x height in millimeters This section is used to adjust the general system colors They will be used on the device by elements which are created dynamically for example the keypad and will be used by the configuration software as default colors for new objects when no other defaults are set by the user using the button Set as Default on the Common Properties page 13 2 4 Time Zone and DST At the bottom of the page a checkbox can be set to enable automatic control of the UTC offset based on a region selected from the dropdown list If enabled the device will automatically control the UTC offset register and also automatically switch between standard time and daylight saving time if applicable for the selected region Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 161 LOYTEC 13 3 Display 13 3 1 LCD Ba 13 3 2 Display This page defines the display properties
242. ject in the tree view defines the assignment of variable names for the formula If you replace input data points when the formula was already specified be careful not to mess up the data point order and thus the result of your calculations Using the assigned variable names the user may now enter a formula directly below the list As you enter the formula it will be parsed and the resulting sequence of calculations will be displayed in a list at the right of the property page This list shows your formula in reverse polish notation RPN also known as postfix notation as used by many scientific pocket calculators Users of such calculators will be immediately familiar with this list and may find it more convenient to construct the formula using the list at the right instead of the input at the bottom To learn more about postfix notation there are a lot of resources and articles readily available on the internet NOTE When the formula entered at the bottom is still incomplete and does not yield a meaningful command sequence the list showing the RPN equivalent will be empty This allows the user to immediately see if the current input is valid or not The operators AND OR XOR amp lt gt lt gt can be used instead of the explicit function calls Further it 1s possible to use parenthesis to define the precedence of the operations The buttons and input fields in the middle of the pa
243. ject is a data point on the LVIS device which represents an existing data point on a remote OPC server for example a LINX device Such data points are created by importing a LINX device configuration and providing the IP address of the corresponding device The resulting data points will be available in a top level data point folder next to the L Vis folder For each imported LINX device a new top level folder will be created holding all OPC accessible data points of the remote device NOTE OPC client objects do not connect to the network side of the remote device but to the application side That is the LVIS panel will function as a remote application for the LINX device controlling the LINX data points in the same way as for example a logic program running on the LINX device or the Web UI of the LINX device A local network output on the LINX represented by a write data point will also be represented by a write data point on the LVIS just as if the LVIS application would be running on the LINX device In contrast remote network objects are always in reverse direction since the data sent out by the remote device over the network will be received by the LVIS device and vice versa 9 2 User Interface Version 4 5 Since the data objects are not part of the object tree shown in the main window there is a separate window to manage these objects The same window is also used to select one or more data objects when a data point is t
244. k interface RNI function on LVIS 3ElIxx devices running on the FT 10 interface It is also used by the remote LPA feature If these features are not needed the service can be disabled 14 19 4 Logging and Auditing The device contains a log file which can be read out via FTP the configuration software or the Web server This log contains information about when the device started and when crucial communication errors occur Other events such as user log on are logged in a separate operating system log which is available on LVIS 3E11x ME21x devices via the web UI Events recorded in the system log e Time of the last power on reset of the device e Time and version of the last firmware upgrade e Time when the device configuration has been cleared or the device was reset to factory defaults e Commission ofthe CEA 709 node e Static errors in the device and data point configuration e System overload situations as one time log messages since last power on e Crucial communication errors as they occur 14 20 Resource Limits The following table specifies the applicable resource limits for different LVIS device models Note that some resources have hard limits while others are basically limited by memory and CPU capacity of the device and or the bandwidth of the communication channel in use Depending on the complexity of the project regarding graphics and number of display elements the type of network interface in use the required ra
245. l To modify their shape or position on the screen just change the size or position of the control as required To edit a line drawing object a special drawing mode is required This mode is automatically entered for a newly added line or polygon drawing and can be reactivated later at any time by selection the item Edit Contents from the context menu of the control While in drawing mode the control occupies the entire screen New lines or points may therefore be drawn anywhere on the page When leaving drawing mode later the control will be resized to the smallest possible outline around the drawing The following simple operations are currently supported in drawing mode e Add new lines line drawing To add one or more lines left click at the desired start position of the line Release the left button and drag the line to the desired end LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 8 6 Data Point 87 LOYTEC point If another line segment should be appended left click at the desired end of the first line and beginning of the next line and repeat the process If no further line segment should be added right click at the desired end position to finish Add new points polygon drawing To add another point to the polygon left click at the desired position of the point The new point will be inserted between the last and the first point of the drawing and the lines will be drawn according to the new shape To add more points repeat
246. l will not react to a touch of the priority field 6 2 1 4 Change Time of Events To change the time at which a certain value is scheduled touch the hour or minute number in the time table and enter the desired value The hour 1s entered in 24 hour format 0 23 or can be used to enter hour and minute in one operation HHMM For example touching the hour and entering 1254 will set the time to 12 54 NOTE Entries in the time table are always displayed in chronological order If this order changes as a result of modifying the time of an entry the entry will immediately move to its new position in the time table to maintain the correct order of events This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the control will not react to a touch of the hour or minute fields 6 2 1 5 Select Value Preset To select a different value for an entry in the time table touch the value name to open a dropdown box This box contains a list of available values followed by some commands which will be explained later Select the desired value from the list This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the control will not react to a touch of the value name 6 2 1 6 Set Effective Period If shown in the header line the effective period of the schedule may be changed by touching the individual elements of the start and end date and setting new values for day month and year using the keypad To clear the start or end date
247. late select 4dd Template from the context menu of a template folder 8 15 1 Template Properties Both templates and their instances share the same property page called Template Instance The page contains only a few input fields to set e Display Offset The Display Offset is only used for template instances and defines the relative offset of all visible objects based on their position in the template This is used to adjust the final position of the templates contents on the screen which is especially required when the same template is instantiated multiple times on the same page If possible the template should be designed with the desired final position in mind so that in most cases the offset can be left at zero and the contents of the template are shown at their original position e Base paths for relative data point references On the right side of the property sheet is a section which shows up to four Base paths for relative data point references Their meaning is slightly different for templates and template instances The next sections will explain how to use these base paths 8 15 2 Creating a Template Version 4 5 To add a new template use the Add Template command from the context menu of a template folder A new template object will be created and a fresh page will be shown in the LCD preview This page is used to place the visible objects of the template similar to the design of a normal page The position of the objects pl
248. lculation or is controlled by various objects across the whole project It is easier to have one single point of connection to the outside world instead of connecting the network output in parallel to the register write data point at every location where the register is written It may also be used to connect input and output data points which are of similar but incompatible types for example receive a value from a SNVT temp variable and output its value via a SNVT temp f variable If a structured data point should be connected entirely to another data point of the same type each of the structure elements needs to be connected individually using a separate connector because each connector is only able to handle single values If the device is running firmware 4 3 0 or newer an alternative method of connecting data points which also supports connections between entire data structures or connections between different devices is available in the data point manager dialog See section 9 for more information about this topic NOTE The functionality of a data point connector or any other object for which a change of an input value causes updates to an output value without any further conditions or limits is inherently dangerous You must be careful not to cause endless update loops using these types of objects See section 14 12 for more details on this topic 8 13 Mathematic Objects Version 4 5 Mathematic objects are used to do calc
249. le when the date format is set to ISO 8601 It changes the time format to add the localized strings for hour and minute as a suffix Used for some languages to yield commonly used time representations for example Japanese 5 yf 24 47 23 fh Keep Alarm History If this checkbox is set the control will keep alarms even if they are already cleared and also store the list in non volatile memory so that it 1s not lost when the device restarts In this mode of operation the control can function as an alarm log showing older already processed alarms in addition to the currently pending alarms Max Age of History Entries This input field specifies the number of days the occurrence of an alarm must lie in the past before the entry is removed from the list This applies only to alarms which are already cleared and are not pending acknowledgment either not acknowledgeable or already acknowledged Max Number of History Entries This input field specifies the desired maximum number of entries in the alarm list If there are inactive alarms in the list which exceed this number they may be removed by the control at the next chance usually when a new alarm comes in to make room for new entries However like the age limit this limit does not apply to currently pending alarms which are always visible as long as there is enough memory available on the device Height of Navigation Bar This input field specifies the desired height of the navigation ba
250. limit the search to these types If the object type does not matter use the button Set All to mark all possible object types as valid search results e Control Type This area becomes available if the object type Control is selected It is used to further narrow the search on specific control types Again use the Set All button to select all control types if the type is not known or does not matter e Shared Objects This area is used to extend the search to objects which are not located at a specific position in the object tree but are shared resources like images sounds or fonts e Search Areas These options allow the user to limit the search to one or more of the top level objects in the tree The main menu global objects and template area can be enabled and disabled separately using these options At the right side of the dialog there are some buttons available to execute the search LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 168 LOYTEC e Like Selected This button is used to initialize the search options to the properties of the currently selected object If you want to find objects similar to the one which is currently selected press this button to have the options preset Then modify them as needed before executing the search e Find Objects This button executes the search e Show Next This button selects the next available search result from the result list and jumps to the object in the main window e Show Previou
251. line break as well as one item to insert custom text The buttons between the two lists are used to add remove or change the order of items in the right list The list to the right defines the final layout of the entries in the alarm control While changing the display list the effect can be seen immediately on the LCD preview Depending on the underlying network technology and the fact if the alarm was reported by a local or by a remote alarm server not all of this information may be available so that entries may be missing some of the information Some information items like the acknowledge time and source or the clear time become available during the life cycle of an alarm If not yet applicable such fields may be shown as dashes On the Alarm Log Control property page the following options can be set e ISO 8601 date format This option selects the ISO 8601 specification to display dates which is a four digit year a two digit month and a two digit day all separated by hyphens YY Y Y MM DD e DIN 1355 date format This option selects the German DIN 1355 specification to display dates In this format the order is day month and year separated by decimal points DD MM Y Y Y Y LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 84 LOYTEC US date format This option selects the US date format which uses the order month day and year separated by slashes MM DD Y YYY Read only no ACK buttons This option wh
252. lines between data records Buttons Button graphics Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Background Color of the background If the transparent check box is set all pixels using this color will be transparent Table 17 Color assignment for data log controls 8 5 9 Schedule Control The schedule control is a specialized control to serve as a schedule configuration editor for local and remote scheduler objects Starting with version 4 2 0 of the device firmware there are two different UI modes available for this control 8 5 9 1 Standard Mode In standard mode the control displays a list of daily schedules in a very compact format suitable for small screens However for advanced configurations it may be difficult for the user to determine the resulting overall time table for a certain date since the individually displayed daily schedules must be combined based on date patterns and priority to determine the final events happening on a certain day In cases where only the basic weekday schedules and a very small number of exception schedules are used the standard UI mode may be appropriate NOTE In this mode it is possible to connect more than one schedule data point to the same control In this case the title line will allow the user to select the schedule which he wants to view or edit Please see section 6 2 1 for details about operating a schedule control in standa
253. lt This option causes the data point to map invalid updates to the default value specified in the Default field This is useful for input data points which may be unavailable for example not bound and this situation is not considered an error Using this option unavailable data can be replaced by a safe default If the invalid state would be forwarded and the value would be used in a calculation the entire result of the calculation would become invalid which may not be desired e Reverse Direction This option inverts the data direction of the data point to be the opposite of the referenced data source for example the value of an output NV may be used as input for a math object or a trigger or may be trended by a trend log control Similar the current value of an input NV may be set by a math object or from user input via a control In the Data Point Value area the Default Value for the data point can be set This will be the value of the data point until a new value is received from either the network or the user or a value which was saved to non volatile memory is loaded after system start If this field is left blank the initial value of the data point will be invalid this state is also visible on the controls Writing the invalid value to a BACnet client mapping will execute a withdraw operation that is the value is removed from the priority array of the remote device NOTE The default value of a data point ultimately refers t
254. lt is then used to trigger the command based on the trigger mode Any value update This mode is a special case It does not require a trigger condition Instead it fires the trigger every time any of the connected input data points receives an update It is a very simple trigger mode designed especially for cases where the trigger is used to record data whenever the data changes Updates resulting in a TRUE condition In this mode the trigger will fire every time one of the input data points received an update and the trigger condition has a TRUE result Updates resulting in a FALSE condition This mode is the inverse of the above The trigger fires for every update which results in a FALSE trigger condition Updates resulting in a condition CHANGE This mode fires the trigger every time the result of the trigger condition changes from TRUE to FALSE or vice versa Subsequent updates which lead to the same result do not repeatedly fire the trigger as opposed to the above modes Updates resulting in a CHANGE to TRUE This mode fires the trigger only when an update is received which results in a TRUE trigger condition and the condition was previously FALSE The trigger does not fire when the condition changes back to FALSE Updates resulting in a CHANGE to FALSE This mode is the inverse of the above mode Only if the trigger condition changes its result from TRUE to FALSE the trigger 1s fired To limit the frequency at which the trigger
255. m parameters like IP address date time zone and so on To do this create a suitable control and connect the system parameter which it should modify This way a project may provide a completely customized setup menu matching the design of the other pages in the project for example a localized Japanese setup menu may be provided or a subset of the complete setup menu such as specific commands from the command page or the setup of date and time only NOTE The example projects that are installed together with the configuration software include projects for the standard setup menu of the different LVIS models These projects should provide a good starting point for a customized setup menu Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 49 7 Configuration Software 7 1 Main Window LOYTEC The main window of the configuration software is shown in Figure 2 It is divided up into 3 main areas as explained in section 2 3 3 of the tutorial Bi OFFLINE OfficeRoom v3 0 6lcp File Edit Model Firmware Connection Format Tools View Help D sR S Mom s Alm Status OFFLINE Usage E Text Main Menu Light Light Page Auto Btn Text Auto S E Main Menu 4 Sunblind General Common Properties Mapping Data Point color Text Sitmap Drawing D SB Page Public Text Screen Coordinates Bitmap ig Auto Left 270 Width 22 V AutoResize Light Page Public e Light Bar amp To
256. me and instance number of the created server object for the scheduler may be set in the same way as for any other server object For CEA 709 devices resource allocation is more complicated Once the required resources are configured in the Network Settings Dialog the local scheduler data points will be assigned to the available scheduler objects of the device Each new scheduler point will pick the first available scheduler object until all objects are used Scheduler points which cannot be assigned to a free scheduler will remain unassigned until enough schedulers are created or other scheduler points are deleted The assignment is shown in the columns ndex LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 128 LOYTEC and Object in the point list These are the functional block index and name of the assigned scheduler Deleting a scheduler data point will detach the data point from the respective scheduler object and make this object available for other scheduler points which may still be unassigned due to missing resources or which may be created in the future The assignment of other scheduler points to their scheduler objects is not changed 9 4 7 Using the Scheduler Once the above setup 1s done the scheduler is basically operational It will immediately start to work based on the configuration data downloaded through the configuration software However in almost all cases it will be required to add a control to the visible part of the proj
257. me of the network variable on the device There are certain restrictions to this name which originate from the underlying network technology For example the name may not exceed 15 characters Also the name should start with the prefix nvi or nvo If this 1s not the case a suitable prefix will be added to the name automatically depending on the selected direction e Resource File This dropdown list contains all resource files currently installed on the system Select the desired resource file which contains the data type you want to create The standard network variable types SNVT xxx are defined in the resource file called STANDARD If any additional resource files containing user defined type definitions UNVT UCPT are installed on the system they will be available in this drop down box for selection In case the desired resource catalog is not listed in the drop down box check the installation of your third party software e Type The desired type of the network variable The available types in this dropdown depend on the resource file selected before e Direction Input or output as seen from the network side e Functional Block The functional block in which the NV should be located L VIS provides an array of eight functional blocks to organize your NVs and keep them separate from other NVs on the device which are managed by the device firmware e NV Flags Flags for the newly created NV You may leave these untouched Most
258. menu 8 3 Menu Item Version 4 5 Menu item objects are used to build the contents of a menu They are shown in the menu in the order in which they appear in the object tree On the device each menu item becomes a selectable area of the menu which the user may select to open the page or the sub menu associated with the item LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 62 LOYTEC Each item object can hold zero or more page objects and zero or one menu object as shown in the object hierarchy diagram It depends on the connected objects what will happen when the user selects the menu item Pages Menu Function This item is a return item When the user selects it the current None menu will close and the parent menu will open A standard item Upon selection the menu will close and the page will be shown A multi page item Upon selection the menu will close and the page which was up when the item was active the last time will be shown the first page if this is the first time the item is selected The page flip action touch gesture and page timeout applies 2 A sub menu item Upon selection the connected sub menu will be None shown for further navigation A combined item The connected page s will be shown in the background while the connected menu will open in the foreground for further navigation This type of item can be confusing for the user and should be used with care 1 or more Yes
259. method and use either only dynamic or only static NVs since this greatly simplifies the integration and upgrade process If necessary a mixed operation is possible but due to the required operations on the underlying database is only suggested for advanced users If used you are advised to have a recent backup of your database ready The integration procedure for such a project is a combination of the procedures used for a static NV project and a dynamic NV project in plug in mode The dynamic NVs must be created on the device in a first step the data points in a loaded project are synchronized with the available dynamic NVs on the device and the static NVs defined in the project will be available on the device after a database update The difference is that during the upgrade of the static interface all dynamic NVs will be temporarily removed from the device and the database so that the upgrade can be executed The removed NVs will later be recreated automatically but they may get a different NV index assigned so it is necessary to update the drawing of your device Existing bindings will be saved and restored as well If something goes wrong restore the database from the backup or read the section about device recovery 10 1 2 Pre Programmed Device Version 4 5 In some cases it may be necessary to integrate an already programmed device into a network This can only be done with static NV projects since dynamic NVs are stored in the
260. mic NVs which were removed in the first step these will be reported and may be replaced by other data points or may be deleted all together Do not replace them with static NVs since this would mean a change of the static interface which implies a different procedure e Download the modified project TCP IP is preferred due to its speed The device will restart and be ready to use 10 3 3 Static NV Change For project changes which result in a change of the static NV configuration certain restrictions apply regarding the way such changes may be performed There are two possible ways to perform such a change The automatic and recommended way is to run the configuration software in plug in mode as detailed below e If there are any changes required for the dynamic NVs on the device perform them as the first step using your network management tool e Run the configuration software in plug in mode on the device which is to be changed This will automatically update the dynamic data points according to the changes which were made to the dynamic NVs on the device e Load the current project from a file or from the device and modify it as required adding or removing static NV data points During the load the data points used in the project are updated according to the new set of dynamic NV points If dynamic NVs were removed or renamed the affected data points need to be manually assigned to other NVs or may be deleted from the project e
261. mined and drawn as you resize the control Depending on the value range the space requirement of the scale and the optimum size of the bar will vary Version 4 5 e Knob Offset The X and Y values entered here are added to the coordinates of the current center point at the top end of the moving bar the border line between the filled and empty area of the bar The resulting position will be used as the center point to draw a bitmap if specified on the common properties page or through a mapping table e Tick Mark Length The length of the tick marks in pixel LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 70 LOYTEC The Flags control which components are drawn and how they are drawn The following flags are available e Horizontal Bar The bar control is turned by 90 degrees and the bar moves from left to right lower values left instead of up and down e Tick Marks Enable or disable drawing of the tick marks next to the bar e Scale Labels Enable or disable drawing of the scale labels next to the bar Note that leaving out the scale labels usually allows for a narrower placement of the tick marks since less space is required between the tick marks e Flip Side This option draws scale and tick marks if enabled at the opposite side of the bar right or bottom instead left or top e Thermometer Style This is the option to draw a dot at the lower end of the bar to symbolize a thermometer It is usually used together with a ver
262. mote network object is a reference to some object existing on a remote device on the network Such a reference is called a client mapping on BACnet devices since it maps the value of the existing data object on the L VIS device to a data point on a different device Depending on the direction of data flow the mapping can be either read poll or COV or write There may be more client mappings for the same remote object for example to a remote BACnet value object which can be read and written and is therefore represented by two client mappings On CEA 709 devices external network objects are called external NVs since they are references to NVs located on other devices There is currently only one reference per external NV A remote network object is usually only constructed from data retrieved by a network scan and will only work as long as the referenced object does not change its configuration NOTE From the data which is retrieved by a network scan it is possible to create a local network object from the client mapping The user will decide if a client mapping or a local network object is the better solution which depends on the network technology and the type of installation For CEA 709 it is usually better to create local network objects and use a network management tool to define the bindings to other devices in the network for BACnet it may be more convenient to use client mappings instead e OPC Client Objects An OPC client ob
263. n if the built in navigation bar is disabled LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 108 LOYTEC 8 14 1 Trigger Object Properties Version 4 5 To define the trigger condition connect the input data points which determine when the trigger should fire Using these data points enter the required formula on the Trigger Object property page Then select the action which the control should execute Depending on the control the supported actions will be available from the Command dropdown list The possible commands to give to the control are No Operation This command does nothing It is usually available as the only choice if the control does not support any commands in its current configuration Show Prev Page Instructs the control to show the previous page of information Show Next Page Instructs the control to show the next page of information First Page Instructs the control to show the first page of information Last Page Instructs the control to show the last page of information Add Data Record Instructs the control to record the current data of the data record to which the trigger 1s connected See also section 8 5 8 for more info about data log controls and data records Unset Data Instructs the control to clear release the current value Only available for input controls The value will be set back to invalid indicating that no value is available Hide Causes the control to become invisible Show Sets
264. n a project NOTE Even if the preserve data flag is set a trend control may still discard the stored data when it reboots This is the case when the controls properties were changed such that the new configuration does not match the stored data anymore for example because new data points were added to the control or data points were removed changing the type and amount of data recorded Recorded trend data is also removed from the device if there is no control matching the recorded data which is determined by the UID of the control That is if you remove a trend control from the project and reboot the device the data which belonged to the removed control will be deleted from the system 8 5 6 1 External Trend Data Since version 4 3 0 of the device firmware it is possible to use the trend control to display trend data recorded by an external device or trend data source In this case the trend control itself does not record any data on its own Instead it fetches records from a trend service and displays this data Trend services like these are represented by a special type of data point trend data point Such a data point may represent a local trend recorded on the same device but not by the trend control itself or data located on a different device on the network When such a trend data point is attached to a trend control the control will scan the trend and display the first curve mentioned in the directory of the tre
265. n is requested to trigger on release of the control yet the condition under which the action is to be executed requests the control to be touched This is a contradiction and will not be satisfied e Even if the trigger were to be corrected using on touch it is very unlikely that you would want this action to show a new page every 100ms while the control is touched Aside from the delay which would be too small there is another major problem here After the first time the action is executed a new page will be on the display and the original control will be gone so you cannot hold on to it NOTE The delay value waiting xxx ms after each time always applies The action trigger will always be locked for the given duration after each time the action fired preventing the same action to fire again until the wait time expired This can be used to limit the frequency at which an action may fire If the delay is set to 0 it will be turned off This also causes any kind of repeated execution to be skipped so the action is executed only once per trigger event Below the Execute Action part of the property page is the Options section In this section any additional information which may be required by action types action triggers or conditions can be set here Options which are settable are automatically activated others are grayed out The following options are available e Value Used by the trigger value update and the condit
266. n or manually created in a text editor and creates all the bindings which are listed in the file NOTE If you use a network management tool with a graphic representation of your network bindings you will need to update the drawing based on the modified database so that the new bindings created by the configuration software become visible This is normally not required for object oriented tools where the new bindings immediately appear in the object tree The Remove Bindings function is not normally used but may be helpful if the network bindings of the device should be reworked completely without deleting the device itself NOTE This function is also useful for the rare cases where the static interface of a device needs to be upgraded manually and the network management tool has difficulties to take over the existing bindings during the upgrade In this case export the bindings remove them then do the manual upgrade and as the last step restore the bindings from the file 11 2 XIF Export Version 4 5 When the selected model is a CEA 709 model and the current project uses at least one static network variable the menu item Export XIF becomes available in the Tools menu This can be used to create an XIF file for the current project for later device integration This is normally used when the network management software cannot run the configuration software in plug in mode and the device must therefore be integrate
267. n section 6 2 1 e Actions There is an indirect way of assigning values to output data points using the Update Data Points action This is sometimes useful for example to store a current value in a register data point when the user selects or touches a control These actions are explained in more detail later on The control decides when to leave input mode This is also called loosing the Input Focus since the control returns input processing back to the page which is currently shown Upon input focus loss the control usually sends out the final value and stores it in non volatile memory so that it is retained across a power outage or reboot Controls usually return the focus when you touch an area outside of the control or when you leave the device idle for a specified amount of time Some controls like the keypad have OK and Esc buttons for you to press to either close and accept the new value or close and restore the previous value Leaving a control idle while in input mode will usually be interpreted by the control as a cancel action The control will then leave input mode return the focus to the page and restore the value it had when input mode was entered The idle timeout can be set in the Project Settings dialog together with a number of other timeout values 6 2 1 Simple Schedule Control This section describes how to operate a schedule control which is set to simple view extended UI mode not enabled A schedule control dis
268. n tano 30 Terminals and Jumpers 4 eese eee ee eee enne en setenta stets n sens stn senes enun 30 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 4 6 4 LOYTEC LEDS and BG TRU 31 5 Interface Configuration 4 ccccssaicsnssessssasonesscnessseeassosdessgeadsseeussousagsssasveanesses JJ 5 1 5 2 Selecting the Interface cscsscssscesscssscssscssccssecssessssssesesenessseessesssesssessessese 33 Configuring the IP 852 interface eeeeeee eee eres seen eerte nete n etna tnne n 34 6 Operating LAV US mr MER 6 1 6 2 6 3 Touch Screen 35 Gebel Operation i cases eis fees RP RN E E 35 6 12 Calibration sass ies cen neri Ibeied o BdU gem Beate Bee 36 Drirgrl ips Ks oies 37 6 2 1 Simple Schedule Control sse 38 6 2 2 Extended Schedule Control sese 41 Kimi 2 mec Es 46 6 3 1 Custom Setup Menu eeeeseeeeeeeeeene eene i nennt enne ettet ntt testen tetto nen 48 7 Configuration Software ss scscscscsacscessasscscsssecsccvontesscucsccencscauscacceassecseocscdcccoue MO 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 Main WindO W sssri 49 Context Menus 49 72 1 Add Objects e eee ede ets 50 7 2 2 Enable Disable Access Control uenen a 50 723 Cut Gopy Paste sss cie
269. n the device will connect its setup menu to this item If the item is used the device will create a default item to reach the setup menu but this will most likely not fit the design of your other menu items so it is best to always add a setup item yourself and configure it the way you want it to look Finally add a page to the first of the two menu items This page will be displayed when the user selects the first menu item from the root menu Open the context menu of the menu item right click on the item in the tree view and select Add Page In order to see this page right after the device started make this page the projects default page Open the context menu of the page in the tree view and select Set as Default The page object is described in detail in section 8 4 2 3 6 Add Controls to the Page The next step 1s to place some objects on the page to view and control the values of the two network variables These objects are called controls in this manual since they allow the user to control the data points and display their current value A number of different control styles are available to choose from In this example we want to display the current status of the switch input using a text control for the state and a numeric control for the value To control the switch output we use a bitmap control for the state and a bar control for the value To create the required controls either right click on the page object in the tree view a
270. nally Therefore the configuration software provides the following mechanisms to help in choosing the right settings e Resources required by the current project The absolute minimum settings required by the current project are shown in a table at the left side of the window This data may be used to fill in the values at the right side but some additional resources should be planned to allow for configuration changes which need more resources e Auto Set This button may be used to let the configuration software decide on the best settings to use based on the current project Since the current projects resource usage is taken as a starting point all schedulers and calendar patterns in the project should first be configured as required before this button is used e Set Defaults This button will choose standard values for all settings In most cases these settings will provide more resources than necessary NOTE It is possible to enter anything here until the project is actually saved or downloaded At this point in time the software will check that the resources configured here are sufficient to support the projects configuration If this is not the case this dialog will automatically open so that the settings may be adjusted 9 4 6 Resource allocation Version 4 5 On BACnet devices there is always a direct assignment between a local scheduler point and a server object because the two are created and deleted together Na
271. nd choose the control type you want from the context menu or select the page in the tree view and right click in the LCD preview area to reach the same context menu Add one text control one bitmap control one numeric and one bar control to your page Now place the controls on your page so that they do not overlap each other Grab and drag them with the mouse or enter position and size in the Screen Coordinates section of the Common Properties page To resize the controls with the mouse move the pointer to the lower right corner of the controls area in which the value is displayed that is disregard any decorations around the value area like the scale of a bar control For most control types the value area fills the entire space of the control except for the selection frame For more complex controls like bars and trend logs you can view the value area by changing the Container color on the Color property page Then grab the control at the lower right corner of the container area NOTE The position and size you set on the Common Properties page also refers to the value area of the control not to the selection frame around it This is done so that for example the width and height of a bar does not change when you enable or disable tick marks or scale These are just seen as decoration which can be turned on and off while the area of the value display remains stable Adjust the properties of each control as you like or leave them at
272. nd Firmware Version 4 5 When the configuration software is started in standalone mode and is not connected to a device the Model menu can be used to select the model for which a project should be created and the Firmware menu can be used to select the firmware version of the intended target device This enables the user to create or edit a project which is intended to run on an older firmware version even when the firmware version to use cannot be queried from the device The real time LCD preview is automatically adjusted to match the behavior of the selected model and firmware version This way the preview is always accurate down to the pixel level what you see in the preview 1s exactly what the device will display pixel by pixel When started as a plug in or connected via TCP IP or CEA 709 in standalone mode the menu items to select model and firmware version are grayed out so that the firmware version cannot be arbitrarily changed by the user The menu items or the correct model and firmware version as reported by the device are automatically checked The real time preview of the LCD 1s automatically adjusted to reflect the behavior of the reported firmware version and the project is saved in a format readable by the firmware of the connected L VIS device LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 173 LOYTEC The configuration software is always backwards compatible to older firmware versions so that it is possible to use newer
273. nd service Note that most trend data points represent the recording of only one curve In case of a local trend which contains more than one data recording the trend will show the trended data points as child points Selecting and attaching one of the child points to the trend control will show the corresponding curve NOTE The desired settings for the time axis and the number of history pages available for navigation must be configured even in case of external trend data 8 5 6 2 Trend Data Access Version 4 5 For every trend control which stores the recorded data in non volatile memory a file is created on the file system of the device which holds the data in binary form This file is not intended to be used by the end user Instead the recorded data is made available in CSV file format in order to ease processing on the PC LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 75 LOYTEC The files may be downloaded from the device using an FTP connection or via SCP protocol on the SSH port if the device supports secure connections Valid user names for the transfer are either admin or operator The password must be specified as set on the Web UI of the device The default password for the admin user is oytec4u on devices with recent firmware and admin on devices with older firmware There are two locations to access the CSV data One location is intended for access by a human user the other one is intended for automated tools e d
274. ne time events events that are active daily within a defined start and end date events that are scheduled on a weekly monthly or yearly basis events which are scheduled whenever a certain global calendar event applies or events which are defined by special date patterns Event Details Depending on the event type selected different input fields are shown here to enter the specific information required to define when exactly the event should apply In the bottom area of the event details are some push buttons to cancel the editor without making any changes to close and save the changes or add the new event as well as to delete the event currently open in the editor LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 45 LOYTEC NOTE If applicable a default button will be shown This button can be used to easily set the correct definitions for a default background event which is scheduled at the lowest priority on every day It is normally used to control the outputs of the scheduler whenever no other event applies There can only be one default event per schedule If present the default event will always be listed as the first event in the event list and it will be marked as default 6 2 2 6 Value Template Editor If the scheduler unit uses value templates and allows the user to change them the event editor will display an edit button next to the value template field Pressing this button will open the value template editor where
275. ng tab In the value list select OFF Click on Select Bitmap and choose a bitmap which should be displayed when the switch is OFF After this select ON in the value list and select the bitmap for the ON state The configuration now looks similar to Figure 17 The project can now be loaded into the L VIS device Users_Manual_101 1 L Vis Configuration Status fline Usage ip press FL Menus 2 6 Pages Control 16 Datapoints 4l Sue 1928 Figure 17 SNVT switch on a bitmap control 15 1 3 Numeric Control A numeric control is used whenever a data point needs a continuous numerical output or input like a percentage value or a temperature value This example shows how to use a SNVT switch together with a numeric control The state element of the SNVT switch network variable is fixed to 1 whereas the value part can be set between 0 and 100 Version 4 5 Add a numeric control to the page Add data points to the control To do this select Add Data Point from the context menu of the control Add an input data point for nviSwitch value and output data points for nvoSwitch state and nvoSwitch value A default mapping between the state input values and the displayed text is automatically added to the control For the input data point nviSwitch value set the System Startup flag on the Data Point configuration tab For the nvoSwitch state data point go to the Data Point configuration tab configure the Default Value
276. ng the button Discover on Service Pin then go through all required devices and press the service button which will add the device to the list of available devices and Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 123 LOYTEC stop the process using the Done button when finished Once the list of devices 1s ready use the button Scan Device to get a list of objects available on the device e LNS Database Scan The current network will be selected from the database automatically Select the desired channel from the list of channels at the right to see a list of devices on that channel Now either scan all devices on the channel using the button Scan Channel or select individual devices from the list and use Scan Device for individual device scan When you are done with all the required devices close the scanner window and return to the data object management window The scan folder should now have a sub folder for each of the scanned devices containing objects representing the data points available on these devices Now the required mappings may be created from these points see next section 9 3 4 3 Create Mapping Browse through the available points in the import folder and select the data points for which mappings should be created Multi selection within the same folder is possible Then open the context menu and select Use on Device For all selected points a suitable remote data object will be created NOTE The dat
277. ngrade is necessary it is strongly recommended to first clear the device by either selecting the command Remove Configuration from the File menu of the main window or set the CLEAR jumper at the back of the device and reboot the device before conducting the downgrade To upgrade the device with a new firmware select the Upgrade Device menu item from the Firmware menu which will be available when connected to a device NOTE While older versions of the firmware also allowed uploading the current firmware from the device this is not possible anymore in current firmware versions due to technical limitations It is therefore suggested to keep a copy of the downloaded firmware somewhere on a PC in case the device needs to be set back to this version at a later time 14 12 Avoiding Update Loops Version 4 5 Especially when a lot of data point connectors and mathematical objects are used in a project the danger of accidentally creating update loops increases and the user needs to be aware of this problem An update loop means that a single update of one data point causes a chain of following updates which does not end because one of the following updates again triggers the original update For example register A is used as input for a mathematical object which writes its result to register B while at the same time the value of register B 1s copied into register using a data point connector The configuration software is able
278. nnected the alarm generator may be configured on the Alarm Generator property page For each of the connected inputs an independent set of parameters is required The available input points are listed in the top left area of the property page NOTE If logic or arithmetic operations are required to determine an alarm condition for example signal an alarm when TI gt T2 a mathematic object is required to conduct the required operations The result which is conveniently stored into an internal register is then monitored using the alarm generator The suggested workflow to configure the alarm generator is as follows e First select the input point for which the monitoring rules should be configured e Define the Alarm Condition using the radio buttons at the bottom left of the page The available choices allow basic monitoring functionality and always define the condition under which the alarm should be SET If the value no longer satisfies the condition the alarm will be cleared To filter out spikes it is usually good to set an amount of time which the alarm condition needs to be satisfied before the alarm is actually set The default of one second is often a reasonable value e Define the Data Point Value Range Depending on your choice for the condition you may need to enter values either for both minimum value and maximum value or only for one of the two If your condition is inside or outside range you need to enter bo
279. nt The same font can be loaded multiple times in different sizes LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 175 LOYTEC e Reload This will try to reload all selected fonts from their currently known source files e Resize Available for vector fonts allows changing the size of the font The original source file may be required for this operation unless it is already embedded in the project see the option Do not embed font source below e New Size Create a new font in a different size from an already loaded font e Replace Replace the selected font with a new font loaded from a file e Reassign Reassign all current uses of the selected font to a selected replacement font so that the old font ends up unused e Remove Remove the selected font from the project Only possible with fonts that are currently unused e Find Opens the find dialog and shows all objects which are currently using the selected font e Assign to Selected Assigns the selected font to all currently selected objects the controls which were selected when the font manager was opened Useful to immediately see the result in the LCD preview without closing the font manager e Show Target Size Changes the display of the font size to show the reduced target size only containing the characters currently in use This is useful for the small L Vis devices which use prebuilt and optimized versions of the fonts Large devices usually read the original
280. nt background color are often used to define clickable areas on a page which uses a background graphic In this case the pages background already provides the graphic representation of buttons lamps building floors or other elements which should be selectable by the user Using empty transparent bitmap controls rectangular regions may be defined on the page which the user may select The control itself usually has an action connected to it to jump to a new page or update a data point The following colors may be set for bitmap controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Color of the frame which is drawn if no bitmap was assigned or color in Bitmap which a monochrome bitmap is drawn May be overridden by colors from the mapping table For color bitmaps this color definition is ignored Frame drawn around the text if the control is selected Also used to draw Selection Frame the grid of the drop down list from which a new text element is chosen input controls only Color of the controls background if no bitmap is shown Otherwise this is the color which should be considered the background of the graphic If the Background transparent check box is set all pixels using this color will be transparent In true color projects transparency is usually controlled by the alpha channel of the image Table 12 Color assignment for bitmap controls Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 66 L
281. nt local or remote it only fetches data from the trend point and does not record any data by itself The configured size of the history buffer is irrelevant in this case Version 4 5 In the same section you may set a minimum Shift Interval for the control The control normally uses the smallest usable shift interval which is the time it takes for the graph to move by one pixel The graph cannot be shifted earlier than this because it needs to move by at least one pixel can t move by half a pixel If this interval seems unnecessarily small each shift will require some processing time or you want the control to average data over a longer time frame than this you may set a minimum time here The control will then use the next higher shift interval which results in an integral shift of the graph in pixels The Flags to enable or disable the tick marks and the scale are the same as for the value axis At the bottom left of the property page the desired interpolation method can be set for each of the connected data points Select the data point first and then set the desired interpolation Currently available are two options e No interpolation The current value will be drawn horizontally until the next recorded value is available causing the trend graph to show a vertical step to the new value This setting is suitable to record binary or multi state values like window state or room occupancy e Linear interpolation Selecting linea
282. ntrol may contain placeholder tags Note that you will want to turn off the Auto Resize option and make sure the text field is wide enough to hold the replacement text which depends on the data point path names assigned to the template instance later on Also note that placeholder tags are not supported in mapping table entries The placeholder must appear directly in the text field of the text control e Show Page Action The show page action when used with a relative path to the target page accepts placeholder tags in the path string If the project is designed such that menu item or page names match up with data point folder names a show page action of a template instance may be designed to automatically jump to a different target page depending on the setup of the data point base path LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 115 LOYTEC 9 Data 9 1 Concept Point Management As outlined in the description of the data point object in section 8 5 11 the network variables BACnet server objects client mappings user defined registers and system parameters are represented by objects which exist on the device independent of any controls or other objects in the object tree These data objects are then referenced from the data point objects in the tree by their unique ID While some of these objects are created automatically most of the data objects need to be created by the user There are ways to manually create individual data obje
283. ntrols you should already have the data points connected and the mapping tables filled in bar and trend controls should have their final settings of scale tick marks and value range The individual property pages are discussed in more detail below LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 56 LOYTEC e Add actions alarm generators mathematical objects and other global objects you require to put functionality into your project e Fine tune colors and transparency on the Color page and the visibility of objects layer stack up by using drag and drop in the tree view This is of course not a complete list of things to do but should give you an idea where to start from a blank project If objects or complete pages are copied from one project to another project the copied objects may contain references to data points or loaded fonts which do not yet exist in the target project If possible any missing data points or fonts will be created automatically in the destination project If this is not possible for example if an object references a data point from a foreign technology copy from a BACnet project into a CEA 709 project these references will be lost 7 6 Common Property Pages 7 6 1 General The individual property pages visible in the property view will change according to the currently selected object Most property pages are directly related to a certain type of object and will be discussed together with the object itself
284. ntrols to trigger an action when the user touches releases or selects a control In some cases they are connected to data point connector objects to watch incoming data point values and trigger an action when a certain value is received In any case the action objects need a parent object which is able to feed the required information to the connected action such that the action may monitor what s going on and trigger at the right moment Currently these objects are controls and data point connectors For every action object there are three basic things which need to be defined e Action What should be done when the action triggers e Trigger When should the action be considered for execution e Condition Once triggered under what conditions should the action be executed and how if at all should it be repeated When a new action is defined it is important to think about these three components and make sure the selected choices actually make sense Each of the above properties may be controlled individually but not all of the possible combinations will actually make sense Examples of good and bad configurations and how to avoid the bad ones will be given later on 8 9 1 Action Properties Version 4 5 Actions are objects which are not visible on the screen of the device so they do not use any of the common properties like font position size or color Aside from the General properties which apply to all objects actions are
285. nu item object as explained in sections 7 2 9 and 7 2 10 Calling the function opens a configuration dialog to select the desired base folder for which the project should be generated as well as some additional options The desired base folder 1s selected from the data point folder tree on the left Note that in case the function was called on a menu object any data points located directly in the selected folder will be ignored since a menu object cannot have pages attached to it The selected folder will only be scanned for sub folders and menu items will be created for each sub folder When the function was called on a menu item object pages will be created for the data points located in the selected folder and a sub menu with items and pages will be created for the sub folders 1f any 14 7 1 Options Version 4 5 Additional options are available to the right of the folder tree e Basic page layout Select one of the available layouts Currently available are simple one to four column layouts e Element indentation This option sets the amount of indentation for elements of structured data points In case a structured data point has nested sub structures structure members will be indented based on the position of their parent element e Page margins Any of the automatically created content on a page will be limited to the area defined here Set the margin to zero to allow the generator to use the entire page In case you use a pag
286. o be added to the object tree It is therefore possible to create and select a data object in one go The window to manage and select data points can be opened in two ways e Via a tool bar button or the command Edit gt Datapoints from the main menu e Via the context menu of an object where a data point reference can be attached LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 117 LOYTEC When opened via the main menu or tool bar the window can be left open while working on the project in the main window Data points can be edited created and connected to objects in the main windows tree view via drag amp drop In this mode the Select button is deactivated and the only option is to use the Close button to close the manager window NOTE While the data point manager window is open some operations are not available This includes device communication when in LNS plug in mode as well as the option to close the main program or to attach a data point to an object via the context menu When opened via the context menu of an object to connect a data point reference the main program is locked and waits until the user selected the desired data point or closed the manager window The result of the selection 1s then used to create references to the selected points and connect them to the selected object The window itself is divided into different sections 9 2 1 Folder List Version 4 5 At the left is a list of folders which is
287. o each of the three controls always referencing the same data object Now you can set the data points to constant value and enter different values for each of the three points for example 18 22 and 24 When the user now presses the LOW button the value 18 will be sent out When he presses the MEDIUM button the value 22 will be sent The Persistent option is used to request that the current value of the data point should be preserved across a reboot of the device and be used as the new default value until updates are received Since the value which will be saved is the value of the referenced data object this option will also affect all other data points which reference the same data object NOTE The persistent option is useful for output data points which need to be sent out after system boot System Startup flag is set but are controlled by actions or math objects instead of direct user input Such data points must preserve their last calculated output value across the reboot but there is no control which would normally cause the output value to be stored when the user finishes data input Checking the persistent flag will solve this problem The NV Timing section is used to control the timing of update messages on the network resulting from this data point A minimum and maximum send time may be specified for output data points a receive timeout may be specified for input data points A value of 0 always means unlimited
288. o the value of the underlying data object Since the referenced data object can only have one value at a time the entered default value will apply to all other data points which reference the same data object as well The entered value will be run through the value translation to determine the resulting value for the underlying data object and this value will be distributed back to all connected data points to maintain consistency Only if the data point is marked as constant value this process is not done see next paragraph When adding a constant value data point set the constant value flag before entering the desired constant value in order to not disturb the default value of the non constant data points Version 4 5 If the Constant Value checkbox is set the point is marked as constant and the entered default value will not be overwritten by values received from the network or data entered by the user In addition you may set differing default values for data points which reference the same underlying data object if the data point is marked as constant value LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 9 LOYTEC NOTE Constant value data points are often very useful together with push buttons of any kind Create two or more push buttons for example three text controls with the static texts LOW MEDIUM and HIGH enable push button mode and request to always send the current value then add a temperature output data point t
289. ob Backgr Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Frame Tick marks and the bar frame as described above Bar which represents the value This color may be overridden by color Pulled Bar specifications from a connected mapping table Empty space inside the bar frame which is currently not filled by the bar Container color Color of the background outside the bar frame If the transparent check Backeromiq box is set all pixels using this color will be transparent Table 13 Color assignment for bar controls All other properties are set on the Bar Graph property page e Value Range The most important property on this page is the Value Range of the bar It must be adjusted to match the actual value range you want to visualize If the bar is used to input values this range also defines what the user may enter Values outside the given value range cannot be entered even using the key pad which is optionally available for input bar controls On the other hand if the actual bar height exceeds the desired value range the extra values may be entered because the bar may be dragged all the way up to the actual bar top no matter what the desired value range is NOTE Set the desired value range before you determine size and position of the bar especially if tick marks and or a scale is to be drawn This is important since the scale which best fits the current size will be deter
290. object implements a LONMARK Temperature Sensor object according to the LONMARK Functional Profile 1040 It sends out the current temperature in the nvoHVACTemp network variable of type SNVT temp p The object is configured over the configuration properties e SCPTmaxSendTime e SCPTminDeltaTemp e SCPTminSendTime e SCPToffsetTemp The configuration properties are described in detail in the LONMARK Functional Profile specification On the L VIS device the temperature sensor object reads the current temperature value from an external temperature sensor connected to the input terminals labeled TEMP on the device The same temperature is also available via a system register which is the preferred way to read the temperature if it is used directly on the L VIS device LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 157 LOYTEC 12 Special Functions BACnet 12 1 EDE Export of BACnet Objects The current BACnet server object configuration of BACnet L VIS models LVIS ME200 Is accessible as a set of CSV files following the EDE format convention They can be downloaded via FTP from the directory data ede on the L VIS device The files are e lvis csv This is the main EDE sheet with the list of BACnet objects e lvis states csv This is the state text sheet For each state text reference in the main sheet a line contains the state texts for this multi state object e lvis types csv This is the object types text sheet The file con
291. objects used of each type as well as the largest object in terms of memory usage For object types which require persistent storage in the file system in addition to runtime memory two separate lines are shown to indicate the object with the largest amount of RAM usage and the object with the largest amount of FLASH usage which may in fact be different objects The second list shows individual objects sorted by accumulated size starting with the largest object Note that the indicated size is the total size of the object itself plus all of its descendants so it corresponds to the amount of memory which would be freed if the object would be removed from the project Selecting an item from this list will select and highlight the corresponding item in the main window This dialog may be helpful to scan the project for items which cause undesired memory usage and should be optimized to improve the projects memory requirements LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 169 LOYTEC 14 7 Automatic Project Builder The configuration software provides a function to automatically create a project or parts of a project from a selected set of data points For each data point folder it creates a menu item and adds pages and controls to show the values of all data points in that folder In case of sub folders a sub menu is created to hold the menu items for the sub folders and so on The function is called from the context menu of a menu object or a me
292. ocal scheduler point is connected select the desired scheduler point in the tree view to see a preview of the corresponding configuration data The following options concerning the controls appearance can be set e Width of scroll bars This number specifies the width of the scroll bars if enabled The width should be chosen such that the bars are easily selectable by the user touch and drag but not consume too much space e ISO 8601 date format This option selects the ISO 8601 specification to display dates which is a four digit year a two digit month and a two digit day all separated by hyphens Y Y Y Y MM DD e DIN 1355 date format This option selects the German DIN 1355 specification to display dates In this format the order is day month and year separated by decimal points DD MM YY Y Y e US date format This option selects the US date format which uses the order month day and year separated by slashes MM DD YYY Y e I SO 8601 week This option instructs the control to adhere to the ISO 8601 specification to display the days of the week in the left column ISO 8601 defines Monday to be the first day of the week so the day list will start with Monday In countries which do not use the ISO norm turn this option off so that the day list starts out with Sunday as the first day of the week e Compact header This option causes the control to generate a one line header placing the scheduler name left aligned and t
293. ode used by schedule controls is fixed to Focus Loss meaning that the new schedule configuration will be written to the scheduler only at the time the control leaves edit mode This avoids intermediate updates while the user is still modifying the schedule which could result in temporarily inconsistent configurations 6 2 1 1 Select a Schedule If more than one schedule data point is connected to the control a small triangle is drawn to the left of the schedule name and touching the schedule name will open a dropdown list of all available schedules for selection This action is not restricted by access level settings so the dropdown box is always available to select one of the connected schedules 6 2 1 2 Select a Day Touching one of the day names in the left column will show the corresponding time table for that day in the right column If the day is inactive its name will be drawn in the same color as the background of the header lines instead of the normal text color Selecting a day for display is not restricted by access level settings 6 2 1 3 Set Exception Day Priority If the day 1s an exception day a number is displayed next to the day name This number defines the priority of the exception schedule relative to other exception schedules which may become active on the same day To set the priority touch the number and enter the desired value on the keypad This operation may be restricted by access level in which case the contro
294. of the control 2 3 8 Write the Project to the L VIS device Version 4 5 We are now ready to write the project to the L VIS device but first the project should be saved in a file on the PC Although it is possible to read the project back from the device it should not be considered a 100 safe place for the project to be since the device may erase the project in case it finds a severe error which would otherwise prevent it from booting up again If the erase jumper at the back of the device 1s set or the Remove Configuration command is selected from the File menu the project in the device may be lost as well so it is a good idea to have a backup copy ready on the PC To save the project select Save as LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 22 LOYTEC from the File menu and enter a project name To write the project to the L VIS device press the button with the red down arrow in the toolbar or select Write Project to the Device from the Connections menu and confirm the dialog NOTE If you created static NVs a warning message will appear stating that the static interface of the device will change and that the software will need to adjust the definition of the device in the database If you commissioned the device in the database already make sure to download the project in plug in mode otherwise it will be necessary to replace the device in the database new program ID and re commission See chapter 10 about standar
295. of the value display can be selected from this list Each style has an example to show how it would look like The styles dynamic land dynamic 2 automatically switch between the floating point format and one of the scientific formats 1 or 2 based on the value and the selected precision e Field Width This value defines the minimum desired number of characters to output including sign leading zero decimal point and any other characters which are part of the displayed number If the number needs more characters to display than specified here the field width will be extended as needed so that no characters are cut off e Precision This value specifies the desired number of digits following the decimal point The displayed value is rounded to fit the desired precision For example the value 2 86 is displayed as 2 9 if a precision of 1 is used and as 3 if a precision of 0 is used e Zero Padding This option causes the converted number to be padded with leading zeros rather than blanks if the number is shorter than the minimum specified field width This option has no effect if the option eft justified is used Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 68 LOYTEC e Left Justified This option causes padding characters to be inserted to the right of the converted number so that the number appears left justified within the specified field width The option has no effect if the field width is equal to or smaller than the sp
296. om the list of loaded sounds Note that this action will also stop any other sound which may currently be playing e Stop sound This action will stop any sound playback which may currently be in progress e Loop sound Similar to play sound but will repeat the sound from the beginning automatically NOTE The action update data points can also be used to increment or decrement the value of a register or of a network output feedback input pair which is required to implement up down buttons to dim light or modify a temperature set point To do this connect the register read point or the network feedback point as well as the register write point or network output point to the action Use the value translation of the read point to modify the incoming value as required add or subtract a fixed value When the action is executed the modified input value will be assigned back to the output value Since both refer to the same local register or remote actor the value of the register or the remote actor will be changed Version 4 5 Once the action type is selected choose the desired trigger mode from the dropdown list next to the action list Execute lt action gt on lt trigger gt The following trigger mechanisms are available e selection The action is triggered when the control is selected A control is selected when the user touches the control and releases the touch screen while still inside the control If the user moves
297. ommon properties tab add a label to the format string in the Text field e g Switch s e Add data points to the control To do this select Add Data Point from the context menu of the control Add an input data point for nviSwitch state and output data points for nvoSwitch state and nvoSwitch value A default mapping between the state input values and the displayed text is automatically added to the control e For the input data point nviSwitch state set the System Startup flag on the Data Point configuration tab e For the nvoSwitch value network variable go to the Data Point configuration tab configure the Default Value to 100 and set the Constant Value flag Set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 190 LOYTEC e For the nvoSwitch state network variable set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss The configuration now looks similar to Figure 16 The project can now be loaded into the L VIS device To change the state of the output network variable select the text control by operating the jog dial until a frame 1s displayed around the text control Select the control with a short click Now the frame starts flashing which signals that the control 1s in input mode Turn the jog dial to change the state Pressing the jog dial again deselects the text control Os saa Status One Usage T rol Main Menu Example Submenu Exangles Exangle 1 Switch Example Setch te
298. on in the menu the item appears There are objects to represent menus menu items pages various types of controls to display and input data there are objects to perform mathematical operations on data or generate alarms The total number of different object types is kept to a minimum and the objects are designed as generic as possible to ensure a steep learning curve and allow flexible and creative use of the available objects as the building blocks of more complex applications When building the object tree there are certain limitations in how objects can be connected to each other Most of the time this will be clear from the context for example it is clear that you cannot connect a page object to a menu since a menu would not know what to do with a page A menu is used to manage a list of menu items from which the user may choose Therefore a menu object will only accept menu item objects as child objects A page object can then be attached to a menu item object causing the item to show the attached page when it is selected from the menu NOTE Such limits are enforced by the configuration software automatically so you cannot drop or paste objects into places where they have no meaning Version 4 5 Some objects may be connected to a number of other objects for example a data point may be connected to all kinds of controls but a trend control only accepts input data points not output data points Mapping table objects m
299. on is wider than the field width the field 1s expanded to contain the conversion result LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 14 18 1 3 Precision 181 LOYTEC An optional precision in the form of a period followed by an optional decimal digit string If the precision is given as just or the precision is negative the precision is taken to be zero This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for d i o u x and X conversions the number of digits to appear after the radix character for a A e E f and F conversions the maximum number of significant digits for g and G conversions or the maximum number of characters to be printed from a string for s and S conversions 14 18 1 4 Length Modifier The conversion specifier may normally be preceded by a length modifier defining the physical size of the arguments data type In the L VIS implementation this modifier is not necessary and may be omitted in all cases 14 18 1 5 Conversion Specifier This is the character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied The available conversion specifiers and their meanings are dI 0 u x X eE F The int argument is converted to signed decimal notation The precision if any gives the minimum number of digits that must appear if the converted value requires fewer digits it is padded on the left with zeros The default precision is 1 When 0 is printed with an explicit precision 0 the output
300. on of the device in the database Instead check the following things upfront before starting the download e Run the configuration software standalone without connection to any L VIS device and load the project which is considered to match the current device in the network e Check the program ID of the device definition in the network e Ifthe ID starts with 9000a9 then the interface matches a standard device without any static NVs In this case only consider projects which do not contain any static NV data points The loaded project must have a Program ID model number of 0 e If the program ID starts with 900087 then the device has static NVs created and therefore uses a non standard interface In this case check the last byte of the program ID It is the program ID model number and it must match the model number of the project which you consider for download e Once a project with matching model number was identified this will most likely be compatible as far as the static interface 1s concerned To double check you may go through the list of static NVs defined in the project and compare it with the NVs that should be available on the device according to the devices definition in the network If the static interface seems to match the replace procedure may be started e During the replace procedure if the selected project causes data points to be reported during project load which cannot be assigned to any of the existing
301. on operators The preceding item is optional and matched at most once The preceding item will be matched zero or more times t The preceding item will be matched one or more times n The preceding item is matched exactly n times n The preceding item is matched n or more times LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 185 LOYTEC n m The preceding item is matched at least n times but not more than m times Two regular expressions may be concatenated the resulting regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated sub expressions Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator the resulting regular expression matches any string matching either sub expression Repetition takes precedence over concatenation which in turn takes precedence over alternation A whole sub expression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules The back reference Xn where n is a single digit matches the substring previously matched by the n sub expression enclosed in 14 18 3 2 Ambiguity If a regular expression could match two different parts of the input string it will match the one which begins earliest If both begin in the same place but match different lengths or match the same length in different ways life gets messier as follows In general the possibilities in a list of branches are considered in left to right order t
302. onfiguration The project Solution examples manual lcp contains a Switch Demo page i Solution examples manual 1 L Vis Configuration File Edit Model Firmware View Help Dg sae 3 3 Status Subsystem 1 L VIS ONNET Page Root Menu Example Pages Switch Example Root Menu amp 9 Menu Navigation E Example Pages Switch Example 4I0 Light value F Dimm up Dimm down F Switch Bitmap Back Icon E Sunblind Example E Animation Example split Example Counter Demo amp Setup Menu Global Objects For Help press F1 General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Menu Page Page Root Menu Example Pages Switch Example r Color Scheme r Color Assignment Tet D Frame sis gt lt Selection 5X C Appl to all sub obiects Linel X Bar Bitmap X Apply to all objects of this type Line2 X Container gt lt Line3 x Background fn parer Execute Menus 1 Items 3 lPages 6 Controls 44 Datapoints 41 Size 134 Figure 33 Switch demo page The example uses a bitmap control in push button mode to switch the state of a SNVT switch on or off Two arrows allow the user to increase or decrease the value part of the SNVT switch variable To increase and decrease the values action controls are Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 203 LOYTEC assigned to the bitmap controls The increase and decrease
303. onfiguration software and check for errors if a mail delivery attempt fails 13 6 Info Version 4 5 On this page some additional information related to the project can be entered Currently available is a field for the name of the project designer some kind of job reference number or purchase order and a large area to place notes such as changes between revisions special instructions for installing this project or general project documentation This information is not used by the device in any way but it will be stored together with all other project data on the device and remain available even after uploading a project from the device LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 164 LOYTEC Version 4 5 Also available on this page are two fields which display information as soon as the project was saved for the first time using a recent version of the configuration software 4 2 0 or newer Currently shown are the local timestamp when the project was saved for the last time as well as the version of the configuration software which created the project file LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 165 LOYTEC 14 Advanced Topics This chapter discusses some of the more advanced topics 14 1 Access Control Access control is organized in 16 levels Pages and input controls can be assigned a minimum access level required to view the page or enter data on an input control Any access level higher than the specified minimum
304. ontrol which you can open by a right click on the control in the preview The cursor keys can be used to move controls one pixel at a time and to resize the control when the shift key is held down 2 4 3 Create Data Points Version 4 5 In order to have some data points which can be controlled and displayed it is necessary to either create some server objects on the L VIS device or have other BACnet devices accessible in the network To keep the tutorial independent of other devices we use the data point manager window to create a few local server objects This window is accessible either LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 24 LOYTEC from the tool bar the icon left to the connect button or from the main menu Edit gt Datapoints Please skip forward to section 9 3 3 for a description of how to create local server objects Following this description create one analog input object and one binary input object You should get one output data point for each of the input server objects Using these data points the value of the server objects can be written To demonstrate how to display the value of remote server objects usually located on other devices in the network we will use our own server objects and pretend they are located on a different device To do so we first need to download the project to the device so that the server objects are actually created on the device Press the button with the red down arrow in the t
305. ontrol m 165 luna 166 Iva MIT ssie svie veesii 166 14 3 1 Alignment Functions sesssssssesseeeeenereneenenenenn enne 166 14 3 2 M ke Same S176 caca a eR RE N 166 14 3 3 Sp ce Bvenlyz e ced t ee a d te COR Ta e uus 166 Find Object 167 Find Similar ODjects scsscsssssssssssssssssssssssssscsscsessssssesesssessssesssesesessoeees 168 PEOJECUStAUISUICS ee eec 168 Automatic Project Builder 4 eese eee eee esee seen sentent ens tn nenne 169 ID VENS I SES 169 1457 2 Page Design sce ee ERR Re ERR 170 I4 73 Page Template sre eoo er UE e reds 171 Preview and Edit Mode eee eee eee eee eene tenete neta aeta sta snnn 171 Remote Network Interface eese eee esee eee eee enne en stes tasa sta snan 172 Local Data Point Capacity eee esee eee eee einen tenete notan tassa sensn 172 Device Model and Firmware eerie eee esee eee enne tn nete neta setas tn anna 172 Avoiding Update Loops eere eerte reete eren entente neta neta se tnns setas 173 User loaded Fonts eee eee eee eee ee sees enses tenens tasto seta sissoo 174 14 13 1 Font Manager secet eres tette get ne ete ei teneo e e eoe caves 174 14 13 2 Font File Location esee eoe PERO
306. onversions the result 1s undefined 0 The value should be zero padded For d i o u x X a A e E f F g and G conversions the converted value is padded on the left with zeros rather than blanks If the 0 and flags both appear the 0 flag is ignored If a precision is given with a numeric conversion d i o u x and X the 0 flag is ignored For other conversions the behavior 1s undefined The converted value is to be left adjusted on the field boundary The default is right justification Except for n conversions the converted value is padded on the right with blanks rather than on the left with blanks or zeros A overrides a 0 if both are given gt a space A blank should be left before a positive number or empty string produced by a signed conversion A sign or always be placed before a number produced by a signed conversion By default a sign is used only for negative numbers A overrides a space if both are used 14 18 1 2 Field Width Version 4 5 An optional decimal digit string with nonzero first digit specifying a minimum field width If the converted value has fewer characters than the field width it will be padded with spaces on the left or right 1f the left adjustment flag has been given A negative field width is taken as a flag followed by a positive field width In no case does a non existent or small field width cause truncation of a field if the result of a conversi
307. oolbar or select Write Project to the Device from the Connections menu and confirm the dialog After the device rebooted open the data point manager window again right click on the folder named BACnet Network Scan and select the item Scan BACnet Network Discover the devices on the network select the L VIS device and scan it for objects Close the scan dialog and use the two server objects found by the scanner to create corresponding client mappings Please see section 9 3 4 for a detailed description At this point there should be two data points in the folder called Server Objects and two data points in the folder called Client Mappings The client mapping points are input points which basically refer to the current value of the server objects located on our own device but the same procedure can be used to refer to any other server objects on other devices 2 4 4 Create Menu Structure and Pages The next step is to design a simple test page for this tutorial and use the data points to set and display values The empty project shows the root menu with no entries menu items You may change the name of the root menu as well as its colors and other properties such as the width of the menu or its scroll bar using the property pages to the right of the tree view make sure the root menu object is selected which should be the case right after you started the software The menu object is described in detail in section 8 2 First add a menu
308. operations are executed by two mathematic objects The operation results are exchanged between the mathematic object and the bitmap controls using a register 16 3 Animated Bitmaps The project Solution examples manual lcp contains an Animation Demo page i amp Solution examples manual 1 L Vis Configuration Eile Edit Model Firmware View Help Dc E BE sesen Status Page Root Menu Example Pages Animation Example 5 El Root Menu Menu Navigation Example Pages EE Switch Example Page Menu Subsystem 1 L VIS ONNET Usage General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Colo Menu Page Sunblind Example Animation Example 4T Label Switch Bitmap mapping View Timeout 0 sec Container Width Locked Page Bitmap Width Invisible Page 5 Default Page Scrollbar Width Enable Background wRegEnable mated Bitmap mapping rRecCounterValue D LOYTEC 9 Back Icon www loytec com f Show Main Menu E Split Example t Counter Demo amp 3 Setup Menu Global Objects Math Objects Counter Increment by 10 Decrement by 10 Merge Bits Push to start stop For Help press F1 Menus 1 Items 3 Pages 6 Controls 44 Datapoints 41 Size 134 Figure 34 Animation Demo configuration The animation demo shows how to generate animated bitmap controls A bitmap control in push button mode starts and stops the animation The animated bitmap is built of a bitmap control toge
309. or beginners to find out how a relative link to a certain page could be built Drag the desired target page onto the action to set the direct link and then convert it to a relative path Here are a few examples of possible relative page links e P1 e 12 P1 e Floorplan e D P1 e b2 Move to the first page of the current menu item Move to the first page of the second menu item in the current menu Note The menu is two levels up from the page Move to the page called Floorplan in the current menu item The first page of the next menu item in this menu Move to the page with the same name as the rightmost folder name of the second data point base path assigned to the template instance which contains the show page action LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 100 LOYTEC 8 10 Collections A collection object works like a folder on a file system It helps the user to organize objects in groups Collections can be placed on pages to group objects together and manipulate them as one unit It is also possible to create nested collections to build complex macro blocks which consist out of a number of smaller building blocks Following the root menu of the main tree view is a collection called Global Objects where objects can be collected which work invisibly in the background without a graphical representation on the screen and without a direct relation to any object on the screen for example alarm
310. or example if there are multiple pages defined underneath one menu item the U token would move to the previous page under the same menu 1tem Similar to U but moves down to the next sibling Moves to the sub menu of the current menu item This token is currently only meaningful on menu items since only they can have a sub menu Similar to M but moves to the x menu item of the current menu Since a menu may have more than one item the desired item number must be specified The first item 1s referenced by 11 This token is only meaningful on a menu object Similar to M but moves to the x page of the current menu item This token is only meaningful on a menu item Where x is a digit between and 4 and y is a digit gt 1 This token is valid when the action is defined in a template It will be replaced by the specified component of a data point base folder path during template instantiation See section 8 15 6 for detailed information about data point path placeholder tags It can be used to create page links which change dynamically based on the paths assigned to the template instance e Direct Link This link type references a certain target page by its object ID as shown on the General property page A direct link can be set easily by dropping the desired page onto the action object Note that on the property page of the action there is a button to convert between a direct link and an internal link This can be useful f
311. ork Depending on the device type and the type of network used this step is either done on the device or on the PC using network management software In any case the device first needs to be physically connected to the network and a suitable power supply 2 3 1 1 CEA 709 with LNS Create the L VIS device in the LNS database Add the L VIS device to your LNS network project Since the L VIS configuration plug in already creates the device templates the device configuration can be read from the device template Choose the device template which matches the network interface mode FT 10 or IP 10L of your device The Node ID of the device can be entered manually Optionally a service pin message can be sent by pressing the status button located at the bottom of the device or by selecting the Send Service Pin Message command in the Setup Commands menu of the L VIS device see 6 3 Set the device configured online during the commission phase so that the device will be able to communicate with other nodes on the network and with the configuration software NOTE Do not integrate the device into your project by uploading the device interface properties from the device before you registered the plug in This is important because if you upload the definitions from the device you will create a template of your own and the configuration software will then fail to create the real device template once you register it In this case you must remove
312. ove forward to the next menu item e Touch and move left As above but switches to the previous page connected to the active menu item NOTE Touch gestures may be disabled in the project configuration in case the project uses a button only navigation through the pages 6 1 2 Calibration Version 4 5 In case the touch screen has to be re calibrated select the command Calibrate Touch Screen from the command dropdown list in the setup menu This will show a black screen with a white cross at the top left corner of the display Touch the middle of the cross using a touch pen or other suitable device Look at the display from the same viewing angle as the user would during normal operation of the device Once the touch is detected the cross moves to the next corner The procedure repeats until all four corners were measured Following the measurements is a verification pass A white filled circle appears at the same locations as the cross Again touch inside the circle to let the device verify the data from the measurement pass If the data is OK the screen lights up green if verification fails the screen lights up red The last position for verification is a circle in the middle of the screen which must be touched as well for the calibration process to complete If the verification pass was successful the new calibration data is stored in non volatile memory so that it is retained across a power cycle or reboot LOYTEC elect
313. ove the bar up and down The current value will be sent out received back in and should be visible immediately on the numeric control 2 4 Quick Start Tutorial BACnet This tutorial describes the steps to create a first demo project and load the project into a BACnet model like the LVIS ME200 The tutorial assumes that the configuration software is already installed on the PC 2 4 1 Add the device to the network Version 4 5 The first step is to integrate the device into the network Power on the device and wait until the boot process has finished Open up the menu and go to the TCP IP setup page to set a suitable IP address network mask and gateway for the device or turn on DHCP to enable automatic IP configuration if available in your network Switch to the BACnet setup page and enter the desired device ID number If the device is connected via MSTP set the correct baud rate and node number if connected via BACnet IP set the desired port number the default should be OK in most cases LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 23 LOYTEC NOTE The device can only operate either on MSTP or BACnet IP The currently selected interface is shown on the BACnet setup page for your reference To select the desired interface either set the jumper at the back of the device as explained in section 5 1 LVIS ME200 or activate the desired interface directly on the BACnet setup page or via the web UI Reboot the device for the change
314. ox next to the background color button Table 11 Color assignment for text controls If the text control is an input control it may be selected by a touch on the controls text field A dropdown list will appear containing all entries of the mapping table which is connected to the control From this list the user may select a new entry The value which is associated with this entry in the mapping table will then be assigned to all connected non constant output data points Instead of opening a dropdown list text controls may also be used as push buttons where each press of the button will change the value This push button mode can be enabled on the Text Bitmap Drawing property page which is explained below since it works the same for text and bitmap controls For the L WEB model the text control may be set to web browser mode using the option Web Browser Mode at the bottom of the property page In this mode the L WEB application will not just display the contents of the text control but instead try to interpret them as web content according to the following rules e URL If the contents have the form of a URL like http www host com the specified URL will be followed and displayed in a browser window of the size and position given by the text control Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 65 LOYTEC e lt html gt If the contents start with an lt html gt tag they will be parsed as HTML source
315. p 58 Height 8 Resize Now wiCLLampVal value Options woLampManOverrd value Font Data Input Access Level woLampManOverrd state DEOS ROMFixed R Publ a m amow up ne e A amow down Open Font Manager Mirror Elx ly SetasDefauit See H minus send E49 Lamp Bitmap mapping di nviCLLampVal value i icht D LOYTEC 5 G3 Auto Btn Jalousie Mieiay 5 49 Auto Update E Update datapoints 38 nvoLampManOverrd state 3 nvoCLSetting function AT Text Auto SAF Btn Auto mapping i nvilightModeFb state m Manual Btn gg Off Btn E Menu Navigation HVAC Environment Haa Global Objects Sg Templates For Help press FL wV c X Y 007 068 Menus 1 Items 12 Pages 21 Controls 197 Datapoints 155 Figure 2 Main window of the L VIS configuration software 7 2 Context Menus Context menus are an important part of the workflow since most operations related to the objects of the L VIS project are accessible from the context menu of the object in question The context menu is usually opened using a right mouse button click on the desired object in the tree view but for objects visible in the LCD preview the same context menu may also be opened by a right mouse button click on the preview of the desired object Commands accessible via the context menus are detailed in the following sections Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 50 LOYTEC 7 2 1 A
316. page and drop it on another page An empty project contains only a root LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 19 LOYTEC menu and a folder object where global objects can be placed which are not directly related to the user interface for example alarm generators Property View On the top right of the main window is a property view which shows a number of property pages where you can adjust the properties of the currently selected object The number and kind of property pages changes according to the selected object but some of the more basic property pages are available all the time Feel free to browse through the available pages and see what you can adjust there LCD Preview To the lower right of the main window is the preview of the project as seen on the LCD when the project is downloaded This is not a functional simulation of the L VIS device but a layout guide and preview of individual menus and pages The preview changes according to the currently selected object Since the configuration software comes with a library of the layout code used in the various firmware versions of the device the preview is always accurate to the pixel Should the layout or appearance of controls change with firmware versions the configuration software is able to track these changes and display the page exactly as it will appear on the device you are currently connected to NOTE You may select move and resize your controls directly inside
317. ped in X and Y direction using the options on this page Note that this will affect the entire control For example rotating a bitmap control will show all bitmaps from the mapping table rotated accordingly To rotate individual images use the options in the image manager The button called Set as Default may be used to save the design of the currently selected visible object as the default design for new objects of the same type If a number of similar objects is to be created configure the first object press the default button and then create the other objects Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 59 LOYTEC NOTE The set defaults are saved together with the project so that the same defaults apply the next time this project is loaded To change the defaults for an object change the design as needed and press the default button again to update the stored default settings 7 6 3 Color The color property page is used to configure color and transparency for all visible objects To avoid different color property pages for every object the colors are set through this common page Colors which are similar in use appear on the same location so that multi assignment of for example a text or a background color to controls of different types 1s possible Not all objects support all colors When an object is selected it will report its color configuration on this page and set all unsupported colors to unset black cross
318. perties page option Access Level for Data Input To change the access level a suitable PIN code must be written to the system register called Pin Code Enter for normal login or the new access level can be set directly by writing the register Access Level NOTE It is valid to connect input and output data points to the same control at the same time This is ofien done when the control should display the current state of a network value for example the current light level and also allow the user to modify this value using the current value as the starting point The control will ignore any values coming in from the input data points while the user inputs data so that incoming data does not interfere with the users actions but resume displaying the incoming values when input mode is left If a control is selected it enters a special input mode in which all further touch actions are routed to and processed by the control Depending on the control type different data input methods are available e Numeric Keypad For number controls and bar graph controls a numeric keypad can be displayed when the input control is selected New values can then be entered on this keypad just like on a phone or a calculator e Keyboard For text controls without a mapping table a free text can be entered on a simple keyboard which provides the most important ASCII characters for basic strings numbers letters and some punctuation The entered st
319. plays the configuration of one or more local or remote scheduler units and their respective calendars In the simple UI mode the control consists of three basic areas e Header The header displays the name and the effective period of the selected scheduler If there is more than one scheduler configuration available more than one scheduler data point is connected to the control a small triangle is drawn next to the schedule name and touching the name opens a dropdown list of all available schedules e Day List The left side of the control contains a list of days for which schedules are available There is one entry for each day of the week followed by the list of all exception days defined by the corresponding calendar e Time Table The right side of the control shows the time table for the selected day The time table starts with its own header line which shows the selected day and also acts as a dropdown list of commands available for this day The various operations which can be performed on a schedule control in this mode are explained in more detail in the following sections Many of the operations may be restricted to a certain access level by the project designer so it may be required to enter a PIN code Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 39 LOYTEC before all of the operations are available For more information on access control setup for schedule controls refer to section 8 5 9 NOTE The update m
320. project automatically From the two items available in the data point list select the input data point and expand its items by a left click on the small plus sign left of the data point The expanded view will show two sub elements one for the state component of the NV and one for the value component A data point is selected by a double click or by selecting one or more points and clicking the Select button Use the above procedure to add the state part of the input NV to the text control the value of the input NV to the numeric control the state of the output NV to the bitmap control and the value of the output NV to the bar control NOTE When you add the state of the input NV to the text control another object called a mapping table will be created automatically and will be initialized to map the three known states of the switch state to standard state texts You may select this mapping table and change the texts as well as assign different colors to the individual texts in the mapping table Mapping tables are discussed in detail in section 8 7 for now you can leave the table alone All the controls should now have one data point connected with the text control and the bitmap control having a data point and a mapping table The bitmap control needs some more work since we need to assign graphics to the individual values of the connected data point To do this select the mapping table object which was automatically created
321. ption which will be checked automatically when an older project is loaded Turn it off to enable the new feature of tracking the state of a data point in addition to its value For example if an input NV has a receive timeout set and does not receive a value the point will go OFFLINE and the display will indicate that the value shown is no longer considered valid Note that using invalid values in a formula will automatically invalidate the result therefore it 1s possible to turn state tracking off for individual data points see the description of the data point object The checkbox here is a master switch to turn state tracking off for the entire project 13 2 2 System Settings The settings which can be made in this section are 13 2 3 System Colors Device Name A device name can be given using this field It will be used as the host name when the device requests an IP address at a DHCP server and it will be used as a server name by the built in VNC server The device name will also be available on the device in a system register so it can be displayed or connected to other data points so that it can be seen on the network Time Source This dropdown list allows to set a specific source for time synchronization This avoids possible conflicts 1f there is a time signal coming in from more than one source and the time is not the same Select the desired source for time synchronization from the list Update Scheduler Config This dropdown l
322. r in pixel Higher bars mean bigger navigation buttons Floating point value field precision This input field specifies the number of significant digits to print for alarm values LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 85 LOYTEC NOTE If an action object is connected to the alarm list control and the action trigger is set to value update the action will be executed whenever a new entry is added to the alarm list This can be used to switch to a specific page action show page or write a value to a data point action update data points to notify the user of the new alarm list entry The following colors may be set for alarm list controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Text Color for the text printed by the control Highlight Highlight color of 3D frames Shadow Shadow color of 3D frames Horizontal Grid Grid line color Buttons Button graphics and page information in the navigation bar and text color for the label of the ACK button Button Backgr Background color of the acknowledge button Active Text Text color for entries which are currently in alarmed state Active Backgr Background color for entries which are currently in alarmed state Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Container Background color of the alarm entries in normal state Color of the control background If the transparent check box is
323. r interpolation will draw straight lines between the recorded values which is suitable for temperatures or other analog values which do not represent a small set of discrete values The checkbox Absolute Time causes the scale labels on the time axis to display the date and time of the recorded data instead of a relative time The label will normally display the time of day except at midnight in which case the new date will be displayed The formatting of the time and date labels can be controlled through the input fields Time Format and Date Format The same format strings as used for date controls are usable in these fields The format is explained in section 14 18 2 of this manual In the middle of the property page are some additional Flags to be set Depending on the selected object there are different flags available With the trend control selected the following options can be set e Draw Grid This option enables a grid which is automatically laid out to fit the current tick mark spacing and allow easier readout of the displayed data Set the final control size after enabling the grid and choose a size which yields a good looking result for the grid e Draw Buttons This option enables the display of standard buttons to mark the areas of the control which are used to flip through the pages and zoom in and out The buttons are not required to operate the control so they may be hidden without losing functionality It is also possible to
324. r period a short press will be triggered e Dim backlight after The amount of idle time after which the backlight is dimmed down and the device enters standby mode This may have effects on other functions for example a schedule control may return to the weekly overview page and show the current date e Backlight OFF after The amount of idle time after which the backlight is completely turned off Note that this time has a minimum value to protect the CCFL lamp from turning off and on too often reducing the life time of the lamp Restarting the lamp after it was turned off typically consumes an equivalent lifetime of 10 minutes in normal operation This section controls the sounds produced when touching the display and entering values The frequency of a low pitch and a high pitch sound may be entered and the sound output can be turned on and off 13 1 4 OEM Bitmaps In this section bitmaps can be specified to customize the about page shown during system boot and the PIN code entry page shown when a protected page is accessed and the current access level is not sufficient The bitmaps must match the resolution of the display for example 320x240 Suitable template bitmaps are installed together with the configuration software For newer firmware versions it is recommended to design dedicated pages as part of the project and declare them as Login Page or About Page See section 8 4 1 for more information about this feature 13 1 5 S
325. r the active page Figure 26 and one for the inactive page Figure 27 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 199 LOYTEC L I Figure 26 Active page bitmap Figure 27 Inactive page bitmap The bitmaps are aligned to form a row of tabs On each tab a text control is placed with identifies the page and the page links in the example it is called Page 1 Page 2 To each of the inactive page bitmap controls an action object is assigned The action to execute is to change to the respective page This setup has to be copied for each page but he location of the active page bitmap changes according to the page on which the controls are placed The same mechanism can be used to build tabs on the bottom which is also shown in the menu project Tab Menu Bottom Figure 28 De Lk Model Prese Yew teip Os tbe tena Situs Subsystem 1 018 ONNET General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Calor Menu Page Seen Coordnses taf o waa F Te 5 Hei E imap For Heo press FL Merus 2 ensia Poges i Cortoki 118 Dataoor s 13 Soei 2518 Figure 28 Bottom tab menu solution Another tab solution in the project shows how to implement flat tabs but using only line bitmaps In that solution the action objects are assigned to the text controls The leftmost button in that case opens the main menu Figure 29 Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 200 LOYTEC Ble Ed Modei
326. rd mode on the running L VIS device 8 5 9 2 Extended Mode Version 4 5 In extended mode the control provides a calendar and event based view of the schedule data There are different pages of information like for example a weekly overview a time table for a certain date a list of scheduled events for a certain date or a list of all events currently stored in the schedule This mode is suitable for complex schedule configurations possibly using an LWEB 801 server together with the Master Schedule Configurator software The user will always see exactly which values are scheduled on a certain date since the control combines all the available daily schedules with their date patterns and priorities to determine the resulting effective schedule Also changing the schedule is based on events similar to appointments in a calendar with an effective date most often repetitive a start and end time a value and a priority LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 79 LOYTEC NOTE In this mode only one schedule data point can be connected to the control This is because the UI does not provide a way to display the name of the currently selected schedule or switch between multiple schedules in the same control To view and edit multiple schedules please use one dedicated control for each schedule If there are multiple data points connected to the control the extended user mode option will be deactivated and cannot be activated unt
327. rder to allow recoding using the installed encoding tables 14 14 XML Support Version 4 5 Similar to the XML import export function for individual objects as explained in section 7 2 4 it is possible to read and write the entire project file in XML format The easiest way to do this is to select XML format from the file format dropdown list in the file save dialog which opens when the command Save As is selected from the File menu of the main window Alternatively use the command Export XML gt Project from the File menu Using the sub menus Export XML and Import XML from the File menu it is also possible to read or write only parts of the project in XML format The following parts may be imported and exported separately e Project As explained above reads or writes an entire project e Font Set Reads or writes the current set of user loaded fonts This can be used to save a standard font set in XML format and import it as a starting point when a LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 177 LOYTEC new project is started If the font set is imported while there are already controls in the project referencing user fonts care should be taken that the changed font set 1s suitable for the existing controls User fonts are referenced by index number so that the changed font set may cause controls to be drawn in a font of different size as before Check the project for problem areas if such a switch is done e Project Se
328. re required e Create the needed alarm server points more than one may be created to organize alarms into groups From the properties of the alarm server point set the Ack To Fault and or Ack To Offnormal checkboxes 1f the alarms from this server need to be acknowledged e Add alarm conditions to the server objects you want to monitor This can be done via the context menu of the server object using the command Create Alarm Condition e Assign one of the existing alarm servers to this condition which is done in the same dialog where the alarm condition is specified 9 5 2 Algorithmic Reporting CEA 709 devices do currently not support the mechanism of intrinsic reporting Instead the application needs to provide an algorithm which determines if an alarm state is reached Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 129 LOYTEC On L VIS devices the alarm generator objects as described in section 8 11 are used for this purpose To set up alarming using algorithmic reporting the following steps are needed e Create the alarm server point e Add alarm generator objects to your project as required e Set up the alarm generator objects Connect the input data points which should be monitored and use the alarm server point as the output point of the alarm generator 9 5 3 System Resources On BACnet devices each alarm server point automatically instantiates a notification class object to handle alarm subscriptions and
329. re to read and write configuration data upgrade the firmware and retrieve diagnostic data from the device configuration e Communication with other devices on the control network to send out new data the user entered through the device and to receive new data which is then displayed operation One of the two interfaces is the IP interface Ethernet 10 100Base T which is always available for configuration and may also be used for operation although different protocols will be used for the two tasks as shown in the table below The second interface is a specialized control network interface like FT 10 for the CEA 709 devices and MSTP for the BACnet devices Only the CEA 709 models are currently able to use their control network interface for configuration as well The BACnet models need the IP interface for configuration The interface to use for normal operation 1s normally selected directly on the panel or through the web interface starting with firmware version 4 0 0 For LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 devices there is also the option to set the IP jumper The following table either lists the required jumper setting SET NOT SET or the interface mode to select on the panel LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 34 LOYTEC Model Interface Task Protocol IP Jumper 10 100Base T LVIS 3E100 10 100Base T LVIS ME200 BIP SET MSTP MSTP NOT SET FISS any Mowe 10 100Base T CEA 852 Mode IP852 LVIS 3E1 Ix dn CEA 709 ModeFT
330. re 5 Create network variable dialog In the dialog Figure 6 select the network variable on the node to which the new dynamic network variable will be connected afterwards The dynamic network variable will get some attributes of the selected variable like the SNVT type assigned Click on OK to confirm your choice Echelon LonMaker Subsystem 1 Actuator LNS Network Interface L VIS Sensor age Closed Loop Sensor i ieFb ny Ue Node Object 0 Virtual Functional Block Subsystem 1 Sensor Closed Loop Sensor nvo01 Value Figure 6 Select complementary variable dialog Now the source NV name in the Create Network Variable dialog is filled in Figure 7 NOTE Make sure to set the poll attribute of the NV to Set if you are creating an input NV in order to allow the device to support the receive timeout and poll on system start features Version 4 5 When Finished press the OK button and also confirm the Choose a Network Variable dialog with OK LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 150 LOYTEC Direction Output Poll Attribute of new Nv s Clear C Same as source NV C Set Opposite of source NV Figure 7 Create network variable dialog This completes the creation of the new dynamic network variable Figure 8 The dynamic network variable can now be bound to other network variables like a normal network variable and can also be used as a data point source or data point sink in th
331. re as values starting with 3 C will show NORMAL in the text control Figure 20 shows a screenshot of the mapping table General Common Properties Mapping Data Point 0 00 FREEZE 0 10 ATTENTION 3 NORMAL Select Bitmap Reset Load Save Delete New Entry Clear Bitmap Figure 20 Mapping table In the tree view open the context menu of Global Objects and add an alarm generator Label the alarm generator with Freeze Alarm On the context menu of the alarm generator select Add Data Point Since we have no output network variable of type SNVT alarm 2 we will generate a register which stores the value of the alarm generator To create a new register click on the New button and edit the field on the bottom of the dialog window For the Name enter rwFreezeAlarm for Type select Reg Write Change the Name in the Register Properties field to FreezeAlarm and set the Type to alarm 2 164 For Element keep the value Select the new element in the list and click on OK Select Add Data Point again on the context menu of the alarm generator and add the nviTemp data point to the alarm generator In the Alarm Generator tab Figure 21 of the alarm generator set the alarm conditions for the alarm We will trigger an alarm when the temperature falls below 3 C For the Data Point Value Range set the minimum value to 3 For the Alarm Condition select Below Min In the Action field
332. re in standalone mode and connect to the device preferably using a TCP IP connection e Load the current project from a file or from the device and modify it as required adding or removing static NV data points e Download the new project to the device A warning appears stating that this operation will change the static interface and that the configuration software will not be able to automatically upgrade your device in the network e Incase you are connected over CEA 709 another warning will tell you that the connection will be lost after the download because the device will go to unconfigured state due to the static interface change It is therefore recommended to use TCP IP for the connection e After the device restarted use the Export XIF function from the Tools menu to generate a new XIF file matching the new configuration ofthe device e Execute the standard procedure of your network management tool to replace the old device with a new device and use the new XIF file to define the new interface NOTE The above procedure assumes that there are no dynamic NVs present on the device Manually changing the static interface of a device is not supported by any of the common network management tools when there are dynamic NVs present at the same time Therefore updates to the static interface in mixed projects can only be done in plug in mode 10 4 Configuration Recovery This section describes procedures to recover
333. reated by using two bar controls One is a classic bar control to which the input data point is connected showing the current value Next to this bar a second bar can be placed Use the layout tools see section 14 3 to make this bar the same with same height and same baseline position as the first bar Also use the same value range but disable all decorations and make the bar invisible Load an indicator bitmap for example an arrow pointing towards the other bar control using the common properties page Connect the output data point to the indicator bar to allow defining the desired set point by dragging the indicator bitmap the arrow up and down Instead of a static bitmap on the common properties page it is also possible to connect a mapping table containing different bitmaps based on the value This would allow for example the indicator arrow to change shape or color based on the set value The bitmap may also be an animated GIF 8 5 6 Trend Control Trend controls record and display data point values over time In case the connect data point is itself a trend recording or a data point from an existing trend recording is selected the control does not collect trend data by itself but instead reads the data from the specified trend log data point This type of control does not allow inputting new values and therefore cannot handle output data points Only input data points may be connected to a trend control except the device firmware
334. required to make some minor adjustments to the appearance of the template instance to distinguish it from other instances of the same template The most important adjustment is the display offset which allows the same template to be instantiated on the same page multiple times at different locations However there are a few other things which may need to be modified for example colors or text for headlines While many aspects of the instance will be controlled by the referenced data points and the actually used data points will vary from instance to instance it is not always feasible to control everything just via data points Therefore a template instance allows the position text alignment colors and some other settings to be changed on the respective property sheets Note that settings which are not changeable at the instance level are disabled To check and modify such properties go to the corresponding template for example by using the command Show Template from the context menu of the instance and modify the properties in the template In order to keep the adjustments even when the template itself is changed they are stored together with the template instance object If a stored change is no longer applicable for example because the object to which it applies was removed from the template the change Is discarded If a locally changed value for a property 1s found in the list of changes the locally stored value overrides the def
335. ring can be assigned directly to a connected string data point e Touch and move For bar graph controls the bar may be directly moved to the desired position by touching the bar and moving it to the desired height While doing this the control can be instructed to send periodic updates to the connected output data points so the user gets immediate feedback useful for light control e Drop down selection For text controls and bitmap controls a drop down list is displayed when the input control is selected The user can select the desired item from the list Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 38 LOYTEC e Push button mode For text controls and bitmap controls a push button mode can be activated This mode assigns a new value to a control whenever the control is selected The next value is determined by selecting the next or previous entry in the mapping table so the user may cycle through the available values e Alarm Acknowledge The alarm list control may draw a push button next to an alarm entry if the alarm is to be acknowledged Pressing the button will send the acknowledgement to the alarm server and change the color of the button Once the server received the acknowledgment the button or the entire alarm entry may disappear from the list e Schedule Configuration Due to the complex nature of schedule configuration data the schedule control implements a specialized input method which is explained in detail i
336. rm messages e SNVT time stamp This type of data point can be connected to date controls e SNVT str asc This and other string data types string registers may be directly connected to a text control The string received via these objects will be displayed directly on the text control without a lookup in a mapping table If the data point is an output point the string selected from the mapping table is directly assigned to the data point without converting to a number first If the string contains non ASCII characters they are represented in the ISO 10646 character set and are transferred in UTF 8 encoded format This way it is possible to exchange strings in any language between two L VIS devices The data point object is the object created when Add Data Point is selected from the context menu of a control to assign a data point to it The reason why the assignment of data objects to controls is done via a separate object instead of directly connecting a physical data object to the control has a number of reasons The most important ones are 1 Data objects represent network objects which exist on the device They must be independent of the existence of any control or other user interface object If a data object were to be connected to a control and the control is deleted the data object would be deleted as well Using a reference object to link the control to an existing data object solves this problem Deleting the control will also
337. roject or store all custom fonts which are used in the project in the same place where the project file itself is located For example create a folder to store the project file together with all custom font files in one place Now the entire folder may be copied to any other PC and the required font files will always be found automatically 14 13 3 Font Recoding The L VIS configuration software as well as the L VIS device itself is Unicode enabled All text entered in the configuration software and displayed on the device is encoded using the 16 bit international Unicode standard UCS 16 PCF and BFD fonts may use other encodings such as ISO8859 JISX0212 Big5 IBM or Microsoft codepages for example MS CP 1250 If such a font is loaded it is automatically recoded to UCS 16 before it is used since the L VIS device does not recognize encodings other than UCS 16 The font recoding is done using the coding tables found in the directory Encodings located in the program directory New encodings may be added to make them available for the import of fonts NOTE Fonts in other formats than BDF or PCF should contain an ISO8859 1 or ISO10646 Unicode codepage or Adobe Type 1 glyph names in order to facilitate recoding to UCS 16 While there are practically no vector fonts which do not provide any of this information it may be an issue when loading old Windows fonts for other than western languages Such fonts may be converted to BDF format in o
338. rom the folder of device 2 while the base path is set to device 1 this data point would be considered fixed and not relative since it would not be located below the selected base path Consider the following when designing a new template e Try to place the controls at the position which is most likely the desired final position when the template is instantiated This avoids the need to move each template instance to the desired location e Determine which data points are needed to make the template work For variable data points make sure they are organized in folders which can later be replaced for each template instance When creating data points from a network scan this kind of organization is usually done automatically since a new folder will be created for each device Add each of the variable data point folders from which the template 1s using data points to the list of data point base paths e Ifthe template will be using instances of other templates check which base paths these templates require and add them to the list of base paths for your own template if they are not already covered by one of your existing base paths Note that sub folders are automatically covered This is because the system will always try to find the best way to derive the base paths of template instances in a template from the available base paths of the parent template For example if the top level template uses base path A B and there is a template inst
339. ronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 37 LOYTEC NOTE If you are unsure about the viewing angle at which the device will be used it is best to calibrate for a direct front view at a right angle to the display surface This is the most likely position and will also provide enough margin for error in all possible directions For normal control sizes the small errors introduced by differing viewing angles are not noticeable 6 2 Data Input As shown in the tutorial L VIS uses configurable control elements to display and input data Whether a control is selectable for data input depends on the data points connected to it as well as on the current access level of the user e Data Points If at least one output data point is connected to a control the control becomes an input control meaning the user may select the control and input new data which is then assigned to all connected output data points unless they are marked as Constant Value If only input data points are connected the control is not selectable and will only display the most recent value received from any of the connected input data points Some controls like trend log controls may not be used to input new data but may still be selectable to navigate through the recorded data e Access Level If a control is an input control it will only enter input mode if the current access level of the user 1s equal to or greater than the level defined for the control on the Common Pro
340. rporation registered in the United States and other countries L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 3 LOYTEC Table of Contents I Introduction 4 4 ee puce sige cc in eund eo eee codo ae aoc ete eso cere d aoi esevececos se pato LO 1 1 1 2 What is L VIS M 10 Mop T Ss 12 2 Getting started asas eti bee deni p co ssosss soouss Orso sosse erosioa dO 2 1 2 2 3 2 4 Installing the L VIS Configuration Application eee 13 Connecting to the Device eee eee essent eene nete natns tn setas tassa seta snn 13 22 1 CEA 709 D6VIC68 aio R GIRO GUN RATAA 13 222 BA CHEE DEVICE doces ntoan Oan eue oOe nean Ride 16 Quick Start Tutorial CEA 709 eee esee eres eese ee teen etn tnen notan sns eta inan 17 2 3 1 Add the device to the network norin EE EOE N RE 17 2 3 2 Create Dynamic NVs LNS only sese 17 2 3 3 Start the L VIS Configuration Software sse 18 2 3 4 Create Static NVs if no dynamic NVs available sssss 19 2 3 5 Create Menu Structure and Pages ccceccsseesseeeeeeceeseeeseeeceeenseenseenees 19 2 3 6 Add Controls to the Page sse 20 2 3 7 Connectthe D ta Points senecio aa ERU NREREERSS 20 2 3 8 Write the Project to the L VIS device ssssssssseseeeee 21 23 9 Test ihe Projectcsx Seer PAUSE Es
341. s This button selects the previous object from the search results and shows it in the main window e Close Closes the search dialog The current search options are kept and will be set the same way when the dialog is opened the next time The lower half of the dialog contains the search result list Select one of the found objects to see it in the main window 14 5 Find Similar Objects To make it easy to locate objects in the object tree which are similar to the currently selected object the function Find Next from the Edit menu or the keyboard shortcut F3 can be used Select the desired object and press F3 to skip forward to the next similar object An object is considered similar if it is of the same basic type menu menu item page control data point and has the same name This allows for example to find all uses of a certain data point reference all back buttons all navigation bar folders and so on If the project uses meaningful names for the objects this function can be very convenient For more complex searches use the full featured search dialog 14 6 Project Statistics Version 4 5 A dialog showing information about the number of currently defined objects and their memory requirements can be opened via the command Project Statistics which is available in the File menu of the main program window The dialog shows two object lists The first list shows the different object types the total number of
342. s a consequence a push button mode sends out two updates on a data point which has its update mode set to Immediate The first update is sent immediately when the control chooses the next value the second update is sent when the button is released and leaves input mode To prevent this extra update set the update mode to Focus Loss 8 5 4 Numeric Control Version 4 5 These controls are used to display values as numbers Most properties can be set on the Common Properties page as described earlier in this document Similar to text controls the color of the number the background and the selection frame can be set on the Color property page The Numeric Control property page provides access to the specialized properties of numeric controls like the allowed value range and a wizard to generate a suitable format LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 67 LOYTEC string for your control if you don t want to enter it yourself on the common properties page In the area nput Mode the properties concerning value input are defined e Value Range The values entered in these two fields min max define the limits for input of new values The user can not input any value below min or above max Values received from input data points are always displayed even if they are outside the allowed input value range e Input Resolution This value is only used by the older LVIS 3ECTB model which has a jog dial instead of a touc
343. s of the same value since the originating value did not change 8 13 3 Function List Function add v1 v2 sub vi v2 mul vi v2 div v d mod v m max v1 min v1 avg v1 log v log2 v log10 v exp v exp2 v exp10 v sqrt v pow v exp round v floor v ceil v sum v1 Version 4 5 The following function calls are currently supported Return Value vi v2 vi v2 vi v2 v d Returns the remainder of dividing v by m where v and m should be integer values Fractional values will be rounded to the nearest integer automatically Returns the maximum of all values on the value stack Returns the minimum of all values on the value stack Returns the arithmetic mean value of all values on the stack Returns the natural logarithm of v Returns the base 2 logarithm of v Returns the base 10 logarithm of v Returns the value of e the base of natural logarithms raised to the power of v Returns the value of 2 raised to the power of v Returns the value of 10 raised to the power of v Returns the non negative square root of v Returns the value of v raised to the power of exp Round v to the nearest integer Round v down to the nearest integer Round v up to the nearest integer Returns the sum of all values on the stack LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 107 LOYTEC Function and b1 b2 or b1 b2 xor b1 b2 not b It v1 v2 le v1 v2 eq vi v2 ge vi v2 gt vi v2 if b vt vf
344. s of the underlying operating system the system time of the device may not be set to a date before 1 1 1988 8 5 8 Data Log Control Data log controls are used to record data based on events as opposed to trend log controls which record data continuously over time The result of a data log is a list of data records which were recorded at specific points in time Each data record is composed out of one or more visible elements to display the recorded data like text number bitmap or date controls The individual data records are created in the folder called Data Fields which 1s part of every data log control To add a new log record select Add Record from the context menu of the Data Fields folder Then add the visible elements required to compose your data record to the new folder and attach the data point you want to record As you lay out the visible elements to build a nice looking data record the control adjusts its line height to match the area required by your data record You will notice that each added data record already comes with a trigger object which has similar properties than a math object Connect the data points you want to monitor to determine when to store this data record and enter the required formula on the property page of the trigger object Then select a trigger mode from the available choices Refer to section 8 14 for a complete description of trigger objects NOTE If the trigger mode is set to any value upd
345. s to take effect 2 4 2 Start the L VIS Configuration Software Run the installed L VIS configuration software from the start menu of your desktop Connect to the device by pressing the Connect button from the tool bar or select the menu item Connect to the Device from the Connection menu of the main window In the connection dialog enter the IP address or DNS name of the device the desired connection mode FTP Telnet or secure connection via SSH if your device is not an LVIS ME200 adjust the port numbers if necessary and enter the admin password if the device firmware is 4 0 0 or newer The configuration software contacts the device finds out what model and firmware version it 1s selects the correct settings and disables the corresponding menus so that you may not change them The main window will show an empty L VIS project The main window is divided in tree major sections Tree View On the left side of the main window is a tree view showing all objects you created so far and how they relate to each other for example a menu object may have menu item objects attached to it a menu item object may have page objects and sub menu objects attached and a page object contains the elements to display and enter data these elements are called controls in this manual You may navigate through this tree and select an object from it or drag and drop objects to move them around in the hierarchy for example grab a control from one page and
346. scan or can be created manually CEA 709 only Here are the steps to create the required points from a network scan e Execute a network scan as described earlier in this document e From the points in the import folder select the alarm server points you are interested in and use the command Use on Device to create suitable alarm client points in your project e For CEA 709 select the new alarm client point and adjust the name of the local NV default name is nviAlarm 2 Also you may assign this NV to one of the L VIS functional blocks as required NOTE Due to the static input NV which is required for a CEA 709 alarm client point adding alarm clients will change the static interface of the device Version 4 5 To keep the project reusable in different networks it is desirable to create the remote alarm data point manually on CEA 709 devices and define the connection to the alarm server by the network binding only Instead of using data from a network scan a remote alarm data point can be created as follows e Select the data point folder named Alarm and use New Remote Alarm from the context menu in the data point list to bring up a dialog to create a new remote alarm point e Enter a name for the data point a name for the input NV which will be used to connect the alarm server of another device to this data point and select the desired functional block in which the NV should be located On BACnet devices the ne
347. select the desired type from the dropdown menu To remove the entry select the remove command from the same menu To edit the data of the entry touch the individual components of the dates to open up a dropdown list with various choices One of the choices will always be value to open a keypad and enter a value Other choices may be available depending on the selected element For most entries the choice any will be available to set this component to the wildcard For months the choices odd and even may be available to specify all odd or all even months For days the option last may be available to specify the last day of the month To save the changes done to the exception day patterns close the window using the close button in the top right corner of the window This will update the calendar object with the new data Note that this will also affect all other schedules running on the same calendar 6 2 2 Extended Schedule Control Version 4 5 This section describes how to operate a schedule control which is set to extended UI mode which is available on devices running firmware 4 2 0 or newer In this mode the control displays a calendar and event based preview of the schedule instead of a list of daily schedules There are a number of different pages between which the user can navigate e Weekly Overview This is the default page which is displayed after a system start It shows an overview of the effective schedule for one week organi
348. services LVIS 3EIxx with IP 852 interface enabled as well as any other device using global connections CEA 852 LON over IP This service is in accordance with the standard ANSI CEA 852 B LVIS ME2xx with BACnet IP interface enabled BACnet IP This service is in accordance with the standard ANSI ASHRAE 135 2010 Optional services not necessary for the primary product function Version 4 5 HTTP Web server It provides a Web based configuration UI The Web UI can be disabled after setting up the device LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 187 LOYTEC e OPC XML DA This Web service provides access to data points over the OPC XML DA standard It is available only when the HTTP server is enabled e SSH Secure shell server available on LVIS 3E11x ME21x devices only It can be used for a secure connection to the device by the configuration software for configuration and firmware upgrade On devices that do not have SSH Telnet FTP must be used instead e FTP and Telnet The FTP and Telnet servers are used for connection to the device by the configuration software for configuration firmware upgrade and access to the log file On devices without SSH server these services must be enabled during device configuration e VNC The VNC server can be used for remote access to the LCD display on devices where it is enabled in the project settings The service is disabled by default e RNI This service provides the remote networ
349. set all Background pixels using this color will be transparent Note that this color is only visible in areas where no alarm entries are drawn Table 19 Color assignment for alarm list controls 8 5 11 Vector Drawing Control Version 4 5 The vector drawing control is similar to a bitmap control see also section 8 5 2 The main difference is that the control displays a vector drawing object instead of a bitmap The drawing can be created from within the configuration software and is limited to simple objects More complex drawings can be created by combining multiple drawing objects into one larger object using collection objects folders To create a new drawing object select Add Drawing from the context menu of the page and choose the desired drawing type from the list of available choices e Lines This adds a line drawing to the page and enters drawing mode Please see section 8 5 11 1 below for detailed information on how to use the drawing mode e Rectangle This adds a new rectangle to the page and draws it according to the selected properties as detailed below e Circle This adds a new circle to the page and draws it according to the selected properties e Polygon This adds a new closed polygon drawing Drawing mode is similar to line drawing see also section 8 5 11 1 except that the drawing consists only of a number of points instead of a number of lines This makes a difference when editing the drawing later on
350. setting Dim backlight after in the project settings since after this time the device dims down the backlight and goes into idle mode Also this option will cause the control to follow the current date while the device is idle meaning that the weekly overview page will be updated to show the current day whenever the date changes for example at midnight Use simplified priority scheme This option hides the numerical priority values from the user and instead provides a drop down list of three fixed levels to LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 81 LOYTEC choose from low normal high The mapping is optimized to work together with the LWEB master schedule Configurator system which also uses three distinct priority levels for the entered events Even in a standalone system it may make sense to use this option to make the UI easier to read for users which are not familiar with the numerical priority scheme of the underlying network technology When this option is turned off the technology specific priority numbers will be used directly so the user needs to know how they work Usually lower numbers mean higher priority and the allowable range is different for each network technology 0 to 15 for BACnet 1 to 127 for CEA709 Prefer event list over time table This option changes the navigation on the weekly overview page Normally touching a day column switches to the time table of the selected day whereas touching the day
351. single click does the same as the left double click e Tab key moves the selection down to the next object on the current page in the tree view From the last object on the page the selection moves back to the first object on the same page LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 101 LOYTEC Using the tab key is especially useful while using the keyboard cursor keys to move and resize a control Using the tab key to switch the selection to the next object on the page can be convenient in this situation The command Lock Unlock Position in the context menu of the collection allows locking the current position of all objects inside the collection to protect them from accidental move while working on other objects in the LCD preview 8 11 Alarm Generators The alarm generator object is used to monitor input data points and issue alarms based on rules which are set on the Alarm Generator property page For a discussion of alarming on L VIS devices in conjunction with the underlying network technology and system wide alarms please also refer to section 9 5 of this manual To add a new alarm generator use the context menu of a collection object in the object tree and select Add Alarm Generator A new alarm generator object will be created and connected to the collection object Once the alarm generator object is created connect the input data points which should be monitored Each of the connected input data points will show up on
352. splayed NOTE In case of overlapping events scheduled at the same priority but with different values it cannot be guaranteed which of the two conflicting values will be scheduled 6 2 2 4 Global Event List Version 4 5 This page is almost the same as the normal event list The only difference is that this page shows all events which are currently stored in the scheduler unit Since this list is not related to a specific date there are no navigation buttons Only the buttons to add a new LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 6 2 2 5 Event Editor To modify existing events and add new events a separate editor window is opened in front of the scheduler The following settings can be adjusted in this editor Version 4 5 44 LOYTEC event and to navigate back to the previous page are available The page can be reached directly from the weekly overview by pressing the edit button Name A custom name for this event If supported by the underlying scheduler unit a name can be entered here Note that even if this field is available a length limit for the name may apply Value The value which should be scheduled when this event is active Depending on the type of data points controlled by the scheduler unit this field may be a dropdown list of all the available value presets or a field to enter an arbitrary number via the keypad If supported by the scheduler an additional edit button will be displayed to the right of
353. ss BACnet instance number or others or read the current value of a system parameter like the current time CPU load free memory and so on A system parameter object is either a read only or a write only value depending on the direction of the data object e Register A register is a place to store data internally instead of communicating with other devices on a network Registers are used to internally transfer data between objects for example when a mathematic object calculates a value which should be displayed on a control the result of the calculation is stored to a register and the control reads the value from the register for display A register is therefore always represented by two data objects One to write a new value to the register and one by which the current value of the register can be read LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 116 LOYTEC e Local Network Object A local network object refers for example to a static or dynamic network variable CEA 709 models or a BACnet server object BACnet models which exists on the device Most of such objects are either write only output NV BACnet input objects or read only input NV BACnet output objects They are therefore represented by one data object with the appropriate direction One exception to this rule are BACnet value objects which may be read and written and which are therefore represented by two data objects just like registers e Remote Network Object A re
354. ss of the L Vis device which will run the original L Vis project o Port The port number for OPC access Default is port 80 e Download together with L Vis project Checking this option will instruct the configuration software to download the automatically generated LWEB project LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 163 LOYTEC together with the L Vis project whenever a project download is executed This will make sure that the LWEB project on the device always matches the currently running L Vis project which is important for the LWEB project to work e Use Iweb2 file format This option will use the new lweb2 file format instead of the traditional Iweb format when building the LWEB project You may turn this option on if your LWEB 800 client already supports lweb2 or if you are testing the new LWEB 802 client software which can only read Iweb2 files 13 5 Mail Account This page allows configuring the SMTP mail account used to deliver E Mails To use the mail feature the following conditions must be met e The device must be connected to a TCP IP network and must be able to communicate with the desired SMTP server In many cases this server will be outside of the current subnet Therefore it is important that the gateway address and the network mask settings on the L VIS are correct e At least one DNS server address must be set on the L VIS device if the SMTP server is given as a DNS name which is usually the case
355. st the properties of each control as you like or leave them at the defaults which should be fine for this demo Bitmaps will be added to the bitmap control in a later step 2 4 6 Connect the Data Points At this point connect data points to the controls Especially for text and bitmap controls it helps to connect the data points early since the configuration of the controls property will depend on the data point connected you will see why this 1s the case in a minute To add a data point to a control select 4dd Data Point from the controls context menu The dialog which was used before to create the required data points will appear for selection of the desired data points This dialog is explained in detail in chapter 8 14 For now we just use it to select the data points which should be connected to the control A data point is selected by a double click or by selecting one or more points multi select is possible using the shift key and using the Select button Use the above procedure to add the binary client mapping to the text control the analog client mapping to the numeric control the binary server object to the bitmap control and the binary client mapping to the bar control NOTE When you add the binary point to the text control another object called a mapping table will be created automatically and will be initialized to map the two known states of the binary data point to the state texts listed in the objects properties
356. stem registers e Lock open pages after This sets a timeout after which the system resets the current access level back to 0 if no user input was detected auto logout e Go to default page after This sets a timeout after which the system will switch back to the page marked as the default page if no user input was detected 13 1 2 Timeout Values This section is used to define various time limits The following timeout values are currently available e Leave edit mode after The amount of time after which a control which is currently in edit mode accepting user input and is not being used will cancel the input operation possibly restoring the value which was in effect before the user input was started e Popup menu after The amount of time the user has to touch the screen on an empty area to pull up the navigation menu In projects where navigation is usually accomplished by custom buttons on the screen this timeout can be set to a high value Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 159 LOYTEC 13 1 3 Sound e Hide menu after The amount of idle time after which an open navigation menu is closed automatically without changing to a different page e Hide selection after The amount of idle time after which the selection frame of the last used control is removed e Signal long press after The amount of time a control has to be touched to trigger a long press action If the control is released within a shorte
357. sualization and may be accessible by other devices on the network currently only possible on BACnet networks e Remote Devices This folder is used to collect all remote calendars schedulers and alarm client objects which were created from network scan data For each remote device a subfolder will be created where the objects referencing this device are collected Note that references to normal external data points go into the External NV or Client Mappings folder Using the context menu on a folder sub folders may be created to organize the available objects If new objects are created automatically they are usually placed in the base folder and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub folders 9 2 2 Data Object List At the top right a list of all data objects which are available in the selected folder is shown From this list objects may be selected including multi select in order to modify some of their properties A double click will select the data object and then close the window same as the OK button which is useful when adding new data point objects to the object tree in the main window The columns of the list will vary depending on the type of objects shown Always visible are the data object name and the unique ID by which this object may be referenced Also shown is the number of times this object is currently referenced from the main object tree the L VIS project Only data objects which are currently unused the
358. suitable access level can be set directly without using a PIN code For security reasons it is possible to change the PIN code for each level by writing the new PIN code to the respective PIN code Set register There is one register for each of the access levels 1 through 15 The new PIN codes will be stored on the device and remain in effect until a new project 1s loaded with a special option set telling the device to reset its PIN codes to the values stored in the project Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 166 LOYTEC 14 2 Undo Redo The current version of the configuration software provides a simple form of undo and redo To make use of this feature it is required to take a snapshot of the project from time to time by pressing the Snapshot button in the tool bar using the Snapshot command from the Edit menu or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl A Typically a snapshot will be taken before major changes are done to the project Once there is at least one snapshot in the internal snapshot buffer the undo and redo functions become available Using the Undo function the project can be restored to the previous state Using Redo the project can be restored to the next state the state it was in before undo was executed With multiple snapshots of the project in the buffer it is possible to move back and forth between the individual versions without having to save each of these versions to a temporary file on the PC T
359. t in lowercase am or pm or a corresponding string for the current locale The time in a m or p m notation In the POSIX locale this is equivalent to 1 M S Yop The time in 24 hour notation H M SU For a version including the seconds see T below The number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 UTC The second as a decimal number range 00 to 61 A tab character The time in 24 hour notation H M sS The day of the week as a decimal range 1 to 7 Monday being 1 See also w The week number of the current year as a decimal number range 00 to 53 starting with the first Sunday as the first day of week 01 See also V and W The ISO 8601 1988 week number of the current year as a decimal number range 01 to 53 where week 1 is the first week that has at least 4 days in the current year and with Monday as the first day of the week See also U and W The day of the week as a decimal range 0 to 6 Sunday being 0 See also u The week number of the current year as a decimal number range 00 to 53 starting with the first Monday as the first day of week 01 The preferred date representation for the current locale without the time The preferred time representation for the current locale without the date The year as a decimal number without a century range 00 to 99 The year as a decimal number including the century The time zone as hour offset from GMT Required to emit RFC82
360. t matches any single character in that list if the first character of the list is the caret then it matches any character not in the list For example the regular expression 0123456789 matches any single digit Within a bracket expression a range expression consists of two characters separated by a hyphen It matches any single character that sorts between the two characters inclusive using the locale s collating sequence and character set For example in the English locale a d is equivalent to abcd Most meta characters lose their special meaning inside lists but some characters must be placed at specific positions as pointed out below e To include a literal place it first in the list e To include a literal place it anywhere but first e To include a literal place it last The following special characters and symbols exist e The period matches any single character e The symbol Nw is a synonym for any alphanumeric character and NW is a synonym for any non alphanumeric character e The caret and the dollar sign are meta characters that respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a line e The symbols lt and gt respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a word e The symbol b matches the empty string at the edge of a word and NB matches the empty string provided it s not at the edge of a word A regular expression may be followed by one of several repetiti
361. t of bitmap controls is placed Each bitmap represents a page or a submenu In the example a text control is placed below each bitmap icon An action object which executes a switch to a linked page is assigned to each bitmap control On the bottom of the example page three additional bitmaps are placed which have action assigned to switch pages back and forth and to open the system menu Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 201 LOYTEC Using the icon menus it is also possible to implement the whole navigation without the default menu In that case the main menu page should have the checked the default page checkbox in the Menu Page tab 16 1 3 Taskbar Menu To simulate a PC environment a system with a setup with a task bar can be created Figure 31 mTE Ele E Model Frneore Yew Hep D HibcosseqTS Status Subsystem 1 15 ONNET Usage Sree rd tito tan E Root Mens Gene Common Properes Mapping Data Poet Color Text Bimap To Screen Coordriies z Af 1 With 320 FF osen X rofa Hn nemen Bimap mma ESO Feed g E mar Menu 00 00 00 Menus2 ems Pages 12 Cortrols 110 Detaports 13 Sce 2515 For reb press F1 Figure 31 Taskbar menu The taskbar is formed by a bitmap control The bitmap for the menu button is placed on top of the taskbar bitmap An action object is assigned to the menu button bitmap This action object opens the main menu In the example a da
362. t the poll attribute to CLEAR when you create the output variable otherwise you will not be able to send out any values through this NV Also the poll attribute of the input NV should be SET so that L VIS is able to fetch an initial value when it boots up Now bind the output NV to the input NV so that we can send receive values 2 3 3 Start the L VIS Configuration Software If possible run the configuration software in plug in mode from within your network management tool Open the context menu of the L VIS device block in your drawing and select Configure to start the configuration software NOTE For network management tools which do not support plug ins start the program in standalone mode and connect to your device via TCP IP or CEA 709 over a LOYTEC NIC When started in plug in mode a connection dialog will appear and ask for an optional IP connection to the device If the device can be reached via TCP IP enter the required data here and press Connect otherwise just press Cancel to continue without IP connection The configuration software contacts the device finds out what model and firmware version it 1s selects the correct settings and disables the corresponding menus so that you may not change them The main window will show an empty L VIS project The list of dynamic network variables available on the device is automatically read in and a list of corresponding data points to access the NVs is genera
363. ta points need to be visualized They are always instantiated full screen that is one control per page e Scheduler Control Used to visualize schedule data points These controls are always instantiated full screen similar to trend controls e Alarm List Control These controls are instantiated full screen to visualize alarm server client data points Note that the control will not use the full page LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 171 LOYTEC height since it will be followed by three lines of extra information related to alarm server and client data points Note that the configured defaults are stored with the project such that when you open the project the next time the same defaults still apply 14 7 3 Page Template To further customize the generated pages the project builder can be instructed to instantiate a given template on each of the generated pages This template may be used to define additional content like a navigation bar or other static page content like a company logo In case the auto generated page header is activated the template may be used to place a colored bar where the header will be located NOTE Do not forget to set the page margins when generating content such that areas occupied by objects from your template are not also used by the project builder The most common objects used in such a template would be buttons for navigation such that the user does not need to open the menu The
364. tains a line for each object type number Note that lines for standard object types can be omitted e lvis units csv This is the unit text sheet The file contains a line for each engineering unit enumerator value Note that lines for standard units can be omitted NOTE First download the project to the device wait for the device to restart and then access the EDE files The device will create files matching the loaded configuration when it starts 12 2 BACnet Network Settings Version 4 5 For BACnet models selecting the command Network Settings from the File menu of the main window opens a small dialog to configure BACnet specific settings Currently the only setting available is the desired character code to be used for string type properties of local server objects object name and description as well as state texts Since all strings in an L VIS project are Unicode strings ISO 10646 the default setting is to use UCS 2 encoded strings for BACnet properties However especially in the US market there are many tool vendors which do not support UCS 2 strings and are completely unable to display such strings in their tools even if the string itself contains only ASCII characters If the device 1s to be used together with such systems the character set can be restricted to either ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 which is a subset of ISO 10646 and sufficient for most western languages or even further to ANSI X3 4 US ASCII for
365. te since there is no more entry to define an upper bound For practical reasons the first entry in the table always ignores the entered limit and is also used for any value lower than its own limit Here 1s an example with four entries Value Text Displayed when value is 10 10 19 9999 20 49 9999 gt 50 Once a mapping is defined it can be stored to a file Save button and loaded Load button to define the mapping for other controls in subsequent projects This way an archive of frequently used mappings can be built for use in various projects To use the same mapping for other controls of the same project just copy and paste the mapping table object in the tree view The same mapping table can be used in both directions Translating incoming values to texts bitmaps or colors as well as looking up a value to send out when the user selects a given element from the mapping table via a dropdown list or a push button browses the table to find the next entry NOTE All texts bitmaps and colors used in a mapping table are included in the file when the mapping table is saved so that the mapping file is self contained and can be loaded and used on different PCs even when the source bitmap files may not be available To define the color for a single entry either select the entry from the list and click the color button to the right of the text input field or directly click in the area to the rig
366. te control which displays the current time is placed on the task bar It would also be possible to add further icons to the taskbar which open other pages Also icons which are only displayed when an alarm occurs could be added 16 1 4 Bitmap Menu The bitmap menu shows a navigation using full screen bitmaps with touch sensitive zones On the main page the Floor 1 can be selected and on the floor page the upper left room The back button brings the user one level back Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 202 LOYTEC ii Menu_example 1 L Vis Configuration Fie Edit Model Firmware View Help jDG M Xm 4 ex Status witing data 5 Text Control Root Menu Bitmap Menu Tower Overview Floor text Ef Root Menu G3 Tab Menus g Icon Menu Taskbar z Bitmap Menu 5 Tower Overview 9 Back Icon Q Floor 1 Selection AT Floor text 4Q Floor 2 Selection AT Floor text 49 Floor 3 Selection Floor Plan Room Page Setup Item Global Objects For Help press F1 16 2 Light Control General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Text Bitmap Text r Screen Coordinates Floor 1 Left 1 width 39 M Auto Resize Top 185 Height 8 Resize Now 3 r Bitmap Font 4 L ema al 06x08 ROM Fixed R x ROM font 256 glyphs tex Menus 2 Items 9 Pages 15 Controls 140 Datapoints 16 Size 571l 7 Figure 32 Bitmap menu c
367. te of data updates as well as the number of other devices communicating on the same channel actual maximum resources which are practically useable may vary significantly These numbers are therefore shown with a to denote that they are estimates and your mileage may vary NOTE Slow networks like MS TP or FT 10 may be overloaded long before the limits specified in this table are reached It is the responsibility of the project engineer to design the project according to the limits of the network and the communication peers involved Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 188 LOYTEC Version 4 5 Resource Total number of data points OPC Tags User Registers NVs static dynamic External NVs Alias NVs ECS and CEA709 1 A mode Address table entries 15 for CEA709 1 A LONMARK Calendar objects patterns LONMARK Scheduler objects LONMARK Alarm Servers BACnet objects analog binary multi state BACnet client mappings BACnet scheduler objects BACnet calendar objects BACnet notification classes alarm server Trend Logs Total trended data points Total aggregated size E mail templates Math objects Alarm Logs Connections local Connections global L WEB Clients Model 3E100 ME200 3E11x ME21x 524 n a 524 n a 100 n a 100 n a n a 10 n a 10 o w I 250 250 250 250 l LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 189 LOYTEC 15 Appendix A
368. ted These data points will be used in a later step If no dynamic NVs were created in the previous step the required NVs and data points will be created in the configuration software later on NOTE In case the device was not commissioned yet or there are other communication problems the plug in will display a warning message saying that it could not communicate with the device and therefore was not able to determine model or firmware version In this case you have to commission the device or find out why it cannot be commissioned Typical errors are devices in the wrong mode jumper set for CEA 852 but connected to FT 10 or vice versa or communication problems on the channel itself Especially on a channel as complex as CEA 852 there are a number of possible reasons why you may not be able to communicate with the device Version 4 5 The main window is divided in tree major sections Tree View On the left side of the main window is a tree view showing all objects you created so far and how they relate to each other for example a menu object may have menu item objects attached to it a menu item object may have page objects and sub menu objects attached and a page object contains the elements to display and enter data these elements are called controls in this manual You may navigate through this tree and select an object from it or drag and drop objects to move them around in the hierarchy for example grab a control from one
369. tely obvious such as a moving sunblind or an arbitrary area on the screen which can be filled with a variable color useful to mark open windows in a building for example The basic application of a bar control uses a scale on one side of the bar including tick marks If the value represents a temperature a small dot is sometimes included at the lower end of the bar to make it look like a thermometer In this configuration the bar control consists of the following elements e Scale The numbers on one side of the bar which are evenly spaced out and calculated to be easy to read While resizing the bar in the LCD preview the scale is constantly updated to show the most suitable scale for the given value range and size e Tick Marks These are the small indicators next to the bar They are calculated automatically to be evenly spaced out while representing a round step value between two tick marks If the scale is disabled the tick marks may be much closer to each other e Dot At the lower end of the bar a dot symbolizes a thermometer e Frame The actual bar which displays the current value has a one pixel wide frame around it e Bar Inside the frame is the bar which actually shows the current value With increasing values the bar moves up or to the right e Knob A bitmap may be used to display a moving knob or handle which is normally shown centered around the current value but can also be shifted by a constant offset in
370. ter 2 value rRecCounterValue 9 Back Icon i Show Main Menu Setup Menu Global Objects Math Objects Counter amp Increment by 10 Decrement by 10 Merge Bits For Help press F1 LOYTEC DoR Status Subsystem 1 L VIS ONNET General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Menu Page Page Menu View Timeout 0 sec Container Width 100 Locked Page Bitmap Width 1 Invisible Page z T Default Page Scrollbar Width Enable Background D LOYTEC www loytec com Counter 1 Counter 2 Menus 1 Items 3 Pages 6 Controls 44 Datapoints 41 Size 134l 4 Figure 37 Counter demo configuration The counter demo shows how to use a bar graph control to simulate the fill level of a container An empty container is formed by a bitmap control On top of the bitmap control a bar graph control is placed All relevant colors except the Bar Bitmap color are set transparent so that the bar graph forms the filling of the container LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 207 LOYTEC 17 Revision History Date Version Author Description 2004 11 03 1 1 NR Initial revision V1 1 2004 06 04 1 2 NR New screenshots added configuration chapter fixes 2006 01 24 1 3 NR Changes for L VIS 3E100 2006 04 04 1 5 1 NR Added documentation for color mapping theft protection Updates after review 2006 10 13 2 0 0 CZ Rewrote a large part of the manual to make it more useful
371. th values to define the range for the condition above max only the maximum value is required and for the condition below min only the minimum value needs to be filled in e Define the Action that should be taken The basic choice here is to have the alarm generator SET the alarm when the condition is satisfied and also CLEAR the alarm when the condition is no longer satisfied However you may want to only SET the alarm when the condition is met and not clear it again because you may require the user to manually clear the alarm later In this case use the set on alarm enter action which will only set the alarm but will never clear it To actually clear the alarm you can either use other means to update the alarm output variable or you can have a separate input on your alarm generator and define a rule for this input which will eventually clear the alarm using the clear on alarm leave action e As the last step define the desired output either for both conditions set and clear or for only one of them The required input fields will be active while the other ones will be grayed out Note that the description field may currently only contain ASCII characters The above procedure needs to be repeated for all connected input data points 8 11 2 Application Hints Version 4 5 While it is pretty straight forward to configure a simple alarm generator to output an alarm when for example a temperature reaches a certain m
372. the same template is executed the template will not be created again However if significant changes were done to the template in the meantime the second paste operation will no longer recognize the edited template as suitable compared to the template from the source project and will therefore create a fresh copy of the template from the source 7 2 4 XML Export Import Using the Export to XML command objects in the tree view may be exported to an XML file The exported object will include all child objects but there will be no information about loaded user fonts or data objects included in the XML output so that importing the XML file into a different project may lead to unresolved references to fonts or data objects if the project configuration of the destination project differs from the source project The mport from XML command is similar in function to a paste command The difference Is that it reads the object to paste from a given XML file instead of the windows clipboard NOTE The XML export and import functions are intended to be used for custom tools which may be able to build a complete project in XML format out of basic building blocks which were prepared and exported to XML fragments Based on information in a network database a custom tool may read the individual XML building blocks which for example describe individual pages of the project and put them together into a complete project which may be loaded into t
373. the alarm generators property page where the monitoring rules can be defined NOTE It is sometimes useful to connect the same input data point twice or more times to the same alarm generator when the desired alarm conditions are too complex to cover in one rule for example different rules for alarm set and alarm clear or multiple non overlapping value ranges which should trigger an alarm In this case assign different names to the connected data points on the General property page so that you may distinguish between them later Version 4 5 Once the required input data points are connected the alarm generator needs one output data point to which the result should be written The desired output data point must be connected before the alarm generator can be configured because the type of data point determines the configuration options The following data point types may be used as outputs for the alarm generator e Alarm Server On CEA 709 devices a local alarm server data point may be connected to deliver the alarm to remote alarm clients and display the alarm on an alarm list control The alarm server keeps record of all pending alarms delivers them to any connected clients and manages acknowledgement of alarms e Scalar Value Any data point representing a single scalar value for example a register In this case the alarm generator uses the connected data point as a Boolean value setting it to either 0 OFF or 1 ON Using
374. the control to normal visibility mode in case it was invisible Show on Top Makes the control visible and places it in front of any other controls on the screen overruling the Z order defined in the project Start blinking Turns on an automatic blink function Depending on the Options on the right side the control starts to blink at a slow or fast speed It continues to do so until it receives a different visibility command like show or hide Blink on condition This command can be used to control the blink function based on a condition While the result of the formula is nonzero the control will be blinking A zero result will stop the blinking and set the control either static visible or invisible depending on the option Visible when inactive Turn the option on to have the control visible while it is not blinking Visible on condition This command instructs the control to be either visible or invisible depending on the result of the formula 0 invisible all other results visible For cases where the visibility of a control is directly related to the value of a data point or a logical expression it is easier to use this command instead of two distinct commands to hide and show the control Top visible on condition Same as Visible on condition but places the control in front of any other controls in visible state Left Position v1 The control is moved on the screen such that its left edge is at the absolute horizontal
375. the data points scaling factors this Boolean value may be translated into any two values one to signal alarm clear and one for alarm set This is most useful if the generated alarm is to be processed further or displayed on the L VIS device for example to trigger actions or display warning messages e Multi State Value Similar to a scalar value but the alarm generator can be configured to set the output to any of the available states which can be selected easily from a dropdown box Useful on BACnet devices where a multi state point may be used to signal a number of different alarm conditions e SNVT switch Available on CEA 709 devices a data point representing an entire switch variable may be connected In this case the alarm generator sets both value and state of the connected switch to either ON 100 or OFF 0 Useful in cases where the generated alarm is to be processed by a remote device which uses one switch input for each alarm LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 102 LOYTEC e SNVT alarm2 Available on CEA 709 models a data point representing a SNVT alarm2 structured NV may be connected In this case the user may set all elements of the alarm2 structure to the desired values including the alarm priority and a description This is most useful to communicate the result to a remote device which provides a compatible alarm input variable 8 11 1 Alarm Generator Properties Once all inputs and the output are co
376. the defaults which should be fine for this demo Bitmaps will be added to the bitmap control in a later step 2 3 7 Connect the Data Points Version 4 5 At this point connect data points to the controls Especially for text and bitmap controls it helps to connect the data points early since the configuration of the controls property will depend on the data point connected you will see why this 1s the case in a minute To add a data point to a control select Add Data Point from the controls context menu A dialog will appear which is used to manage and select data points This dialog is explained in detail in chapter 8 14 for now we just use it to select our data points which should have been created for us already Select the folder Local NVs from the tree view at the left of the dialog There should be two items one for the input NV and one for the output NV we created earlier LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 21 LOYTEC NOTE In case you created the dynamic NVs after you started the plug in the data points will not be there yet In this case close the data point dialog and push the button two positions right from the connect button The tool tip of this button reads Update Data Points It will re scan the currently available dynamic NVs on the device and create the required data points for you If you added NVs while the plug in was open hit the update button to get the required data points added to your
377. the desired devices and complete the templates by linking the data point references to the automatically created data points The resulting XML file could represent an entire L VIS project which can be loaded into the configuration software and written to the L VIS device The complete XML schema specification for the individual parts of the configuration which is required to develop external tools may be obtained from LOYTEC on request 14 15 Using Images Version 4 5 The LVIS 3E100 and LVIS ME200 devices use a 256 color display with a standard VGA palette All controls and images can therefore only use colors from the VGA palette which is the same as the default Windows palette in 256 color mode It is usually available for selection in image editors when the drawing mode is set to indexed color Projects of this type are also referred to as VGA projects LVIS 3E11x and LVIS ME21x models support true color images which are physically displayed on the LCD in 65k colors RGB 565 format This type of project contains embedded JPG or PNG data which is used by the device to render the images Images using PNG format can also contain transparency information in a so called alpha channel If a true color image is loaded like for example a JPG 32 bit BMP or similar the configuration software will automatically create a VGA color version using a Floyd Steinberg dithering algorithm When used in a VGA project this color reduced version is use
378. the device and the template from the database and re run the plug in registration 2 3 1 2 CEA 709 without LNS Assign a network address Use your network management tool to add the device to the database and assign a network address to it Alternatively go to the CEA 709 page of the setup menu and enter a suitable network address manually then press the button SET ONLINE to activate the address 2 3 2 Create Dynamic NVs LNS only Version 4 5 In this example we will create two dynamic network variables of type SNVT switch on the device one input and one output and bind them together turnaround binding to show how to display and send out data LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 18 LOYTEC NOTE If your network management tool does not support dynamic NVs just skip this step The required data points will then be created from within the configuration software in a later step as static NVs First we need a functional block to place the new network variables in Create one of the 8 available L VIS functional blocks for example L VIS 0 to hold the two variables Next create the two switch variables For the complementary NV required to create the dynamic NV browse to the Switch object of your L VIS device and select one of the two switch variables available there the direction does not matter More information about dynamic network variables can be found in section 11 4 NOTE Make sure to se
379. the loaded font file is a font catalog for example ttc you may also select the desired face which should be rendered NOTE Vector fonts on the 12 and 15 devices are rendered with anti aliasing technique This may lead to faded line segments when the line width falls below the LCD resolution at small font sizes or For this reason some vector fonts contain optimized pixel versions for small sizes which are automatically used in place of a rendition of the vector data If a font does not provide optimized data for small sizes anti aliasing may be turned off 14 13 1 Font Manager Version 4 5 All custom fonts are managed in a separate dialog which can be opened either via the command Fonts from the Edit menu or via the button Open Font Manager on the Common Properties page The dialog contains a list of currently loaded fonts with some extra information like the type of font size number of characters contained in the font the number of times the font is currently used in the project and the source file from which the font was originally imported or where it was found the last time it was searched Below the list are some buttons to manage the loaded fonts add new fonts and remove unused ones e Add Opens a file dialog to select a font file The new font will be added to the list of loaded fonts 1f not already loaded In case of a vector font an additional dialog will appear asking for the desired size of the fo
380. the red down arrow in the toolbar or select Write Project to the Device from the Connections menu and confirm the dialog Once the project file is written to the device the L VIS reboots and shows the tutorial project on the display 2 4 8 Test the Project You should now be able to use the device to set the state and the value of the two server objects and immediately see the results on the client mapping input points since they refer to the local server objects To change the binary server object state press the bitmap control A dropdown list with the two icons you assigned to the ON and OFF states in the mapping table will appear Now select the desired 1con to set the state NOTE Whenever an element is selected from a dropdown list of icons or texts the device will search the mapping table to find the value associated with the selected element This value will then be assigned to the output data points which are connected to the control Version 4 5 The new state will be written to the server object and will be received immediately by the client mapping input The new state should now also be displayed on the text control using the texts which you specified in the mapping table LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 27 LOYTEC To change the value of the analog server object select the bar control and move the bar up and down The current value will be written to the object received back in through the client
381. the server must have the auto member option enabled No additional reboot is required Check configuration server To check if the L VIS device was correctly added to the channel enter the CEA 852 RNI page in the setup menu The configuration server field should now display the IP address of the configuration server LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 35 LOYTEC 6 Operating L VIS 6 1 Touch Screen 6 1 1 Operation Version 4 5 This section describes how to operate the touch display of the L VIS device Most operations should be fairly intuitive so that users of the device do not need to read a manual before they are able to operate the device L VIS devices use a resistive touch screen This type of screen can only detect one touch position at a time that is you cannot press two buttons at once The screen delivers raw data which must be converted to LCD pixel positions before it can be used therefore a touch screen of this type needs calibration All devices come pre calibrated from the factory and should be accurate enough to operate the device out of the box To operate a device using very small control elements or from an unusual viewing angle it may be necessary for the user to re calibrate the screen using the built in calibration function which is available in the setup menu section commands The procedure is explained in more detail in the next section The touch pressure is currently not measured and has no eff
382. the value in radians whose cosine is v1 Returns the arc tangent of v1 that is the value in radians whose tangent is v1 Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of v1 that is the value whose hyperbolic sine is v1 Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of v1 that is the value whose hyperbolic cosine is v1 Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of v1 that is the value whose hyperbolic tangent is v1 Returns the value of the Gamma function for the argument v1 The Gamma function is defined by Gamma x integral from 0 to infinity of t x 1 e t dt It is defined for every real number except for no positive integers For nonnegative integral m one has Gamma m 1 m and more generally for all x Gamma x 1 x Gamma x For x lt 0 5 one can use Gamma x Gamma 1 x PI sin PI x computes the absolute value of the argument v1 8 14 Trigger Objects Version 4 5 Trigger objects are the inverse of action objects While action objects usually receive input from a control and use this input to execute some actions unrelated to the control itself for example update some data points trigger objects work in the opposite direction They receive input from data points and cause the control to which they are connected to execute some action for example show another page of information or clear the input value Trigger objects are most often used with data log controls to control the recording of data and navigate through the recorded informatio
383. ther with a mapping table The input for the animated bitmap is generated by a mathematic object The mathematic object is feed by the system time and performs a modulo operation on this input An additional enable register parameter allows enabling or disabling this modulo operation 16 4 Sunblind Demo The project Solution_examples_manual lcp contains a Sunblind Demo page Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 204 LOYTEC i Solution examples manual 1 L Vis Configuration File Edit Model Firmware View Help DG X Bac 3 3 Status Subsystem 1 LVIS ONNET Action Root Menu Example Pages Sunblind Example Back Icon go back E Root Menu amp Menu Navigation Main Menu amp Example Pages w Switch Example Sunblind Example 4T Pos 1 Label 4T Pos 2 Label 4T Pos 3 Label O Position 1 Q Position 2 9 Position 3 x V Up Bitmap General Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Action Execute Action HTTP CHINE on selection E Execute once JE times waiting 500 ms after each time ptions Value D LOYTEC Sound buzzerat 1000 Hz forf 1000 ms www loytec com Page Root Menu Menu Navigation Main Menu Stop Bitmap Down Bitmap Back Icon f ao back Animation Example Split Example Counter Demo amp 93 Setup Menu EB Global Objects Math Objects t Counter Increment by 10 Ez Decrement by 1
384. tical bar which displays a temperature e Numeric Input Panel This option instructs the bar control to open a numeric input panel if the control is an input control and the user touches the bar The input panel is placed on the screen such that it does not overlap the bar but as close to the bar as possible This allows the user to enter an exact value on the input panel or drag the bar as usual e Invisible Bar This option disables drawing of the moving bar the fill height If the control is an input control it is still possible to touch and drag to enter values but the current value will not be visualized as a moving bar NOTE As you may have noticed not all of the elements of the bar control can actually be disabled In particular there is no flag to disable the bar frame If the bar graph is used in an application where the frame is not wanted it can still be made invisible Select the same color for the bar frame as you selected for the background and check the option Transparent background The frame will now be invisible 8 5 5 1 Special Application Hints Version 4 5 A powerful way to use bar controls is provided by colors and transparency By disabling all the decoration around the actual bar it is possible to have a rectangular area on the screen which can be filled with a color or made transparent depending on the value of a data point This provides an easy way to selectively hide certain areas of the scr
385. tion moves outside the control while the screen is still being touched e short press The action is triggered when the control is released after it was touched for a period shorter than the configured long press threshold This value can be defined in the project settings and defaults to 1 second See section 13 1 2 for more information e long press The action is triggered when the control is continuously touched for the duration of a long press as configured in the project settings The default 1s one second e show page The action is triggered when the page to which this action object is connected is displayed This trigger mode 1s therefore only available for page actions e leave page The action is triggered when the page to which this action is connected is hidden This trigger mode is therefore only available for page actions NOTE The trigger of touch and release actions while moving the touch position around between controls without releasing the touch screen is consistent with the display of the selection frame Moving from one control to another without releasing the touch screen will cause the selection frame to follow the movement always marking the control which is currently touched The touch and release actions will follow the same pattern triggering the touch action when the selection frame appears and triggering the release action when the selection frame disappears Version 4 5 While the action type is
386. to a TCP IP network most of the following steps do not apply 14 19 1 Device Installation Version 4 5 To run the device with a minimum set of enabled services and maximum security follow the steps below during device installation and configuration e In the project settings set up a PIN code for access level 15 and either check the option Lock pages in setup menu or Hide setup menu e Download the final project to the device and test it access via the configuration software will be disabled later on in the process LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 14 19 2 Ports 186 LOYTEC e Open the Web UI of the device and change the default admin password e Browse to the port configuration open the Ethernet tab and disable FTP Telnet SSH and possibly RNI LVIS 3E1xx or BACnet IP LVIS ME2xx services e On the installed device open the command page of the setup menu and execute the command Disable HTTP Server The device will reboot with the web service disabled Note that this will also disable the OPC XML DA server This Section lists all ports which may be used by the device The port numbers listed here are default settings for their respective services If not stated otherwise the port numbers can be changed Required Ports 1628 udp tcp This is the data exchange port for CEA 852 LON over IP It is required for global data point connections and possibly for control network communication if the device is an
387. to check for such loops when they are caused entirely by internal objects In such a case the project cannot be downloaded into the device and a warning message appears showing the objects which cause the infinite update loop However the configuration software cannot check loops which are closed via the network because it does not have enough information to do this For example if a data point connector is used to connect a switch input SI to a switch output SO this in itself does not constitute a loop at all But when the update of SO on the network is sent to a lamp actuator and the lamp actuators feedback output is connected to the switch input SI the result may be an infinite update loop between the L VIS device and the lamp actuator depending on how the actuator behaves Once the L VIS sends out an update on SO it will be received by LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 174 LOYTEC the lamp actuator This may cause the actuator to send out an update on the feedback output which will be received by L VIS on the input SI which in turn will be copied by the data point connector to the output SO and so on The result can have adverse effects on the network performance and the performance of the devices in the loop so special care should be taken to avoid such setups 14 13 User loaded Fonts Every device has a set of three basic fonts which cover the ISO8859 1 Latin 1 code set in three different sizes To extend the available
388. to the configuration of a scheduler and calendar which is located on another device is done by creating remote scheduler and calendar points These points may either be created from data obtained by a network scan or can be created manually CEA 709 only Here are the steps to create the required points from a network scan e Execute a network scan as described earlier in this document e From the points in the import folder select the scheduler points you are interested in and use the command Use on Device to create suitable remote scheduler points in your project e Note that any existing calendar is automatically imported as well e Adjust the basic settings for the newly created points which are now available in the folder Remote Devices list the object name and description The object name will be used as the name for the scheduler as seen on the display later on e For BACnet also adjust the poll cycle which will be used to periodically fetch the current configuration in case the remote device does not support COV subscriptions e For CEA 709 a static NV is created to receive information from the remote device about changes to the scheduler configuration so that the local device does not need to poll the remote device Set a name for this NV default is nviSchedLink lt number gt and assign it to a suitable function block NOTE Due to the static input NV which is required for a remote CEA 709 scheduler point adding r
389. trol and then select the next entry to determine the new value which is sent out e Select and send previous value Similar to the above mode but the previous entry in the mapping table is selected to determine the next value Below the radio buttons is a check box which when checked causes the control to change direction when either the end of the mapping table is reached that is it switches back and forth between mode 2 and 3 walking through all available entries in the mapping table up and down NOTE Obviously mode 2 and 3 only make sense if a mapping table is attached to the control and the table contains at least two entries A typical use is a table with two entries and the control in mode 2 with direction change enabled This provides a simple ON OFF toggle button To build a push button which only sends out a fixed value when selected no mapping table is required Set up the control using static properties and connect the output data point which should be updated with a certain value Mark the data point to be Constant Value and enter the desired value as the Default Value of the data point Push button mode is very similar to normal input mode except that the control chooses the value to send automatically and that it automatically leaves input mode as soon as the push button is released whereas normal controls remain in the input mode until another object is touched or the input idle time is reached NOTE A
390. trols either right click on the page object in the tree view and choose the control type you want from the context menu or select the page in the tree view and right click in the LCD preview area to reach the same context menu Add one text control one bitmap control one numeric and one bar control to your page Now place the controls on your page so that they do not overlap each other Grab and drag them with the mouse or enter position and size in the Screen Coordinates section of the Common Properties page To resize the controls with the mouse move the pointer to the lower right corner of the controls area in which the value 1s displayed that 1s disregard any decorations around the value area like the scale of a bar control For most control types the value area fills the entire space of the control except for the selection frame For more complex controls like bars and trend logs you can view the value area by changing the Container color on the Color property page Then grab the control at the lower right corner of the container area NOTE The position and size you set on the Common Properties page also refers to the value area of the control not to the selection frame around it This is done so that for example the width and height of a bar does not change when you enable or disable tick marks or scale These are just seen as decoration which can be turned on and off while the area of the value display remains stable Adju
391. ttings Reads or writes the current project settings as configured in the project settings dialog This can also be used to store a default project setup in XML format and import it when a new project is started e Data Point Setup Reads or writes the data point configuration as configured in the data point selection and management dialog Note that all controls and other objects reference data points through their unique ID If the data point configuration 1s replaced while some of the old data points are used by objects in the project these references may be broken or point to wrong data points This function should therefore be used with care for example if both a data point configuration and suitable project pages are imported together e Calendar Config Configuration data for a local calendar Only available if the project contains a local calendar point e Scheduler Config Configuration data for all local scheduler units Only available if the project contains at least one local scheduler The main use of XML import and export 1s to enable external tools to automatically create parts of a project or even a full project based on XML templates prepared using the export functions Such a tool could for example browse a network or a database pick out some devices which should be visualized in an L VIS project select suitable templates from an XML template database create the required data point configuration to allow communication with
392. twork interface at the same time The current state of the RNI module is available in a system register called RMI State It may be used to make a running RNI connection visible on the display as a warning message or other element to alert the user 14 10 Local Data Point Capacity BACnet models are currently fixed to a maximum number of 512 local server objects In most cases the L VIS device operates as a client retrieving and controlling the value of server objects on other devices Therefore there are usually not many server objects required on the L VIS device itself The number of client connections to other devices is limited only by available system resources CEA 709 models allow setting the capacity for local network variables including static and dynamic NVs excluding NVs which the firmware creates automatically in the Network Settings dialog which is accessible from the File menu of the main window The default setting which matches the configuration of an empty L VIS device is 512 and must not be changed if the static interface of the device should stay at default configuration If the static interface is allowed to change the capacity may be increased to support up to 1000 NVs using the input field Max Number of NVs Keep in mind that an increased NV capacity requires system resources which may otherwise be used for the project so this setting should not be set significantly higher than necessary 14 11 Device Model a
393. twork variable dialog This finished the creation of the dynamic network variable and shows the window which allows to bind the dynamic network variable to the complementary network variable Figure 10 ziaixi Project Edit Clipboard Tree Tree display Views Tools Plugins Lang Help 8 dmt EFI E AR waa amp 7 2 Ql j me se oa c m B T gg At subsystems New variable connection E Name NvConnt Create 9 49 Lorient sees i ER Locations B Sensor E Mi EEN 5b SB Lvis L vis out nvo Value in nvi lValue H B Static interface a BS Lis 1 Help SHE Interface P dm nvidl Value EE Connections 5 Sensor SHE Interface Hifi Node Object 0 Closed Loop Sensor 1 eut nvoUTValue Remove Remove all Bemove Remove all im nvi lValueFb EE Connections Service Defaut Y Receive timer cDetauo 7 Retescount lt Default gt Repeattimer lt Default gt T Authenticated V Priority Transmit timer Defaub Broadcasting Never C Group C Always Use alias for Selector conficts Unicast Al to defaults SSS S ap ap CR m OX m e S Nodes nvs v LonMark em Routers Template fi Conns Set Ready I IN fAdmin Advanced 02 03 2004 08 37 Figure 10 Network variable connection window 11 4 3 Alex To create dyn
394. u item which will be shown to the left of the item text e Go back once more to the menu objects of your project and open the Menu Page property page For each menu set the Container Width such that the longest item text fits the menu If your items use graphical icons as well you may need to adjust the width reserved to the left of the item text such that the widest icon will fit In case the menu contains more items than fit on the screen make the scroll bar wider so that the user may easily grab and drag it with the index finger The default width of the scroll bar is designed to look good for menus which do not need a scroll bar e Now go through your pages and lay out the controls as desired While a page is selected go to the Common Properties page to select a background bitmap for the page or go to the Color page to select a background color That s all you should need to configure for the page itself at this time Note that each page for which you set a full page background image will require an additional 78kB of memory RAM To place small logos or page headers use a bitmap control instead and select a suitable background color for the rest of the page This will save a large amount of memory e As you lay out the controls it is a good idea to also set their properties to modify their appearance since this will ultimately change the size of the controls and may have an impact on their placement on the page For text and bitmap co
395. ulations on connected input data points and assign the result to the connected output data points The object calculates its formula every time an update is received via one of the connected input data points so that the output value is always accurate If a complex formula is used which operates on a large number of input LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 105 LOYTEC data points the resulting update rate of each input data point should be considered so that the resulting total update rate remains reasonable 8 13 1 Math Object Properties Mathematical objects are configured on the Math Object property page where basically the formula is entered Before doing so it is important to connect the required input data points to the object so that they are available as variables for use in the formula All connected input data points are listed on the left side of the property page and variable names are assigned to the data points in the order in which they are connected to the math object Variable names start with v1 and continue with increasing numbers like v2 v3 v4 and so on There is a limit of 127 input data points per math object Formulas using more than 127 input variables must be split into individual sub expressions which should be done anyways since a formula with such a large number of variables becomes unreadable NOTE Always keep in mind that the order in which the input data points are connected to the math ob
396. umeric control The format string is composed of zero or more directives ordinary characters not 9 which are copied unchanged to the output stream and conversion specifications each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments Each conversion specification is introduced by the character and ends with a conversion specifier In between there may be in this order zero or more flags an optional minimum field width an optional precision and an optional length modifier For some numeric conversions a radix character decimal point or thousands grouping character is used The actual character used depends on the implementation The L VIS device uses as radix character and does not have a grouping character 14 18 1 1 Flags The character is followed by zero or more of the following flags The value should be converted to an alternate form For o conversions the first character of the output string is made zero by prefixing a 0 if it was not zero already For x and X conversions a nonzero result has the string Ox or OX for X conversions prepended to it For a A e E f F g and G conversions the result will always contain a decimal point even 1f no digits follow it normally a decimal point appears in the results of those conversions only if a digit follows For g and G conversions trailing zeros are not removed from the result as they would otherwise be For other c
397. uration of 1 second the time weighted average value for these 10 seconds will be 2 because 0 9s 20 1s 10s 2 In contrast the time independent arithmetic average value would be 10 0 20 2 Version 4 5 The scale labels and tick marks if enabled are automatically calculated and laid out If the page background already provides a graphic representation of the scale and the control is only used to fill in the data the scale and tick marks may be disabled The best way to lay out the control is to first enable all required decorations scale ticks and grid and then change the size and position of the control to fit the scale LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 72 Version 4 5 LOYTEC Regarding color the trend control is one of the most complex controls to configure since it supports a large number of colors The following colors may be set for trend controls on the Color property page Color Name Element to which the color applies Labels Numbers of the value scale and the time scale Horizontal Grid Vertical Grid Second Grid Horizontal grid lines if the grid is enabled Vertical primary grid lines if the grid is enabled Vertical secondary grid lines if the grid is enabled Buttons Foreground color for button symbols Button Backgr Background color for button symbols Selection Frame Frame drawn around the entire control if the control is selected Axis Tick marks and axis for value and time
398. ured online state CEA 709 models before firmware 4 0 0 only Starting with firmware 4 0 0 this LED indicates an active connection to the built in OPC server This LED either shows the current status of the IP 852 interface in IP 852 mode or the status or the remote network interface RNI in FT 10 mode IP 852 The LED lights green if the device is properly configured and member of an IP 852 channel The LED lights orange when the device is configured in a channel but is waiting for updated channel information from the configuration server In case of errors the LED lights red RNI The LED is dark if RNI is not supported by this device older devices do not have enough node IDs to support RNI The LED is green if the remote network interface is ready for connections and orange if the device is currently in use In case of errors the LED is red This LED shows the status of the MSTP interface if the device is operating in BACnet MSTP mode The LED is green for normal operation orange if there is no token and red if there are communication errors Version 4 5 Table 4 LEDs and Buttons LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 33 LOYTEC 5 Interface Configuration 5 1 Selecting the Interface Version 4 5 Both the CEA 709 units and the BACnet units have two network interfaces and two different types of communication going on which should be clearly distinguished e Communications with the configuration softwa
399. used to sort the available data objects by their category There are a number of predefined folders available e Imported This folder has some sub folders One is used to hold data retrieved from a network scan the other ones are used to display data imported from files Data objects in the import folder are not stored on the L VIS device when the project is downloaded They represent data objects which are available on remote devices and are shown here as templates to create suitable data objects for use on the L VIS device see section 9 3 4 for details e Local NVs Server Objects Objects which represent a local network variable or local server object are located in this folder Select the folder and use the New button or the context menu to create a new local data object e External NVs Client Mappings Objects which reference remote network variables or server objects on other devices without connection to a local network object are located in this folder These are usually data objects which were created from points in the import folder by using the option Use on Device from the context menu of the imported point e Register This is a folder for internal registers created by the user To add a new register select this folder and then use the New button or the context menu to add a new register object As explained before a new register will automatically yield two new data objects read and write e System This is the folder
400. ve this data transfer there are tree objects involved The control element which acts as the interface to the user or any other object which processes data like mathematical objects alarm generators or action objects A data object as the source or sink of data for example an internal user register a system parameter a network variable or a BACnet server object or client mapping A data point object which references a specific data object and thereby links a control to a data source or sink It also defines the properties of this data link for example when new data is to be transferred between the data object and the control and how the data should be converted when it is transferred The control is created as part of the object tree as outlined in the tutorial It exists independently of any register or network object Even if all registers and network objects were to be deleted the control would not be affected The data object itself is not represented as an object in the tree view because it is not part of the user interface and is not bound to any of the other objects in the tree Data objects Version 4 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 88 LOYTEC exist on the device independent from the user interface and are identified by a unique ID They are created and managed in a separate window the Data Point Management and Selection dialog In some cases they are created automatically like the data objects repres
401. vices IP address to the channel on your configuration server which will then contact the device and set the channel wide parameters such as the time server addresses automatically If the configuration server address is entered on the device the server should have the auto member option turned on so that the device may add itself to the channel automatically In any case the result is displayed at the bottom of the CEA 852 setup page where the IP address of the current configuration server is displayed NOTE For security reasons enabling MD5 with a new key will store and activate the key and then reset the input fields to all 0000 so that the current key cannot be seen on the display Once the key is stored that way it may be enabled and disabled using the dropdown list even though the input fields always show 0000 Consider these fields to be used for input of a new key only The BACnet models provide the following additional page e BACnet On this page the BACnet device ID MSTP node address and baud rate for MSTP mode only and the BACnet IP port number for BACnet IP mode only can be set The currently active interface is shown and can be selected using the buttons on the right side of the screen The currently active interface 1s shown in green the other one in red 6 3 1 Custom Setup Menu Starting with version 2 0 of the device firmware the project may use standard controls on standard project pages to set all syste
402. w data points can be used right away to exchange alarm information with the alarm server on the remote device Just connect the new alarm client LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 133 LOYTEC data point to an alarm list control to view and acknowledge alarms reported by the associated alarm server On CEA 709 devices there 1s one extra step to take before the new data point will be operational The new static input NV representing the alarm client on the local device need to be bound to the alarm output of the remote device from which alarms should be received A CEA 709 device normally delivers alarms through an output NV of type SNVT alarm 2 located in the node object of the device therefore the new input NV on the local device must be bound to the alarm output NV of the remote devices node object 9 9 E Mail Templates To make use of the E Mail functions mail templates can be created in the folder called Mail Templates These are actually not data points but are connected to data points and are therefore managed in the same window For each different type of mail a template must be created and set up as required The template may then either be used to send mail when one or more trigger data points reach a certain value or the template may be triggered by an action object see the description of the action object in section 8 8 In addition to the mail template setup the mail account setup as described in section 13 5 must be
403. w model number are done automatically After the device restarted and the database was updated the device is re commissioned and ready to use Keep in mind that during the download a new model number was selected and the project should be saved after the download so that the model number in the file on the PC matches the one in the device If the network management does not support plug ins or the project is downloaded via TCP IP to reduce the download time the device is usually first programmed standalone and then integrated using an XIF file Version 4 5 Connect to the device using TCP IP or CEA709 The configuration software will determine the device model and firmware Load or design the project similar to the above procedures Open the Network Settings dialog and set the Program ID Model Number to the desired value This will be the last byte of the resulting program ID of the device Make sure there are no other devices in the same network using the same model number but a different set of static network variables Also zero is reserved for a device without static NVs so the valid range is 1 to 254 If required activate the CEA 709 1 A restricted mode LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 137 LOYTEC e Download the project to the device A warning message will appear notifying the user that this operation will now change the static interface of the device and that the configuration software will not be able to
404. ware version On the property page of the action the Link information line will show the current link which can be edited either by dropping of the desired target page onto the action object or by opening the link editor dialog by pressing the Select button The link editor provides the following options to set up the page link e External Link This type of page link is available for LWEB projects It consists of a URL to another LWEB project to load and a UID of the page within the external project The LWEB client will load the specified project and show the indicated page e Internal Link This type of link is a relative path from the page on which the action is located to the desired target page The path is built from individual path components separated by a forward slash Each path component can be the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual Version 4 5 99 LOYTEC name of an object as shown on the General property page or one of several special tokens to navigate through the object hierarchy O U D M1 Ix Px bxfy This token means Move one hierarchy level up For example starting at the page where the action is located the token will move up to the menu item in which the page is located Another would move up further to the menu in which the item is located and so on This token moves up one object on the same hierarchy level that is it moves to the previous sibling F
405. wing detailed description of the individual connection methods LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 14 LOYTEC 2 2 1 1 LNS Connections This method connects to the device from within the LNS based network management tool The software is run as a plug in and all communication with the device is done through LNS meaning that you can use any network interface which is supported by LNS If your device is integrated into the network using an LNS based tool your device is managed by LNS and you need to add or remove static network variables from your project or otherwise change the static interface of the device you must use this connection method to download your project since the configuration software needs to do several adjustments to the LNS database during this process If your changes to the project do not cause changes to the static network interface for example you are just working on the graphics adding or modifying controls and so on it is more efficient to use one of the other connection methods The configuration software will detect any change in the static network interface beforehand and display a warning before you commit to the project download Starting with version 4 0 2 of the configuration software this operating mode can be combined with a parallel TCP IP connection to transfer project data efficiently while maintaining a connection to the LNS database for database updates ADVANTAGES e No need to
406. xecuted As long as the conditions are met the action will be repeated again with a configurable delay between each execution as above If the delay is set to 0 the action will be executed exactly once like the condition execute once but only of the value condition applies e While touched The action is executed as long as the parent object is being touched As above observe that this condition must be satisfied at the time the action trigger fires or the action will not be executed In practice this means that the condition while touched is useful only in conjunction with the action trigger on touch or in rare cases on value update but not together with on selection because selection of a control implies release of the touch screen At this point the Execute Action part of the property page should be filled in completely The contents of this section should result in a meaningful command when read as a sentence for example Sound buzzer on touch Repeat action 3 times waiting 200ms after each time If you read your settings make sure they make sense and match your goals For example you should not end up with a sentence like this Next page on release While touched waiting 100ms after each time The resulting action even though it is possible to configure it this way will not do what you want There are two major problem areas LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 98 LOYTEC e The actio
407. ximum number of schedules supported by each scheduler object This number must be at least 7 since a LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 127 LOYTEC scheduler always needs to provide one schedule for each day of the week default weekly schedule For each special day defined by the calendar an additional daily schedule is required to support it NOTE If the scheduler units are used with the LWEB Master Schedule Configurator and or displayed on a schedule control in extended UI mode this value must be set to a high number because one daily schedule will be required for each event that is entered e Entries in Time Value table This is the total number of entries in each scheduler defining a value template that should apply on a specific day starting at a specific time the time table e Number of value templates This is the maximum number of value templates supported by each scheduler e Data size per value template This specifies the buffer size reserved to hold the data for each value template More data points or bigger data structures require a bigger value buffer e Max number of data point maps Specifies the maximum number of individual data points that this scheduler is able to control As can be seen from the above list it is not easy to configure a LonMark scheduler object There are many technical parameters which need to be set and which require some knowledge of how these scheduler objects work inter
408. xt Gerwial Common Properties Mapping Data Point Color Text Bitmap Name Swich wea Twe Tew Conticl DLOYTEC Comments related to this obyect For Help press FL Figure 16 SNVT switch with a text control 15 1 2 Bitmap Control Version 4 5 Bitmap controls are typically used for information which has only a few states like heating on off light on off This example shows how to use a SNVT_ switch together with a bitmap control It also fixes the value part of the SNVT_switch network variable to 100 and toggles only the state part e Adda bitmap control to the page e Add data points to the control To do this select Add Data Point from the context menu of the control Add a input data point for nviSwitch state and output data points for nvoSwitch state and nvoSwitch value A default mapping between the state input values and the displayed text is automatically added to the control e For the input data point nviSwitch state set the System Startup flag on the Data Point configuration tab e For the nvoSwitch value network variable go to the Data Point configuration tab configure the Default Value to 100 and set the Constant Value flag Set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 191 LOYTEC For the nvoSwitch state network variable set the NV Update Flags value to Focus Loss Select the mapping item in the tree view and go to the Mappi
409. y required and thus not enforced by the software it is in most cases the only meaningful configuration Consider the following example The data point setup contains a set of data point folders one for each room rooml room2 room3 and so on Each room folder contains a sub folder for lighting for example room1 lighting or room2 lighting Now a room template is designed with room as the base folder and a sub template to handle the lighting is instantiated The sub template instance expects a base path for the lighting related data points contained in the lighting folders The only meaningful setting is to select rooml lighting as the base path for the lighting template instance In this case the sub template will use a relative base path of 1 room1 lighting which means that it takes the path which was set for slot 1 of the room template instance and searches for a sub folder called lighting to access the lighting related data points If we would have selected room2 lighting as the base path for the instance of the lighting template inside the room template which we are designing based on room the relative path for the lighting data points would become 1 room1 room2 lighting which means that the lighting template will take the base path 1 of the room template instance move one folder level up and search for room2 lighting to access the lighting related data points In most cases this is not what we want and it is caused by inconsist
410. ystem Strings Pressing the button Setup System Strings opens another dialog where a number of strings can be translated to match the requirements of the project These strings are used by the specialized controls on the device to edit schedules calendars or display alarm lists A set of translations may be given a name in the Preset field which can then be saved using the Add button The translation is then stored on the system and will be available in the Preset dropdown list for re use in other projects 13 2 Extended Settings On this property page some less frequently used options are available 13 2 1 System Flags Version 4 5 The following system flags are currently available e Lock pages in setup menu If this option is checked the pages of the built in system setup menu will be protected at level 15 otherwise they will be public If the default setup menu is not used this option has no effect LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 160 LOYTEC Hide setup menu This option instructs the device not to add a link to the built in setup menu so that the built in setup is not accessible The user may provide customized setup pages instead matching the local language and the design of the other pages See section 6 3 for details on this topic Disable touch gestures This option causes the touch gestures to flip pages and open the setup menu to be turned off Ignore data point value state This is a compatibility o
411. zed in seven columns one for each day of the week e Time Table This page shows the effective time table for a selected day Starting at midnight it lists the presets which will be scheduled Each line consists of the LOYTEC electronics GmbH L VIS User Manual 42 LOYTEC following information The time at which the preset becomes active the time until this preset stays active and the name of the scheduled preset e Event List This page shows a list of all events applicable to a selected day Note that this list does not exactly represent the presets that will be in effect on that day Events may overlap and it depends on the event priority which preset will actually be scheduled e Global Event List This page shows a listing of all events currently stored in the scheduler unit It is similar to the event list but it is not filtered by a certain date Each of the pages consists of a header line with navigation buttons and a heading followed by the contents of the page How these individual pages are used is explained in the next sections 6 2 2 1 Weekly Overview This page displays one week worth of schedule preview on one page The following areas of the page can be selected by the user to execute certain actions e Single and double arrow buttons These buttons are used to navigate to the preview of a different week The single arrow buttons switch to the next or previous week whereas the double arrow buttons move by four w

LVIS User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents